Jeep 2010 Liberty Owners Manual Owner's

2010-Liberty-OM-4th?myyear=15&myvehicle=4&o--button.x=38&o--button 2010 Jeep Liberty Owner's Manual | SERVICE MANUAL OWNERS

2015-10-23

: Jeep Jeep-2010-Jeep-Liberty-Owners-Manual-817383 jeep-2010-jeep-liberty-owners-manual-817383 jeep pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 522 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

Liberty
OWNER’S MANUAL
2010
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION PAGE
1
INTRODUCTION
............................................................3
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
..............................9
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
............................. 89
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
..................................203
5
STARTING AND OPERATING
................................................295
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
............................................. 403
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
..............................................417
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
.................................................469
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
........................................ 489
10
INDEX
...................................................................499
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
INTRODUCTION
CONTENTS
䡵Introduction ........................... 4
䡵Rollover Warning ....................... 4
䡵How To Use This Manual .................. 5
䡵Warnings And Cautions ................... 7
䡵Vehicle Identification Number .............. 7
䡵Vehicle Modifications/Alterations ............ 8
1
INTRODUCTION
Congratulations on selecting your new Chrysler Group
LLC vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision
workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality - all
essentials that are traditional to our vehicles.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assis-
tance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint
you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle.
It is supplemented by a Warranty Information Booklet,
located on the DVD, and various customer-oriented
documents. Please take the time to read these publica-
tions carefully. Following the instructions and recom-
mendations in this manual will help assure safe and
enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
NOTE: After you read the manual, it should be stored
in the vehicle for convenient referencing and remain
with the vehicle when sold, so that the new owner will
be aware of all safety warnings.
When it comes to service, remember that your authorized
dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained tech-
nicians and genuine Mopar parts, and cares about your
satisfaction.
ROLLOVER WARNING
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate
than other types of vehicles. This vehicle has a higher
ground clearance and a higher center of gravity than
many passenger cars. It is capable of performing better in
a wide variety of off-road applications. Driven in an
unsafe manner, all vehicles can go out of control. Because
of the higher center of gravity, if this vehicle is out of
control it may roll over when some other vehicles may
not.
Do not attempt sharp turns, abrupt maneuvers, or other
unsafe driving actions that can cause loss of vehicle
4 INTRODUCTION
control. Failure to operate this vehicle safely may result
in an accident, rollover of the vehicle, and severe or fatal
injury. Drive carefully.
Failure to use driver and passenger seat belts provided
is a major cause of severe or fatal injury. In fact, the U.S.
government notes that the universal use of existing seat
belts could cut the highway death toll by 10,000 or more
each year and could reduce disabling injuries by two
million annually. In a rollover crash, an unbelted person
is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing
a seat belt. Always buckle up.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section
contains the information you desire.
Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the
items of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and
illustrations may differ from your vehicle’s equipment
The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manual
contains a complete listing of all subjects.
Consult the following table for a description of the
symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout
this Owner’s Manual:
Rollover Warning Label
1
INTRODUCTION 5
6 INTRODUCTION
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This Owner’s Manual contains WARNINGS against op-
erating procedures that could result in an accident or
bodily injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against proce-
dures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If you
do not read this entire manual, you may miss important
information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is found on the
left front corner of the instrument panel. The VIN is
visible from outside of the vehicle through the wind-
shield. This number also is stamped into the right front
door sill (under the molding) and appears on the Auto-
mobile Information Disclosure Label affixed to a window
on your vehicle, the vehicle registration, and the title.
NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
Vehicle Identification Number
1
INTRODUCTION 7
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could
seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and
may lead to an accident resulting in serious injury or
death.
8 INTRODUCTION
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵A Word About Your Keys ................. 12
▫Ignition Key Removal .................. 12
▫Key-In-Ignition Reminder ............... 14
䡵Sentry Key威.......................... 14
▫Replacement Keys ..................... 15
▫Customer Key Programming ............. 16
▫General Information ................... 17
䡵Vehicle Security Alarm — If Equipped ........ 17
▫Rearming Of The System ................ 18
▫To Arm The System ................... 18
▫To Disarm The System ................. 18
䡵Illuminated Entry System ................. 19
䡵Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) .............. 19
▫To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate ......... 20
▫To Lock The Doors And Liftgate .......... 21
▫To Unlatch The Liftgate Flip-Up Window .... 23
▫Express Down Window Feature —
If Equipped ......................... 23
2
▫Using The Panic Alarm ................. 24
▫Programming Additional Transmitters ...... 24
▫Battery Replacement ................... 25
▫General Information ................... 26
䡵Remote Starting System — If Equipped ....... 26
▫How To Use Remote Start ............... 26
䡵Door Locks ........................... 28
▫Manual Door Locks ................... 28
▫Power Door Locks .................... 30
▫Child-Protection Door Lock System
(Rear Doors) ......................... 32
䡵Windows ............................ 34
▫Power Windows ...................... 34
▫Wind Buffeting ....................... 38
䡵Liftgate ............................. 38
▫Liftgate Flipper Glass .................. 39
䡵Occupant Restraints ..................... 40
▫Lap/Shoulder Belts .................... 42
▫Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure .... 48
▫Seat Belt Pretensioner — If Equipped ....... 49
▫Supplemental Rear Impact Active Head
Restraints (AHR) ...................... 49
▫Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert威) ......................... 53
▫Automatic Locking Mode — If Equipped .... 54
▫Energy Management Feature ............. 55
▫Seat Belts And Pregnant Women .......... 55
10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
▫Seat Belt Extender ..................... 56
▫Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) -
Airbags ............................ 56
▫Event Data Recorder (EDR) .............. 73
▫Child Restraint ....................... 75
䡵Engine Break-In Recommendations .......... 85
䡵Safety Tips ........................... 85
▫Transporting Passengers ................ 85
▫Exhaust Gas ......................... 86
▫Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle ............................. 87
▫Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Outside The Vehicle ................... 88
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS
You can insert the double-sided keys into the locks with
either side up.
The authorized dealer that sold you your new vehicle has
the key code numbers for your vehicle locks. These
numbers can be used to order duplicate keys from your
authorized dealer. Ask your authorized dealer for these
numbers and keep them in a safe place.
Ignition Key Removal
Automatic Transmission
Place the shift lever in PARK. Turn the key to the ACC
position and then push the key and cylinder inward
slightly and rotate the key to the LOCK position. Then
remove the key.
Vehicle Key
12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
•
For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), features such as the power
window switches, radio, power sunroof or Sky Slider威
(if equipped), and power outlets will remain active for
45 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to the
LOCK position. Opening either front door will cancel
this feature.
•
For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, features such as
the power window switches, radio, power sunroof or
Sky Slider威(if equipped), and power outlets will
remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition
switch is turned to the LOCK position. Opening either
front door will cancel this feature. The time for this
feature is programmable. For details, refer to “Delay
Power Off to Accessories Until Exit,” under “Personal
Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” under
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in
Section 4 of this manual.
Ignition Switch Positions
1 — Lock 3 — On
2 — Acc 4 — Start
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13
WARNING!
Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be seri-
ously or fatally injured. Don’t leave the key in the
ignition. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation to thieves.
Always remove the key from the ignition, and lock
all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
Key-In-Ignition Reminder
If you open the driver’s door and the key is in the
ignition, a chime will sound to remind you to remove the
key.
NOTE: The Key-In-Ignition reminder only sounds
when the ignition key is placed in the LOCK or ACC
position.
SENTRY KEY姞
The Sentry Key威Immobilizer System prevents unautho-
rized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The
system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation
is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked
or unlocked.
The system uses ignition keys that have an embedded
electronic chip (transponder) to prevent unauthorized
vehicle operation. Therefore, only keys that are pro-
grammed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate
the vehicle. The system will shut the engine off in two
seconds if someone uses an invalid key to try to start the
engine.
14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: A key that has not been programmed is also
considered an invalid key, even if it is cut to fit the
ignition switch lock cylinder for that vehicle.
During normal operation, after turning on the ignition
switch, the Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three
seconds for a bulb check. If the light remains on after the
bulb check, it indicates that there is a problem with the
electronics. In addition, if the Vehicle Security Light
begins to flash after the bulb check, it indicates that
someone used an invalid key to try to start the engine.
Either of these conditions will result in the engine being
shut off after two seconds.
If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal
vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than 10 sec-
onds), it indicates that there is a fault in the electronics.
Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon as
possible by an authorized dealer.
NOTE: The Sentry Key威Immobilizer System is not
compatible with some aftermarket remote starting sys-
tems. Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting
problems and loss of security protection.
All of the keys provided with your new vehicle have
been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
Replacement Keys
NOTE: Only keys that are programmed to the vehicle
electronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle.
Once a Sentry Key威is programmed to a vehicle, it cannot
be programmed to any other vehicle.
CAUTION!
Always remove the Sentry Keys威from the vehicle
and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unat-
tended.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15
At the time of purchase, the original owner is provided
with a four-digit Personal Identification Number (PIN).
Keep the PIN in a secure location. This number is
required for authorized dealer replacement of keys. Du-
plication of keys may be performed at an authorized
dealer or by following the customer key programming
procedure. This procedure consists of programming a
blank key to the vehicle electronics. A blank key is one
that has never been programmed.
NOTE: When having the Sentry Key威Immobilizer
System serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an
authorized dealer.
Customer Key Programming
If you have two valid Sentry Keys威, you can program
new Sentry Keys威to the system by performing the
following procedure:
1. Cut the additional Sentry Key威Transponder blank(s)
to match the ignition switch lock cylinder key code.
2. Insert the first valid key into the ignition switch. Turn
the ignition switch to the ON position for at least three
seconds, but no longer than 15 seconds. Then, turn the
ignition switch to the LOCK position and remove the first
key.
3. Insert the second valid key into the ignition switch.
Turn the ignition switch to the ON position within
15 seconds. After 10 seconds, a chime will sound. In
addition, the Vehicle Security Light will begin to flash.
Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and
remove the second key.
4. Insert a blank Sentry Key威into the ignition switch.
Turn the ignition switch to the ON position within
60 seconds. After 10 seconds, a single chime will sound.
In addition, the Vehicle Security Light will stop flashing.
To indicate that programming is complete, the Vehicle
Security Light will turn on again for three seconds and
then turn off.
16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The new Sentry Key威is programmed. The Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter will also be pro-
grammed during this procedure.
Repeat this procedure to program up to eight keys. If you
do not have a programmed Sentry Key威, contact your
authorized dealer for details.
NOTE: If a programmed key is lost, see your authorized
dealer to have all remaining keys erased from the sys-
tem’s memory. This will prevent the lost key from
starting your vehicle. The remaining keys must then be
reprogrammed. All vehicle keys must be taken to an
authorized dealer at the time of service to be
reprogrammed.
General Information
The Sentry Key威system complies with FCC rules Part 15
and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is
subject to the following conditions:
•
This device may not cause harmful interference.
•
This device must accept any interference that may be
received, including interference that may cause undes-
ired operation.
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED
The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors,
liftgate, and liftgate flip-up window for unauthorized
entry and ignition for unauthorized operation.
If something triggers the alarm, the Vehicle Security
Alarm will sound the horn intermittently, the headlights,
park lamps and/or turn signals and the Vehicle Security
Light in the instrument cluster will flash.
NOTE: The Panic and Security alarms are quite differ-
ent. Please take a moment to activate the Panic and the
Security modes to hear the differences in the horn. In case
one should go off in the future, you will need to know
which mode has been activated in order to deactivate it.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17
Rearming of the System
If something triggers the Vehicle Security Alarm, and no
action is taken to disarm it, the Vehicle Security Alarm
will turn off the horn after three minutes, turn off all of
the visual signals after 15 minutes, and then the Vehicle
Security Alarm will rearm itself.
To Arm the System
1. Remove the key from the ignition switch and exit the
vehicle.
2. Lock the doors and liftgate by pressing the power door
LOCK switch or the LOCK button on the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter.
NOTE: The Vehicle Security Alarm will not arm if you
lock the doors with the manual door lock plungers or the
driver’s door lock cylinder.
3. Close all doors. The Vehicle Security Light in the
instrument cluster will flash rapidly for about 16 seconds
to signal that the Vehicle Security Alarm is arming.
During this period, opening any door or the liftgate will
cancel the arming process. If the Vehicle Security Alarm
arms successfully, the Vehicle Security Light will flash at
a slower rate to indicate the alarm is set.
NOTE: For added security, whenever the Security
Alarm is armed, the HomeLink威/Garage Door Opener
(if equipped) is disabled as well.
To Disarm the System
Either press the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter
or insert a valid Sentry Key威into the ignition lock
cylinder and turn the key to the ON position.
NOTE:
•
Unlocking the doors with the manual door lock plung-
ers or the driver’s door lock cylinder will not disarm
the Vehicle Security Alarm.
18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
•
When the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed, the interior
power door lock switches will not unlock the doors.
The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your
vehicle; however, you can create conditions where the
Vehicle Security Alarm will give you a false alarm. If the
previously described arming sequence has occurred, the
Vehicle Security Alarm will arm regardless of whether
you are inside or outside the vehicle. If you remain inside
the vehicle and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this
occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
Tamper Alert
If something has triggered the Vehicle Security Alarm in
your absence, the horn will sound three times when you
unlock the doors. Check the vehicle for tampering.
ILLUMINATED ENTRY SYSTEM
The interior lights will turn on when you use the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to unlock the vehicle or
open a door.
This feature also turns on the approach lighting (if
equipped). For details, refer to “Illumination Approach,”
under “Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Fea-
tures)” under “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC)” in Section 4.
The interior lights will fade to off after approximately
30 seconds or they will immediately fade to off once the
ignition switch is turned ON.
NOTE:
•
The Illuminated Entry system will not operate the
interior lights if the dimmer control is in the extreme
downward position.
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE)
This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors and
liftgate, open the liftgate flip-up window, or activate the
PANIC alarm from distances up to approximately 66 ft
(20 m) using a hand-held Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter. The RKE transmitter does not need to be
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19
pointed at the vehicle to activate the system. However,
the line of transmission must not be blocked with metal
objects when using the RKE transmitter.
NOTE: Inserting the key into the ignition switch dis-
ables all buttons on the RKE transmitter.
To Unlock the Doors and Liftgate
Press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE
transmitter once to unlock the driver’s door or twice to
unlock all doors and the liftgate. The turn signal lights
will flash to acknowledge the unlock signal. The illumi-
nated entry system will also turn on.
Remote Key Unlock, Driver Door/All Doors First
This feature lets you program the system to unlock either
the driver’s door or all doors and the liftgate on the first
press of the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter. To
change the current setting, proceed as follows:
•
For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), refer to “Remote Key
Unlock,” under “Personal Settings (Customer-
Programmable Features),” under “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)” in Section 4.
Vehicle Key
20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the
following steps:
1. Press and hold the LOCK button on a programmed
(i.e., functional) RKE transmitter for at least 4 seconds,
but no longer than 10 seconds. Then, press and hold the
UNLOCK button while still holding the LOCK button.
2. Release both buttons at the same time.
3. Test the feature from outside the vehicle by pressing
the LOCK and UNLOCK buttons on the RKE transmitter.
4. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
its previous setting.
NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmit-
ter while you are inside the vehicle will activate the
Security Alarm. Opening a door with the Security Alarm
activated will cause the alarm to sound. Press the UN-
LOCK button to deactivate the Security Alarm.
Illuminated Approach — If Equipped
This feature activates the headlights for up to 90 seconds
when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter.
The time for this feature is programmable on vehicles
equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC). For details, refer to “Illumination Approach,”
under “Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Fea-
tures),” under “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC)” in Section 4.
To Lock the Doors and Liftgate
Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmit-
ter to lock all doors and the liftgate. The turn signal lights
will flash and the horn will chirp to acknowledge the lock
signal.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21
Sound Horn with Lock
This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors
are locked with the RKE transmitter. This feature can be
turned on or turned off. To change the current setting,
proceed as follows:
•
For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), refer to “Sound Horn with
Remote Key Lock,” under “Personal Settings
(Customer-Programmable Features),” under “Elec-
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in Section 4.
•
For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the
following steps:
1. Press the LOCK button on a programmed (i.e., func-
tional) RKE transmitter for at least 4 seconds, but no
longer than 10 seconds. Then, press the PANIC button
while still holding the LOCK button.
2. Release both buttons at the same time.
3. Test the feature from outside the vehicle by pressing
the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter.
4. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
its previous setting.
NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmit-
ter while you are inside the vehicle will activate the
Security Alarm. Opening a door with the Security Alarm
activated will cause the alarm to sound. Press the UN-
LOCK button to deactivate the Security Alarm.
Flash Lights with Lock
The feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when
the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmit-
ter. This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change
the current setting, proceed as follows:
•
For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), refer to “Flash Lights with
Remote Key Lock,” under ⬙Personal Settings
22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
(Customer-Programmable Features),” under “Elec-
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in Section 4.
•
For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the
following steps:
1. Press and hold the UNLOCK button on a programmed
(i.e., functional) RKE transmitter for at least 4 seconds,
but no longer than 10 seconds. Then, press and hold the
LOCK button while still holding the UNLOCK button.
2. Release both buttons at the same time.
3. Test the feature from outside the vehicle by pressing
the LOCK and UNLOCK buttons on the RKE transmitter.
4. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
its previous setting.
NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmit-
ter while you are inside the vehicle will activate the
Security Alarm. Opening a door with the Security Alarm
activated will cause the alarm to sound. Press the UN-
LOCK button to deactivate the Security Alarm.
To Unlatch the Liftgate Flip-Up Window
Press the REAR RELEASE button twice to unlatch the
liftgate flip-up window.
WARNING!
To avoid injury stand back when opening. Glass will
automatically rise.
Express Down Window Feature — If Equipped
This feature allows you to remotely lower both front door
windows at the same time. To use this feature, press and
release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter and
then immediately press and hold the UNLOCK button
until the windows lower to the level desired or until they
lower completely.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23
Using the PANIC Alarm
NOTE: The PANIC and Security Alarms are quite
different. Please take a moment to activate the PANIC
and the Security modes to hear the differences in the
horn. In case one should go off in the future, you will
need to know which mode has been activated in order to
deactivate it.
To turn the PANIC Alarm feature ON or OFF, press and
hold the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at
least one second and release. When the PANIC Alarm is
on, the headlights and turn signal lights will flash, the
horn will pulse on and off, and the illuminated entry
system will turn on.
The PANIC Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless
you turn it off by pressing the PANIC button a second
time or if the vehicle speed is 5 mph (8 km/h) or greater.
During the PANIC Mode, the door locks and Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) system will function normally.
PANIC mode will not disarm the Security System on
vehicles so equipped.
NOTE: You may need to be close to the vehicle when
using the RKE transmitter to turn off the PANIC Alarm
due to the radio frequency noises emitted by the system.
Programming Additional Transmitters
Refer to Sentry Key威“Customer Key Programming.”
If you do not have a programmed RKE transmitter,
contact your authorized dealer for details.
24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Battery Replacement
The recommended replacement battery is CR2032.
NOTE:
•
Perchlorate Material — special handling may apply.
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
•
Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back
housing or the printed circuit board.
1. Remove the screw from the RKE transmitter case (if
equipped).
2. With the RKE transmitter buttons facing down, use a
flat blade tool to pry the two halves of the RKE transmit-
ter case apart. Make sure not to damage the seal during
removal.
3. Remove and replace the battery. Avoid touching the
new battery with your fingers. Skin oils may cause
battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it with
rubbing alcohol.
4. To reassemble the RKE transmitter case, snap the two
halves together.
Separating Case Halves
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25
5. Reinstall and tighten the screw until snug (if
equipped).
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of FCC rules and with
RS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference that may be
received including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly ap-
proved by the party responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal
distance, check for these two conditions:
1. Weak battery in RKE transmitter. The expected life of
the battery is from one to two years.
2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station
tower, airport transmitter, and some mobile or CB radios.
REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
This system uses the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter to start the engine conve-
niently from outside the vehicle while still
maintaining security. The system has a range of
approximately 328 ft (100 m).
NOTE: The vehicle must be equipped with an auto-
matic transmission to be equipped with Remote Start.
How To Use Remote Start
All of the following conditions must be met before the
engine will remote start:
•
Shift lever in PARK.
26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
•
Doors closed.
•
Hood closed.
•
Liftgate closed.
•
Hazard switch off.
•
Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pressed).
•
Ignition key removed from ignition switch.
•
Battery at an acceptable charge level.
•
RKE PANIC button not pressed.
WARNING!
•
Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or
confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Mon-
oxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Car-
bon monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious
injury or death when inhaled.
•
Keep Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitters
away from children. Operation of the Remote Start
System, windows, door locks or other controls
could cause serious injury or death.
To Enter Remote Start Mode
Press and release the REMOTE START button
on the RKE transmitter twice, within five sec-
onds. The parking lights will flash and the horn
will chirp twice (if programmed). Then, the
engine will start and the vehicle will remain in the
Remote Start mode for a 15-minute cycle.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27
NOTE:
•
For security, power window operation and sunroof or
Sky Slider威operation (if equipped) is disabled when
the vehicle is in the Remote Start mode.
•
The engine can be started two consecutive times (two
15-minute cycles) with the RKE transmitter. However,
the ignition switch must be cycled to the ON position
before you can repeat the start sequence for a third
cycle.
To Exit Remote Start Mode without Driving the
Vehicle
Press and release the REMOTE START button one time or
allow the engine to run for the entire 15-minute cycle.
NOTE: To avoid unintentional shut downs, the system
will disable the one-time press of the REMOTE START
button for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote
Start request.
To Exit Remote Start Mode and Drive the Vehicle
Before the end of the 15-minute cycle, press and release
the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock
the doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm (if
equipped). Then, insert the key into the ignition switch
and turn the switch to the ON position.
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON position
in order to drive the vehicle.
DOOR LOCKS
Manual Door Locks
To lock each door, push the door lock plunger on each
door trim panel downward. To unlock each door, pull the
door lock plunger on each door trim panel upward.
28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
If the door lock plunger is down when you shut the door,
the door will lock. Make sure the keys are not inside the
vehicle before closing the door.
NOTE: The manual door locks will not lock or unlock
the liftgate.
WARNING!
•
For personal security and safety in the event of an
accident, lock the vehicle doors as you drive as
well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
•
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key
from the ignition lock, and lock your vehicle.
Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause
severe personal injuries and death.
•
Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Don’t leave the key in
the ignition. A child could operate power win-
dows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
Manual Lock Plunger
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29
Power Door Locks
A power door lock switch is located on each of the front
door trim panels. Use this switch to lock or unlock the
doors and liftgate.
If you press the power door LOCK switch while the key
is in the ignition, and any front door is open, the power
locks will not operate. This prevents you from acciden-
tally locking your keys in the vehicle. Removing the key
or closing the door will allow the locks to operate. A
chime will sound if the key is in the ignition switch and
a door is open, as a reminder to remove the key.
Automatic Door Locks
The doors will lock automatically on vehicles with power
door locks if all of the following conditions are met:
1. The Automatic Door Locks feature is enabled.
2. The transmission is in gear.
3. All doors are closed.
4. The throttle is pressed.
5. The vehicle speed is above 15 mph (24 km/h).
Power Door Lock Switch Location
1 - Unlock 2 - Lock
30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
6. The doors were not previously locked using the power
door lock switch or Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter.
Automatic Door Locks Programming
The Automatic Door Locks feature can be enabled or
disabled as follows:
•
For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), refer to “Personal Settings
(Customer-Programmable Features)” under “Elec-
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in Section 4.
•
For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, performing
the following procedure:
1. Close all doors and place the key in the ignition.
2. Cycle the ignition switch between LOCK and ON and
then back to LOCK four times, ending up in the LOCK
position.
3. Press the power door LOCK switch to lock the doors.
4. A single chime will indicate the completion of the
programming.
5. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
its previous setting.
NOTE: Use the Automatic Door Locks feature in accor-
dance with local laws.
Automatic Unlock Doors on Exit
The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles with
power door locks if:
1. The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is en-
abled.
2. The transmission is in gear and the vehicle speed
returned to 0 mph (0 km/h).
3. The transmission is in NEUTRAL or PARK.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31
4. The driver door is opened.
5. The doors were not previously unlocked.
6. The vehicle speed is 0 mph (0 km/h).
Automatic Unlock Doors on Exit Programming
The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature can be
enabled or disabled as follows:
•
For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), refer to “Personal Settings
(Customer-Programmable Features)” under “Elec-
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in Section 4.
•
For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the
following procedure:
1. Close all doors and place the key in the ignition.
2. Cycle the ignition switch between LOCK and ON and
then back to LOCK four times, ending up in the LOCK
position.
3. Press the power door UNLOCK switch to unlock the
doors.
4. A single chime will indicate the completion of the
programming.
Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its
previous setting.
NOTE: Use the Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature
in accordance with local laws.
Child-Protection Door Lock System (Rear Doors)
To provide a safer environment for small children riding
in the rear seats, the rear doors are equipped with a Child
Protection Door Lock system.
To Engage the Child Protection Door Lock
1. Open the rear door.
2. Insert the tip of the ignition key into the child lock
control and rotate it to the LOCK position.
32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 on the opposite rear door.
NOTE: When the child lock system is engaged, the door
can be opened only by using the outside door handle
even though the inside door lock is in the unlocked
position.
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision.
Remember that the rear doors can only be opened
from the outside when the child protection locks are
engaged.
NOTE:
•
After engaging the Child Protection Door Lock sys-
tem, always test the door from the inside to make
certain it is in the desired position.
•
For emergency exit with the system engaged, move
the lock plunger up (unlocked position), roll down the
window, and open the door with the outside door
handle.
To Disengage the Child Protection Door Lock
1. Open the rear door.
Child Protection Door Lock
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33
2. Insert the tip of the ignition key into the child lock
control and rotate it to the UNLOCK position.
3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 on the opposite rear door.
NOTE: After disengaging the Child Protection Door
Lock system, always test the door from the inside to
make certain it is in the desired position.
WINDOWS
Power Windows
The window controls on the driver’s door trim panel
control all the door windows.
Child Protection Door Lock
Power Window Switches
34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
There are single window controls on each passenger door
trim panel, which operate the passenger door windows.
The window controls will operate when the ignition
switch is in the ON or ACC position.
WARNING!
Never leave children in a vehicle, with the key in the
ignition switch. Occupants, particularly unattended
children, can become entrapped by the windows
while operating the power window switches. Such
entrapment may result in serious injury or death.
Auto-Down Feature
The driver’s and front passenger’s (if equipped for pas-
senger side) power window switches have an “Auto-
Down” feature. Press the window switch past the first
detent, release, and the window will go down automati-
cally.
To open the window part way, press the window switch
to the first detent and release it when you want the
window to stop.
To stop the window from going all the way down during
the Auto-Down operation, pull up on the switch briefly.
For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), the power window switches
will remain active for 45 seconds after the ignition switch
is turned to the LOCK position. Opening either front
door will cancel this feature.
For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, the power window
switches will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the
ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position. Opening
either front door will cancel this feature. The time is
programmable. For details, refer to “Delay Power Off to
Accessories Until Exit,” under “Personal Settings
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35
(Customer-Programmable Features” in the “Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC),” in Section 4 of this
manual.
Auto Up Feature with Anti-Pinch Protection — If
Equipped
On some models, the driver’s and front passenger’s (if
equipped for passenger side) power window switches
have an “Auto Up” feature. Pull the window switch up to
the second detent, release, and the window will go up
automatically.
To stop the window from going all the way up during the
Auto Up operation, push down on the switch briefly.
To close the window part way, pull the window switch
up to the first detent and release when you want the
window to stop.
For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), the power window switches
will remain active for 45 seconds after the ignition switch
is turned to the LOCK position. Opening either front
door will cancel this feature.
For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, the power window
switches will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the
ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position. Opening
either front door will cancel this feature. The time is
programmable. For details, refer to “Delay Power Off to
Accessories Until Exit,” under “Personal Settings
(Customer-Programmable Features)” in the “Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC),” in Section 4 of this
manual.
NOTE:
•
If the window runs into any obstacle during auto-
closure, it will reverse direction and then go back
down. Remove the obstacle and use the window
switch again to close the window.
36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
•
Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger
the auto reverse function unexpectedly during auto-
closure. If this happens, pull the switch lightly to the
first detent and hold to close window manually.
WARNING!
There is no anti-pinch protection when the window
is almost closed. Be sure to clear all objects from the
window before closing.
Window Lockout Button
The window lockout button on the driver’s door trim
panel allows you to disable the window control on the
other doors. To disable the window control on the other
doors, press and release the window LOCKOUT button
(setting it in the down position). To enable the window
controls, press and release the window LOCKOUT but-
ton again (setting it in the up position).
Reset
It may be necessary at some point in time to reactivate the
Auto Up feature. To do so, perform the following proce-
dure:
Window Lockout Button
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37
1. Pull the window switch up to close window com-
pletely and continue to hold the switch up for an
additional two seconds after the window is closed.
2. Push the window switch down firmly to the second
detent to open the window completely and continue to
hold the switch down for an additional two seconds after
the window is fully open.
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof or Sky Slider™ (if
equipped) in certain open or partially open positions.
This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the
buffeting occurs with the rear windows open, then open
the front and rear windows together to minimize the
buffeting. If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof or Sky
Slider™ open, adjust the sunroof or Sky Slider™ opening
to minimize the buffeting or open any window.
LIFTGATE
To open the liftgate, pull up (squeeze) on the handle and
lift.
Liftgate Release
38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Use the power door LOCK switch on either front
door trim panel or the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter to lock and unlock the liftgate. The manual
door locks on the doors and the driver’s door lock
cylinder will not lock and unlock the liftgate.
WARNING!
Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous
exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your pas-
sengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep the
liftgate closed when you are operating the vehicle.
Liftgate Flipper Glass
The liftgate flipper glass is also unlocked when the
liftgate is unlocked. To open the flipper glass, push up on
the window switch located on the liftgate.
WARNING!
To avoid injury, stand back when opening. Glass may
automatically rise.
Liftgate Flipper Glass Release
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39
NOTE: If a malfunction to the liftgate latch should
occur, an emergency liftgate latch release can be used to
open the liftgate. The emergency liftgate latch release can
be accessed through a snap-in cover located on the
liftgate trim panel.
WARNING!
Driving with the flipper glass open can allow poi-
sonous exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your
passengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep
the flipper glass closed when you are operating the
vehicle.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS
Some of the most important safety features in your
vehicle are the restraint systems:
•
Three-point lap and shoulder belts for all seating
positions
•
Advanced Front Airbags for driver and front passen-
ger
•
Supplemental Rear Impact Active Head Restraints
(AHR) located on top of the front seats (integrated into
the head restraint)
•
Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC)
for the driver and passengers seated next to a window
•
An energy-absorbing steering column and steering
wheel
•
Knee bolsters/blockers for front seat occupants
•
Front seat belts incorporate pretensioners to enhance
occupant protection by managing occupant energy
during an impact event — if equipped
•
All seat belt systems (except the driver’s) include
Automatic Locking Retractors (ALRs), which lock the
seat belt webbing into position by extending the belt
40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
all the way out and then adjusting the belt to the
desired length to restrain a child seat or secure a large
item in a seat
If you will be carrying children too small for adult-sized
seat belts, the seat belts or the Lower Anchors and Tether
for CHildren (LATCH) feature also can be used to hold
infant and child restraint systems. For more information
on LATCH, see Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren
(LATCH) in this section.
NOTE: The Advanced Front Airbags have a multistage
inflator design. This allows the airbag to have different
rates of inflation based on severity and type of collision.
Please pay close attention to the information in this
section. It tells you how to use your restraint system
properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as
possible.
WARNING!
In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled
up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other
passengers, or you can be thrown out of the vehicle.
Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are
buckled up properly.
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver
and cause a collision that includes you. This can happen
far away from home or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they
can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some
of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown
from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41
ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the
inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should
be belted at all times.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle have combination
lap/shoulder belts. The belt webbing retractor is de-
signed to lock during very sudden stops or collisions.
This feature allows the shoulder part of the belt to move
freely with you under normal conditions. However, in a
collision, the belt will lock and reduce your risk of
striking the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out.
WARNING!
•
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seri-
ously injured or killed.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
•
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
•
Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous. Seat
belts are designed to go around the large bones of
your body. These are the strongest parts of your
body and can take the forces of a collision the best.
•
Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make
your injuries in a collision much worse. You might
suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out
of part of the belt. Follow these instructions to
wear your seat belt safely and to keep your pas-
sengers safe, too.
(Continued)
42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Two people should never be belted into a single
seat belt. People belted together can crash into one
another in an accident, hurting one another badly.
Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more
than one person, no matter what their size.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is located on the B-Pillar along
the outboard side and rear of the seat cushion. Grasp the
latch plate and pull out the belt. Slide the latch plate up
the webbing as far as necessary to make the belt go
around your lap.
Latch Plate
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43
3. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
WARNING!
•A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will
not protect you properly. The lap portion could ride
too high on your body, possibly causing internal
injuries. Always buckle your belt into the buckle
nearest you.
•A belt that is too loose will not protect you as well.
In a sudden stop, you could move too far forward,
increasing the possibility of injury. Wear your seat
belt snugly.
•A belt that is worn under your arm is very danger-
ous. Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the
vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck
injury. A belt worn under the arm can cause internal
injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder bones.
Wear the belt over your shoulder so that your stron-
gest bones will take the force in a collision.
(Continued)
Latch Plate To Buckle
44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
•A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
you from injury during a collision. You are more
likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
are meant to be used together.
4. Position the lap belt across your thighs, below your
abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up
a bit on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too
tight, tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug
belt reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in a
collision.
WARNING!
•A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
injury in a collision. The belt forces won’t be at the
strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your abdo-
men. Always wear the lap part of your seat belt as
low as possible and keep it snug.
•A twisted belt can’t do its job as well. In a collision,
it could even cut into you. Be sure the belt is straight.
If you can’t straighten a belt in your vehicle, take it to
your authorized dealer and have it fixed.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45
5. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is
comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor
will withdraw any slack in the belt.
6. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle.
The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position.
If necessary, slide the latch plate down the webbing to
allow the belt to retract fully.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and
leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do
not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
assemblies must be replaced after an accident if they
have been damaged (bent retractor, torn webbing,
etc.).
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/
shoulder belt.
Removing Slack From Belt
46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the
anchor point.
2. At about 6 to 12 in (15 to 30 cm) above the latch plate,
grasp and twist the belt webbing 180 degrees to create a
fold that begins immediately above the latch plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing.
The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the
latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the
folded webbing.
Seat Belt Pretensioner — If Equipped
The front passenger seat belt is equipped with a preten-
sioning device that is designed to remove any slack from
the seat belt systems in the event of a collision. These
devices improve the performance of the seat belt by
assuring that the belt is tight around the occupant early
in a collision. Pretensioners work for all size occupants,
including those in child restraints.
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt must still be
worn snugly and positioned properly
The pretensioner is triggered by the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC). Like the airbags, the pretensioners are
single use items. After a collision that is severe enough to
deploy the airbags and pretensioners, both must be
replaced.
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the front seating positions, the shoulder belt can be
adjusted upward or downward to position the belt away
from your neck. Press the release button to release the
anchorage, and then move it up or down to the position
that fits you best.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47
NOTE:
The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is
equipped with an Easy Up feature. This feature allows the
shoulder belt anchorage to be adjusted in the upward
position without pressing the release button. To verify the
shoulder belt anchorage is latched, pull downward on the
shoulder belt anchorage until it is locked into position.
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will
prefer a lower position, and if you are taller than average,
you will prefer a higher position.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/
shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the
anchor point.
2. At about 6 to 12 in (15 to 30 cm) above the latch plate,
grasp and twist the belt webbing 180 degrees to create a
fold that begins immediately above the latch plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing.
The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the
latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the
folded webbing.
Adjusting Upper Shoulder Belt
48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Seat Belt Pretensioner — If Equipped
The front passenger seat belt is equipped with a preten-
sioning device that is designed to remove any slack from
the seat belt systems in the event of a collision. These
devices improve the performance of the seat belt by
assuring that the belt is tight around the occupant early
in a collision. Pretensioners work for all size occupants,
including those in child restraints.
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt must still be
worn snugly and positioned properly.
The pretensioner is triggered by the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC). Like the airbags, the pretensioners are
single use items. After a collision that is severe enough to
deploy the airbags and pretensioners, both must be
replaced.
Supplemental Rear Impact Active Head Restraints
(AHR)
These head restraints are passive, deployable compo-
nents, and vehicles with this equipment can not be
readily identified by any markings, only through visual
inspection of the head restraint. The head restraint will be
split in two halves, with the front half being soft foam
and trim, the back half being decorative plastic.
How the Active Head Restraints (AHR) work
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) determines
whether the severity or type of rear impact require the
Active Head Restraints (AHR) to deploy. In case of AHR
deployment both driver and passenger seat AHR’s will
be deployed.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49
When AHR’s deploy during a rear impact, the head
restraint front half extends forward to minimize the gap
between the back of the head and the AHR. This system
is designed to help prevent or reduce the extent of
injuries the driver and front passenger in certain types of
rear end impacts.
NOTE: The Active Head Restraints (AHR) may or may
not deploy in the event of a front or side impact.
However if during a front impact, a secondary rear
impact occurs, the AHR may deploy based on the sever-
ity and type of the impact.
Active Head Restraint (AHR) Components
1 — Head Restraint Front Half
(Soft Foam and Trim)
3 — Head Restraint Back Half
(Decorative Plastic Rear
Cover)
2 — Seatback 4 — Head Restraint Guide
Tubes
50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
All occupants, including the driver, should not oper-
ate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the head
restraints are placed in their proper positions in order
to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of an
accident.
NOTE: For more information on properly adjusting and
positioning the head restraint, refer to Section 3 “Adjust-
ing Active Head Restraints”.
Resetting Active Head Restraints (AHR)
If the Active Head Restraints are triggered in an accident,
you must reset the head restraint on the driver’s and
front passenger seat. You can recognize when the Active
Head Restraint has been triggered by the fact that they
have moved forward (as shown in step three of the
resetting procedure).
1. Grasp the deployed AHR from the rear seat.
2. Position the hands on the top of the deployed AHR at
a comfortable position.
Hand Positioning Points On AHR
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51
3. Pull down then rearward towards the rear of the
vehicle then down to engage the locking mechanism.
4. The AHR front soft foam and trim half should lock
into the back decorative plastic half.
Down And Rearward Reset Movement
Down Movement To Engage Locking Mechanism
52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
•
If you have difficulties or problems resetting the head
restraints, see an authorized dealer.
•
For safety reasons, have the Active Head Restraints
checked by a qualified specialist at an authorized
dealer.
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert姞)
If the driver’s seat belt has not been buckled within
60 seconds of starting the vehicle and if the vehicle speed
is greater than 5 mph (8 km/h), the BeltAlert威will alert
the driver to buckle the seat belt. The driver should also
instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat belts.
Once the warning is triggered, the BeltAlert威will con-
tinue to chime and flash the Seat Belt Reminder Light for
96 seconds or until the driver’s seat belt is buckled. The
BeltAlert威will be reactivated if the driver’s seat belt is
unbuckled for more than 10 seconds and the vehicle
speed is greater than 5 mph (8 km/h).
BeltAlert威Programming
BeltAlert威can be enabled or disabled by your authorized
dealer or by performing the following steps:
NOTE: Chrysler Group LLC does not recommend de-
activating BeltAlert威.
AHR In Reset Position
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53
1. With all doors closed, and the ignition switch in any
position except ON or START, buckle the driver’s seat
belt.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, but do not
start the engine. Wait for the Seat Belt Reminder Light to
turn off and then proceed to the next step.
NOTE: You must perform the following steps within
60 seconds of turning the ignition switch to the ON
position.
3. Within 60 seconds of turning the ignition switch to the
ON position, unbuckle and then re-buckle the driver’s
seat belt at least three times within 10 seconds, ending
with the seat belt buckled.
NOTE: Watch for the Seat Belt Reminder Light to turn
on while unbuckling the seat belt and turn off while
re-buckling the seat belt. It may be necessary to retract
the seat belt.
4. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. A
single chime will sound to signify that you have success-
fully completed the programming.
BeltAlert威can be reactivated by repeating this procedure.
NOTE: When BeltAlert威is deactivated, the Seat Belt
Reminder Light will continue to illuminate as long as the
driver’s seat belt is unbuckled.
Automatic Locking Mode — If Equipped
In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-
locked. However, the belt will still retract to remove any
slack in the shoulder belt.
When To Use The Automatic Locking Mode
Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a child safety
seat is installed in the rear outboard seating position.
Children 12 years old and younger should be properly
restrained in the rear seat whenever possible.
54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
How To Use The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until
the entire belt is extracted.
3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will
hear a clicking sound. This indicates the safety belt is
now in the Automatic Locking Mode.
How to Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Disconnect the combination lap/shoulder belt from the
buckle and allow it to retract completely to disengage the
Automatic Locking Mode and activate the vehicle sensi-
tive (emergency) locking mode.
Energy Management Feature
This vehicle has a safety belt system with an energy
management feature in the front seating positions to help
further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a head-on
collision.
This safety belt system has a retractor assembly that is
designed to release webbing in a controlled manner. This
feature is designed to help reduce the belt force acting on
the occupant’s chest.
WARNING!
•
The belt and retractor assembly must be replaced
if the seat belt assembly “automatic locking retrac-
tor” feature or any other seat belt function is not
working properly when checked according to the
procedures in the Service Manual.
•
Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly
could increase the risk of injury in collisions.
Seat Belts and Pregnant Women
We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts
throughout their pregnancy. Keeping the mother safe is
the best way to keep the baby safe.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55
Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt
across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible.
Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the
abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take
the force if there is a collision.
Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is too short, even when fully extended, and
when the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage (if so
equipped) is in its lowest position, your authorized
dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender. This
extender should be used only if the existing belt is not
long enough. When it is not required, remove the ex-
tender, and store it.
WARNING!
Using a seat belt extender when not needed can
increase the risk of injury in a collision. Only use
when the lap belt is not long enough when it is worn
low and snug, and in the recommended seating
positions. Remove and store the extender when not
needed.
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - Airbags
This vehicle has airbags for both the driver and front
passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint
systems. The driver’s front airbag is mounted in the
steering wheel. The passenger’s front airbag is mounted
in the instrument panel, above the glove compartment.
The words SRS/AIRBAG are embossed on the airbag
covers.
NOTE: These airbags are certified to the new Federal
regulations for Advanced Airbags.
56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The Advanced Front Airbags have a multistage inflator
design. This allows the airbag to have different rates of
inflation that are based on the severity and type of
collision.
This vehicle may also be equipped with Supplemental
Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC) that run the
entire length of the headliner to protect the driver, front,
and rear passengers sitting next to a window.
1 — Driver Airbag
2 — Passenger Airbag
Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC)
Label Location
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57
NOTE: Airbag covers may not be obvious in the interior
trim, but they will open during airbag deployment.
Airbag System Components
The airbag system consists of the following:
•
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
•
Airbag Warning Light
•
Driver Front Airbag
•
Front Passenger Airbag
•
Supplemental Rear Impact Active Head Restraint for
Driver and Front Passenger
•
Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC)
— if equipped
•
Steering Wheel and Column
•
Instrument Panel
•
Knee Impact Bolsters
•
Front and Side Impact Sensors
•
Front Seat Belt Pretensioners — if equipped
•
Occupant Classification System (OCS) — Front Pas-
senger Seat Only
−
Occupant Classification Module (OCM)
−
Passenger Airbag Disable (PAD) Indicator Light
−
Weight Sensors
Front Seat Airbag Features
The Advanced Front Airbag system has multistage driver
and front passenger airbags. This system provides output
appropriate to the severity and type of collision as
determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC),
which may receive information from the impact sensors
at the front of the car.
58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an
impact that requires airbag deployment. The timing of
the second stage determines whether the output force is
low, medium, or high. If a low output is sufficient to meet
the need, the remaining gas in the inflator is expended.
NOTE: The passenger front airbag may not deploy even
when the driver front airbag has if the Occupant Classi-
fication System (refer to ⬙Occupant Classification System⬙
in this section) has determined the passenger seat is
empty or is occupied by someone that is classified in the
⬙child⬙size category. This could be a child, teenager, or
even a adult.
WARNING!
•
Do not put anything on or around the front airbag
covers or attempt to manually open them. You may
damage the airbags and you could be injured
because the airbags may no longer be functional.
These protective covers for the airbag cushions are
designed to open only when the airbags are inflat-
ing.
•
Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects
between you and the side airbags; the performance
could be adversely affected and/or objects could
be pushed into you, causing serious injury.
•
Do not drill, cut or tamper with the knee bolster in
any way.
•
Do not mount any accessories to the knee bolster
such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band radios,
etc.
(Continued)
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Do not have any accessory items installed which
will alter the roof, including adding a sunroof to
your vehicle. Do not add roof racks that require
permanent attachments (bolts or screws) for instal-
lation on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof
of the vehicle for any reason.
Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC)
SABIC airbags offer side-impact and vehicle rollover
protection to front and rear seat outboard occupants in
addition to that provided by the body structure. Each
airbag features inflated chambers placed adjacent to the
head of each outboard occupant that reduce the potential
for side-impact head injuries. The SABIC airbags deploy
downward, covering both windows on the impact side.
NOTE:
•
Should a vehicle rollover occur, the pretensioners
and/or SABIC airbags on both sides of the vehicle
may deploy.
•
Airbag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim;
but they will open during airbag deployment.
The system includes sensors adjacent to both front and
rear seat occupants that are calibrated to deploy the
SABIC airbags during impacts that require airbag occu-
pant protection.
60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
If your vehicle is equipped with left and right Side
Airbag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC), do not stack
luggage or other cargo up high enough to block the
location of the SABIC. The area where the side
curtain airbag is located should remain free from any
obstructions.
Along with seat belts and pretensioners, Advanced Front
Airbags work with the knee bolsters to provide improved
protection for the driver and front passenger. Side airbags
also work with seat belts to improve occupant protection.
Knee Impact Bolsters
The help protect the knees of the driver and the front
passenger, and position everyone for the best interaction
with the front airbag.
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the
risk of harm from a deploying airbag:
1. Children 12 years and younger should always ride
buckled up in a rear seat.
Infants in rear facing child restraints should NEVER ride
in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger airbag. An
airbag deployment could cause severe injury or death to
infants in that position.
Children that are not big enough to properly wear the
vehicle seat belt should be secured in the rear seat, in a
child restraint or belt-positioning booster seat. Older
children who do not use child restraints or belt-
positioning booster seats should ride properly buckled
up in the rear seat. Never allow children to slide the
shoulder belt behind them or under their arm.
If a child from 1 to 12 years old (not in a rear facing child
seat) must ride in the front passenger seat, move the seat
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61
as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint.
(Refer to information on Child Restraints in this section.)
You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly.
2. All occupants should ALWAYS wear their lap and
shoulder belts properly.
3. The driver and front passenger seats should be moved
back as far as practical to allow the Advanced Front
Airbags room to inflate.
4. Do not lean against the door. If your vehicle has side
airbags, and deployment occurs, the side airbags will
inflate forcefully into the space between you and the
door.
5. If the airbag system in this vehicle needs to be
modified to accommodate a disabled person, contact the
customer center. Phone numbers are provided under “If
You Need Assistance” in Section 9.
WARNING!
•
Relying on the airbags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The airbags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions, the airbags won’t deploy at all.
Always wear your seat belts even though you have
airbags.
•
Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during airbag deployment could cause seri-
ous injury, including death. Airbags need room to
inflate. Sit back, comfortably extending your arms
to reach the steering wheel or instrument panel.
•
The side curtain airbags need room to inflate. Do
not lean against the door or window. Sit upright in
the center of the seat.
62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
How the Airbag System Works
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
The ORC is part of a Federally regulated safety system
required for this vehicle.
Based on the impact sensors signals, a central electronic
ORC deploys the Advanced Front Airbags, side airbags,
and front seat belt, as required, depending on each type
of impact.
Advanced Front Airbags are designed to provide addi-
tional protection by supplementing the seat belts in
certain frontal collisions depending on the severity and
type of collision. Advanced Front Airbags are not ex-
pected to reduce the risk of injury in rear, side, or rollover
collisions.
The Advanced Front Airbags will not deploy in all frontal
collisions, including some that may produce substantial
vehicle damage — for example, some pole collisions,
truck underrides, and angle offset collisions. On the other
hand, depending on the type and location of impact,
Advanced Front Airbags may deploy in crashes with
little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a severe
initial deceleration.
The side airbags will not deploy in all side collisions. Side
airbag deployment will depend on the severity and type
of collision.
Because airbag sensors measure vehicle deceleration over
time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are not
good indicators of whether or not an airbag should have
deployed.
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all crashes,
and also are needed to help keep you in position, away
from an inflating airbag.
The ORC also monitors the readiness of the electronic
parts of the system whenever the ignition switch is in the
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63
START or ON positions. If the key is in the LOCK
position, in the ACC position, or not in the ignition, the
airbags are not on and will not inflate.
The ORC contains a backup power supply system that
may deploy the airbags even if the battery loses power or
it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
•
Also, the ORC turns on the “Airbag Warn-
ing Light” for six to eight seconds for a
self-check when the ignition is first turned
ON. After the self-check, the “Airbag Warn-
ing Light” will turn off. If the ORC detects a malfunc-
tion in any part of the system, it turns on the “Airbag
Warning Light” either momentarily or continuously. A
single chime will sound if the light comes on again
after initial startup.
WARNING!
Ignoring the “Airbag Warning Light” in your instru-
ment panel could mean you won’t have the airbags to
protect you in a collision. If the light does not come
on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes
on as you drive, have the airbag system checked right
away.
•
The Occupant Classification System (OCS) is part of
a Federally regulated safety system required for this
vehicle. It is designed to turn off the front passenger
airbag for an empty seat and for occupants classified
in a category other than that of an adult. This could be
a child, teenager, or even a small size adult.
NOTE: Children 12 years and younger should always
ride buckled up in a rear seat in an appropriate child
restraint.
64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
•
The Passenger Airbag Disable (PAD) Indicator Light
(an amber light located in the center of the instrument
panel) tells the driver and front passenger when the
front passenger airbag is turned off. The “PAD Indi-
cator Light” illuminates the words ⬙PASS AIR BAG
OFF⬙to show that the passenger airbag will not inflate
during a collision requiring airbags. When the front
passenger seat is empty or when very light objects are
placed on the seat, the passenger airbag will not inflate
even though the “PAD Indicator Light” is not illumi-
nated.
Indicator Light Location
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65
The “PAD Indicator Light” should not be illuminated
when an adult passenger is properly seated in the
front passenger seat. In this case, the airbag is ready to
be inflated if a collision requiring an airbag occurs. For
all other occupants, the “PAD Indicator Light” will be
illuminated indicating that the front passenger airbag
is turned off and it will not inflate. If the “PAD
Indicator Light” is not illuminated, DO NOT assume
the airbag is turned off and move the child restraint to
the rear seat. A deploying passenger airbag can cause
death or serious injury to a child in a rear facing infant
seat.
NOTE: Even though this vehicle is equipped with an
Occupant Classification System, children 12 years and
younger should always ride buckled up in a rear seat in
an appropriate child restraint.
Front Passenger
Seat Occupant
Passenger Air-
bag Disable
(PAD) Indicator
Light
Airbag Status
Adult OFF ON
Grocery Bags,
Heavy Brief-
cases, and Other
Relatively Light
Objects
ON OFF
Empty or Very
Small Objects OFF* OFF
* Since the system senses weight, some small objects
will turn the PAD Indicator Light on.
The OCS classifies an occupant using weight sensors
mounted in the base of the front passenger seat. Any
weight on the seat will be sensed by the system. Objects
hanging on the seat or other passengers pushing down
on the seat will also be sensed. The weight of an adult
66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
will cause the system to turn the airbag on. In this case,
the OCS has classified the occupant of the seat as an
adult. An adult occupant needs to sit in a normal position
(with their feet on or near the floor) in order to be
properly classified. Reclining the seat back too far may
change how an occupant is classified by the OCS.
Drivers and adult passengers should verify that the
“PAD Indicator Light” is not illuminated when an adult
is riding in the front passenger seat. If an adult occu-
pant’s weight is transferred to another part of the vehicle
(like the door or instrument panel), the weight sensors in
the seat may not properly classify the occupant. Objects
lodged under the seat or between the seat and the center
console can prevent the occupant’s weight from being
measured properly and may result in the occupant being
improperly classified. Ensure that the front passenger
seatback does not touch anything placed on the back seat
because this can also affect occupant classification. Also,
if you fold down the rear seat check to be sure it doesn’t
touch the front passenger seat.
If the front passenger seat is damaged in any way, it
should only be serviced by an authorized dealer. If the
seat is removed (or even if the seat attachment bolts are
loosened or tightened in any way), take the vehicle to an
authorized dealer.
If there is a fault present in the OCS, the “Airbag Warning
Light” (a red light located in the center of the instrument
cluster directly in front of the driver) will be turned on.
This indicates that you should take the vehicle to an
authorized dealer. The “Airbag Warning Light” is turned
on whenever there is a fault that can affect the operation
of the airbag system. If there is a fault present in the OCS,
both the “PAD Indicator Light” and the “Airbag Warning
Light” are illuminated to show that the passenger airbag
is turned off until the fault is cleared. If an object is
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67
lodged under the seat and interferes with operation of
the weight sensors, a fault will occur which turns on both
the “PAD Indicator Light” and the “Airbag Warning
Light.” Once the lodged object is removed, the fault will
be automatically cleared after a short period of time.
•
The Driver and Passenger Airbag/Inflator Units are
located in the center of the steering wheel and the right
side of the instrument panel. When the ORC detects a
collision requiring the airbags, it signals the inflator
units. A large quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to
inflate the Advanced Front Airbags. Different airbag
inflation rates are possible based on collision severity
and type. The steering wheel hub trim cover and the
upper right side of the instrument panel separate and
fold out of the way as the bags inflate to their full size.
The bags fully inflate in about 50 to 70 milliseconds.
This is about half of the time it takes to blink your eyes.
The bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain
the driver and front passenger.
The driver front airbag gas is vented through the vent
holes in the sides of the airbag. The passenger front
airbag gas is vented through the vent holes in the sides
of the airbag. In this way, the airbags do not interfere
with your control of the vehicle.
Along with seat belts and pretensioners, Advanced Front
Airbags work with the knee bolsters to provide improved
protection for the driver and front passenger. Side airbags
also work with seat belts to improve occupant protection.
•
The Occupant Classification Module (OCM) is lo-
cated beneath the front passenger seat. The OCM
classifies the occupant into categories based on the
measurements made by the seat weight sensors. The
OCM communicates with the Occupant Restraint Con-
troller (ORC). The ORC uses the occupant category to
determine whether the front passenger airbag should
be turned off. It also determines the rate of airbag
inflation during a collision.
68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
•
Your vehicle has four Weight Sensors located between
the seat and the floor pan. The weight sensors measure
applied weight and transfers that information to the
OCM.
•
The Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains
(SABIC) may deploy during collisions where the
impact is confined to a particular area of the side of the
vehicle, depending on the severity and type of colli-
sion. In these events, the ORC will deploy the SABIC
only on the impact side of the vehicle. Because airbag
sensors estimate deceleration over time, vehicle speed
and damage by themselves are not good indicators of
whether or not an airbag should have deployed.
A quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the
side curtain airbag. The inflating side curtain airbag
pushes the outside edge of the headliner out of the
way and covers the window. The airbag inflates in
about 30 milliseconds (about one quarter of the time it
takes to blink your eyes) with enough force to injure
you if you are not belted and seated properly, or if
items are positioned in the area where the side curtain
airbag inflates. This especially applies to children. The
side curtain airbag is only about 3
1
⁄
2
inches (9 cm) thick
when it is inflated.
The system includes sensors adjacent to both front and
rear seat occupants that are calibrated to deploy the
SABIC airbags during impacts that require airbag occu-
pant protection.
WARNING!
If your vehicle is equipped with left and right Side
Airbag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC), do not stack
luggage or other cargo up high enough to block the
location of the SABIC. The area where the side
curtain airbag is located should remain free from any
obstructions.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69
The front passenger seat assembly contains critical com-
ponents that affect the front passenger airbag deploy-
ment. Correctly functioning front passenger seat compo-
nents are critical for the Occupant Classification System
(OCS) to properly classify the front passenger and calcu-
late the proper airbag deployment. Do not make any
modifications to the front passenger seat components or
assembly.
The following requirements must be strictly adhered to:
•
Do not modify the front passenger seat assembly or
components in any way.
•
At no time should any Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) component or SRS related component or fas-
tener be modified or replaced with any part except
those which are approved by Chrysler Group
LLC/Mopar威.
WARNING!
Unapproved modifications or service procedures to
the front passenger seat assembly or its related com-
ponents may inadvertently change the airbag deploy-
ment in case of a frontal crash. This could result in
death or serious injury to the front seat passenger if
the vehicle is involved in an accident. A modified
vehicle may not comply with required Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS) and/or Canadian
Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (CMVSS).
If a Deployment Occurs
The airbags are designed to deflate immediately after
deployment.
NOTE: Front and/or side airbags will not deploy in all
collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with
the airbag system.
70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
If you do have a collision which deploys the airbags, any
or all of the following may occur:
•
The nylon airbag material may sometimes cause abra-
sions and/or skin reddening to the driver and front
passenger as the airbags deploy and unfold. The
abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those
you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium
floor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals.
They are not permanent and normally heal quickly.
However, if you haven’t healed significantly within a
few days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor
immediately.
•
As the airbags deflate you may see some smoke-like
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the
process that generates the non-toxic gas used for
airbag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate
the skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye
irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or
throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation
continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on
your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s in-
structions for cleaning.
Do not drive your vehicle after the airbags have de-
ployed. If you are involved in another collision, the
airbags will not be in place to protect you.
WARNING!
Deployed airbags cannot protect you in another col-
lision. Have the airbags, and seat belt retractor as-
sembly replaced by an authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact causing airbag deployment, if
the communication network remains intact, and the
power remains intact, depending on the nature of the
event the ORC will determine whether to have the
Enhanced Accident Response System to perform the
following functions:
•
Cut off fuel to the engine.
•
Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or
until the ignition key is turned off.
•
Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as
the battery has power or until the ignition key is
removed.
•
Unlock the doors automatically.
Maintaining Your Airbag System
WARNING!
•
Modifications to any part of the airbag system
could cause it to fail when you need it. You could
be injured if the airbag system is not there to
protect you. Do not modify the components or
wiring, including adding any kind of badges or
stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the
upper passenger side of the instrument panel. Do
not modify the front bumper or vehicle body
structure.
(Continued)
72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Do not attempt to modify any part of your ad-
vanced airbag system. The airbag may inflate
accidentally or may not function properly if modi-
fications are made. Take your vehicle to an autho-
rized dealer for any advanced airbag system ser-
vice. If it is necessary to modify an advanced
airbag system for persons with disabilities, contact
your authorized dealer.
•
It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the
airbag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who
works on your vehicle that it has an airbag system.
Airbag Warning Light
You will want to have the airbag system ready to inflate
for your protection in an impact. The airbag system is
designed to be maintenance free. If any of the following
occurs, have an authorized dealer service the system
promptly:
•
The Airbag Warning Light does not come on or flickers
during the six to eight seconds when the ignition
switch is first turned ON.
•
The light remains on or flickers after the six to eight
second interval.
•
The light flickers or comes on and remains on while
driving.
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
In the event of an accident, your vehicle is designed to
record up to five seconds of specific vehicle data param-
eters (see list below) in an event data recorder prior to the
moment of airbag deployment, or near deployment (if
applicable), and up to a quarter second of either high-
speed deceleration data or change in velocity during
and/or after airbag deployment or near-deployment.
EDR data is ONLY recorded if an airbag deploys, or
nearly deploys, and is otherwise unavailable.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73
NOTE:
1. A near-deployment event occurs when the airbag
sensor detects severe vehicle deceleration usually indica-
tive of a crash, but not severe enough to warrant airbag
deployment.
2. Under certain circumstances, EDR data may not be
recorded (e.g., loss of battery power).
In conjunction with other data gathered during a com-
plete accident investigation, the electronic data may be
used by Chrysler Group LLC and others to learn more
about the possible causes of crashes and associated
injuries in order to assess and improve vehicle perfor-
mance. In addition to crash investigations initiated by
Chrysler Group LLC, such investigations may be re-
quested by customers, insurance carriers, government
officials, and professional crash researchers, such as those
associated with universities, and with hospital and insur-
ance organizations.
In the event that an investigation is undertaken by
Chrysler Group LLC (regardless of initiative), the com-
pany or its designated representative will first obtain
permission of the appropriate custodial entity for the
vehicle (usually the vehicle owner or lessee) before
accessing the electronic data stored, unless ordered to
download data by a court with legal jurisdiction (i.e.,
pursuant to a warrant). A copy of the data will be
provided to the custodial entity upon request. General
data that does not identify particular vehicles or crashes
may be released for incorporation in aggregate crash
databases, such as those maintained by the U.S. govern-
ment and various states. Data of a potentially sensitive
nature, such as would identify a particular driver, ve-
hicle, or crash, will be treated confidentially. Confidential
data will not be disclosed by Chrysler Group LLC to any
third party except when:
74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
1. Used for research purposes, such as to match data
with a particular crash record in an aggregate database,
provided confidentiality of personal data is thereafter
preserved.
2. Used in defense of litigation involving a Chrysler
Group LLC product.
3. Requested by police under a legal warrant.
4. Otherwise required by law.
Data parameters that are recorded:
•
Diagnostic trouble code(s) and warning light status for
electronically-controlled safety systems, including the
airbag system
•
Vehicle speed
•
Engine RPM
•
Brake switch status
•
Pedal position
•
And other parameters depending on vehicle
configuration
Child Restraint
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up all the
time, including babies and children. Every state in the
United States and all Canadian provinces require that
small children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the
law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
Children 12 years and younger should ride properly
buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash
statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in
the rear seats rather than in the front.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child, even a tiny baby,
can become a projectile inside the vehicle. The force
required to hold even an infant on your lap can
become so great that you could not hold the child, no
matter how strong you are. The child and others
could be badly injured. Any child riding in your
vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child’s
size.
There are different sizes and types of restraints for
children from newborn size to the child almost large
enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child
seat Owner’s Manual to ensure you have the right seat
for your child. Use the restraint that is correct for your
child.
Infants and Child Restraints
•
Safety experts recommend that children ride
rearward-facing in the vehicle until they are at least
one year old and weigh at least 20 lbs (9 kg). Two types
of child restraints can be used rearward-facing: infant
carriers and “convertible” child seats.
•
The infant carrier is only used rearward-facing in the
vehicle. It is recommended for children who weigh up
to about 20 lbs (9 kg). “Convertible” child seats can be
used either rearward-facing or forward-facing in the
vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a higher
weight limit in the rearward-facing direction than
infant carriers do, so they can be used rearward-facing
by children who weigh more than 20 lbs (9 kg) but are
less than one year old. Both types of child restraints are
held in the vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt or the
LATCH child restraint anchorage system. Refer to
76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
“LATCH — Child Seat Anchorage System (Lower
Anchors and Tether for CHildren)” in this section.
•
Rearward-facing child seats must NEVER be used in
the front seat of a vehicle with the front passenger
airbag unless the airbag is turned off. An airbag
deployment could cause severe injury or death to
infants in this position.
Older Children and Child Restraints
Children who weigh more than 20 lbs (9 kg) and who are
older than one year can ride forward-facing in the
vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and convertible child
seats used in the forward-facing direction are for children
who weigh 20 to 40 lbs (9 to 18 kg) and who are older
than one year. These child seats are also held in the
vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt or the LATCH child
restraint anchorage system. Refer to “LATCH — Child
Seat Anchorage System (Lower Anchors and Tether for
CHildren)” in this section.
The belt-positioning booster seat is for children weighing
more than 40 lbs (18 kg), but who are still too small to fit
the vehicle’s seat belts properly. If the child cannot sit
with knees bent over the vehicle’s seat cushion while the
child’s back is against the seatback, they should use a
belt-positioning booster seat. The child and belt-
positioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the
lap/shoulder belt.
Children Too Large for Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend
over the front of the seat when their back is against the
seat back, should use the lap/shoulder belt in a rear seat.
•
Make sure that the child is upright in the seat.
•
The lap portion of the seat belt should be low on the
hips and as snug as possible.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77
•
Check belt fit periodically. A child’s squirming or
slouching can move the belt out of position.
•
If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move the
child closer to the center of the vehicle. Never allow a
child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind
their back.
NOTE: For additional information, refer to
www.seatcheck.org or call 1–866–SEATCHECK. Cana-
dian residents, should refer to Transport Canada’s web-
site for additional information. http://www.tc.gc.ca/
roadsafety/safedrivers/childsafety/index.htm
WARNING!
•
Improper installation can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a
collision. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions ex-
actly when installing an infant or child restraint.
•
A rearward- facing infant restraint should only be
used in a rear seat. A rearward-facing infant re-
straint in the front seat may be struck by a deploy-
ing passenger airbag, which may cause severe or
fatal injury to the infant.
78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Here are some tips on getting the most out of your child
restraint:
•
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it
has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
Standards. The manufacturer also recommends that
you try a child restraint in the vehicle seats where you
will use it before you buy it.
•
The restraint must be appropriate for your child’s
weight and height. Check the label on the restraint for
weight and height limits.
•
Carefully follow the instructions that come with the
restraint. If you install the restraint improperly, it may
not work when you need it.
•
Buckle the child into the restraint exactly as the
manufacturer’s instructions tell you.
•
When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in the
vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the vehicle.
Do not leave it loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or
collision, it could strike the occupants or seat backs
and cause serious personal injury.
LATCH — Child Seat Anchorage System (Lower
Anchors and Tether for CHildren)
Your vehicle’s rear seat is equipped with the child
restraint anchorage system called LATCH. The LATCH
system provides for the installation of the child restraint
without using the vehicle’s seat belts, instead securing
the child restraint using lower anchorages and upper
tether straps from the child restraint to the vehicle
structure.
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems are now avail-
able. However, because the lower anchorages are to be
introduced over a period of years, child restraint systems
having attachments for those anchorages will continue to
have features for installation using the vehicle’s seat
belts. Child restraints having tether straps and hooks for
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79
connection to the top tether anchorages, have been
available for some time. For some older child restraints,
many child restraint manufacturers offer add-on tether
strap kits or retrofit kits. You are urged to take advantage
of all the available attachments provided with your child
restraint in any vehicle.
All three rear seating positions have lower anchorages
that are capable of accommodating LATCH-compatible
child seats having fixed lower attachments or flexible
webbing-mounted lower attachments. Child seats with
fixed lower attachments must be installed in the out-
board seating positions only. The center seating position
will accommodate LATCH-compatible lower anchorages
with flexible webbing mounted attachments only. Re-
gardless of the specific type of lower attachment. NEVER
install LATCH-compatible child seats such that two seats
share a common lower anchorage.
If you are installing LATCH-compatible child restraints
in adjacent rear seating positions, you can use the
LATCH anchors or the vehicle’s seat belt for the outboard
position, but you must use the vehicle’s seat belt at the
center position. If your child restraints are not LATCH-
compatible, you can only install the child restraints using
the vehicle’s seat belts. Please refer to “Installing the
LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint System” and “In-
stalling Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt” in
this section for typical installation instructions.
Installing the LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint
System
We urge you to carefully follow the directions of the
manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Not all
child restraint systems will be installed as described here.
Again, carefully follow the installation instructions that
were provided with the child restraint system.
80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The rear seat lower anchorages are round bars, located at
the rear of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback,
and are just visible when you lean into the rear seat to
install the child restraint. You will easily feel them if you
run your finger along the intersection of the seatback and
seat cushion surfaces.
In addition, there are tether strap anchorages behind each
rear seating position located on the back of the seat.
Latch Anchorages
Tether Strap Mounting
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 81
Many, but not all restraint systems will be equipped with
separate straps on each side, with each having a hook or
connector for attachment to the lower anchorage and a
means of adjusting the tension in the strap. Forward-
facing toddler restraints and some rear-facing infant
restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap, a
hook for attachment to the tether strap anchorage and a
means of adjusting the tension of the strap.
You will first loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and
on the tether strap so that you can more easily attach the
hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages. Next,
attach the lower hooks or connectors over the top of the
anchorage bars, pushing aside the seat cover material.
Then, locate the tether anchorage directly behind the seat
where you are placing the child restraint and attach the
tether strap to the anchorage, being careful to route the
tether strap to provide the most direct path between the
anchor and the child restraint. For the outboard seating
positions, route the tether underneath the head rest and
attach the hook to the tether anchor located on the back
of the seat. Finally, tighten all three straps as you push the
child restraint rearward and downward into the seat,
removing slack in the straps according to the child
restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
WARNING!
Improper installation of a child restraint to the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant or
child restraint. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions exactly
when installing an infant or child restraint.
82 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat
Belt
The passenger seat belts are equipped with either cinch-
ing latch plates or automatic locking retractors, which are
designed to keep the lap portion tight around the child
restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip. If
the seat belt has a cinching latch plate, pulling up on the
shoulder portion of the lap/shoulder belt will tighten the
belt. However, any seat belt system may loosen with
time, so check the belt occasionally, and pull it tight if
necessary.
If the seat belt has an automatic locking retractor, pull the
belt from the retractor until there is enough slack to allow
you to pass the belt through the child restraint and slide
the latch plate into the buckle. Then, pull the belt until it
is all extracted from the retractor. Allow the belt to return
to the retractor, pulling on the excess webbing to tighten
the lap portion around the child restraint. Refer to
“Automatic Locking Mode” earlier in this section.
In the rear seat, you may have trouble tightening the
lap/shoulder belt on the child restraint because the
buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path opening
on the restraint. Disconnect the latch plate from the
buckle and twist the short buckle-end belt several times
to shorten it. Insert the latch plate into the buckle with the
RELEASE button facing out.
If the belt still can’t be tightened, or if pulling and
pushing on the restraint loosens the belt, you may need
to do something more. Disconnect the latch plate from
the buckle, turn the buckle around, and insert the latch
plate into the buckle again. If you still can’t make the
child restraint secure, try a different seating position.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 83
To attach a child restraint tether strap:
Route the tether strap over the seatback and attach the
hook to the tether anchor located on the back of the seat.
For the outboard seating positions, route the tether
underneath the headrest and attach the hook to the tether
anchor located on the back of the seat.
WARNING!
An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
increased head motion and possible injury to the
child. Use only the anchor positions directly behind
the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether
strap.
Transporting Pets
Airbags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly
injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in
a collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses
or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
Tether Strap Mounting
84 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the engine in
your vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km).
After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or
55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the
limits of local traffic laws, contributes to a good break-in.
Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detri-
mental and should be avoided.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a
high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil
changes should be consistent with anticipated climate
conditions under which vehicle operations will occur.
The recommended viscosity and quality grades are
shown in “Engine Oil”, under “Maintenance Procedures”
in section 7 of this manual. NON-DETERGENT OR
STRAIGHT MINERAL OILS MUST NEVER BE USED.
A new engine may consume some oil during its first few
thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This should be
considered a normal part of the break-in and not inter-
preted as an indication of difficulty.
SAFETY TIPS
Transporting Passengers
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO
AREA.
WARNING!
•
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seri-
ously injured or killed.
(Continued)
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 85
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
•
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
Exhaust Gas
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO)
follow these safety tips:
Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined
areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or
out of the area.
If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine
running, adjust your heating or cooling controls to force
outside air into the vehicle. Set the blower at high speed.
If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate open,
make sure that all windows are closed and the climate
control BLOWER switch is set at high speed. DO NOT
use the recirculation mode.
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
86 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the com-
plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open
seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,
inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside the
Vehicle
Seat Belts
Inspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced
immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system.
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after
a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor,
torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding belt
or retractor condition, replace the belt.
Airbag Warning Light
The light should come on and remain on for six to eight
seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first
turned ON. If the light is not lit during starting, see your
authorized dealer. If the light stays on, flickers, or comes
on while driving, have the system checked by an autho-
rized dealer.
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
the blower control on high speed. You should be able to
feel the air directed against the windshield. See your
authorized dealer for service if your defroster is
inoperable.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 87
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
the Vehicle
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
lodged in the tread. Inspect the tread and sidewall for
cuts and cracks. Check the wheel nuts for tightness.
Check the tires (including spare) for proper pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of exterior lights
while you work the controls. Check turn signal and high
beam indicator lights on the instrument panel.
Door Latches
Check for positive closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,
engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
fumes are detected or if fuel, power steering fluid, or
brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause should be
located and corrected immediately.
88 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵Mirrors .............................. 94
▫Inside Day/Night Mirror ................ 94
▫Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped . . . 94
▫Outside Mirrors ...................... 95
▫Power Mirrors ....................... 96
▫Heated Mirrors — If Equipped ............ 97
▫Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped . . . 97
▫Sun Visor “Slide-On-Rod” Feature —
If Equipped ......................... 97
䡵uconnect™ phone — If Equipped ........... 98
▫Operation ......................... 100
▫Phone Call Features .................. 108
▫uconnect™ phone Features ..............111
▫Advanced Phone Connectivity ........... 116
▫Things You Should Know About Your
uconnect™ phone .................... 118
▫General Information .................. 126
3
䡵Voice Recognition (VR) System —
If Equipped .......................... 126
▫Voice Recognition (VR) System Operation . . . 126
▫Commands ........................ 128
▫Voice Training ...................... 131
䡵Seats .............................. 131
▫Manual Front Seat Adjustments .......... 132
▫Recliner Adjustment .................. 133
▫Lumbar Support — If Equipped .......... 134
▫Fold-Flat Front Passenger Seat —
If Equipped ........................ 134
▫Power Seat — If Equipped .............. 135
▫Adjusting Active Head Restraints ......... 136
▫Heated Seats — If Equipped ............ 138
▫60/40 Split Folding Rear Seat With Fold-Flat
Feature ........................... 139
䡵Driver Memory Seat — If Equipped ........ 142
▫Programming The Memory Feature ....... 142
▫Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless
Entry Transmitter To Memory ........... 144
▫Memory Position Recall ................ 144
▫Easy Entry/Exit Seat (Available With
Memory Seat Only) ................... 145
䡵To Open And Close The Hood ............ 146
䡵Lights ............................. 148
▫Multifunction Lever .................. 148
▫Headlights And Parking Lights .......... 149
▫Automatic Headlights — If Equipped ...... 149
90 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫Headlights With Wipers (Available With
Automatic Headlights Only) ............ 150
▫Headlight Time Delay — If Equipped ...... 150
▫Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped .... 151
▫Lights-On Reminder .................. 151
▫Fog Lights — If Equipped .............. 152
▫Turn Signals ........................ 152
▫Lane Change Assist ................... 153
▫High/Low Beam Switch ............... 153
▫Flash-To-Pass ....................... 153
▫Instrument Panel Dimmer .............. 153
▫Map/Reading Lights .................. 154
▫Cargo Light ........................ 154
▫Battery Saver Feature ................. 154
䡵Windshield Wipers And Washers .......... 155
▫Windshield Wiper Operation ............ 155
▫Intermittent Wiper System .............. 156
▫Windshield Washers .................. 157
▫Mist Feature ........................ 158
▫Headlights With Wipers (Available With
Automatic Headlights Only) ............ 159
䡵Tilt Steering Column ................... 159
䡵Electronic Speed Control — If Equipped ..... 160
▫To Activate ......................... 161
▫To Set a Desired Speed ................ 161
▫To Deactivate ....................... 162
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 91
▫To Resume Speed .................... 162
▫To Vary The Speed Setting .............. 162
▫To Accelerate For Passing .............. 163
䡵Parksense威Rear Park Assist — If Equipped . . . 163
▫Parksense威Sensors ................... 164
▫Parksense威Warning Display ............ 164
▫Parksense威Display ................... 165
▫Enabling And Disabling Parksense威....... 169
▫Service The Parksense威Rear Park Assist
System ............................ 169
▫Cleaning The Parksense威System ......... 170
▫Parksense威System Usage Precautions ...... 170
䡵Garage Door Opener — If Equipped ........ 173
▫Programming HomeLink威.............. 174
▫Gate Operator/Canadian Programming .... 177
▫Using HomeLink威................... 178
▫
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink威Button
. . 178
▫Security ........................... 178
▫Troubleshooting Tips .................. 179
▫General Information .................. 179
䡵Power Sunroof — If Equipped ............ 180
▫Opening Sunroof — Express ............ 181
▫Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode ........ 181
▫Closing Sunroof — Express ............. 181
▫Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode ........ 181
▫Pinch Protect Feature ................. 181
92 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫Pinch Protect Override ................ 182
▫Venting Sunroof — Express ............. 182
▫Sunshade Operation .................. 182
▫Wind Buffeting ...................... 182
▫Sunroof Maintenance ................. 182
▫Ignition Off Operation ................. 183
䡵Sky Slider™ Full Length Open Roof —
If Equipped .......................... 183
▫Sky Slider™ Usage Precautions .......... 183
▫Sky Slider™ Control .................. 186
▫Opening The Sky Slider™ .............. 186
▫Closing The Sky Slider™ ............... 187
▫Anti-Pinch Protect Feature .............. 188
▫Wind Buffeting ...................... 188
▫Sky Slider™ Maintenance .............. 188
䡵Electrical Power Outlet ................. 189
䡵Cupholders .......................... 191
䡵Storage ............................. 192
▫Front Storage Compartment ............. 192
▫Console Storage Compartment ........... 192
䡵Cargo Area Features ................... 193
▫Cargo Load Floor .................... 193
䡵Rear Window Features .................. 199
▫Rear Window Wiper/Washer ............ 199
▫Rear Window Defroster ................ 200
䡵Roof Luggage Rack — If Equipped ......... 201
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 93
MIRRORS
Inside Day/Night Mirror
A two-point pivot system allows for horizontal and
vertical mirror adjustment. Adjust the mirror to center on
the view through the rear window.
Headlight glare can be reduced by moving the small
control under the mirror to the night position (toward the
rear of vehicle). The mirror should be adjusted while set
in the day position (toward the windshield).
Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare
from vehicles behind you. You can turn the feature on or
off by pressing the button at the base of the mirror. A light
next to the button will illuminate to indicate when the
dimming feature is activated.
Adjusting Rearview Mirror
94 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
Outside Mirrors
To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirror(s)
to center on the adjacent lane of traffic and a slight
overlap of the view obtained from the inside mirror.
NOTE: The passenger side convex outside mirror will
give a much wider view to the rear, and especially of the
lane next to your vehicle.
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away
than they really are. Relying too much on your
passenger side convex mirror could cause you to
collide with another vehicle or other object. Use your
inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a
vehicle seen in the passenger side convex mirror.
Automatic Dimming Mirror
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 95
Power Mirrors
The power mirror switch is located on the driver’s door
trim panel.
Models with Express Window Feature
Press and release the mirror select button marked L (left)
or R (right) and then press one of the four arrow buttons
to move the mirror in the direction the arrow is pointing.
The selection will time out after 30 seconds of inactivity
to guard against accidentally moving a mirror position
following an adjustment.
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Driver Memory
Seat, you can use your Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter or the memory switch on the instrument
panel to return the power mirrors to pre-programmed
positions. Refer to “Driver Memory Seat” in this section
for details.
Models without Express Window Feature
Press the mirror select button marked L (left) or R (right)
and then press one of the four arrow buttons to move the
mirror in the direction the arrow is pointing.
Power Mirror Switch
1 — Mirror Direction Control
2 — Left and Right Mirror Select
96 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This
feature is activated whenever you turn on the rear
window defroster. Refer to “Rear Window Features” in
this section, for further information.
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped
An illuminated vanity mirror is on each sun visor. To use
the mirror, rotate the sun visor down and swing the
mirror cover upward. The lights will turn on automati-
cally. Closing the mirror cover will turn off the light.
Sun Visor “Slide-On-Rod” Feature — If Equipped
The sun visor “Slide-On Rod” feature allows for addi-
tional flexibility in positioning the sun visor to block out
the sun.
1. Fold down the sun visor.
Illuminated Vanity Mirror
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 97
2. Unclip the visor from the center clip.
3. Pull the sun visor toward the inside rearview mirror to
extend it.
uconnect™ phone — IF EQUIPPED
uconnect™ phone is a voice-activated, hands-free, in-
vehicle communications system. uconnect™ phone al-
lows you to dial a phone number with your cellular
phone using simple voice commands (e.g., ⬙Call” ѧ
“Mike” ѧ”Work⬙or ⬙Dial” ѧ“248-555-1212⬙). Your cellular
phone’s audio is transmitted through your vehicle’s
audio system; the system will automatically mute your
radio when using the uconnect™ phone.
NOTE: The uconnect™ phone requires a cellular phone
equipped with the Bluetooth威⬙Hands-Free Profile,⬙Ver-
sion 0.96 or higher. See the uconnect™ website for
supported phones.
For uconnect™ customer support, visit the following
websites:
•
www.chrysler.com/uconnect
•
www.dodge.com/uconnect
•
www.jeep.com/uconnect
•
or call 1–877–855–8400
uconnect™ phone allows you to transfer calls between
the system and your cellular phone as you enter or exit
your vehicle and enables you to mute the system’s
microphone for private conversation.
The uconnect™ phone is driven through your Bluetooth威
“Hands-Free Profile” cellular phone. uconnect™ features
Bluetooth威technology - the global standard that enables
different electronic devices to connect to each other
without wires or a docking station, so uconnect™ phone
works no matter where you stow your cellular phone (be
98 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
it your purse, pocket, or briefcase), as long as your phone
is turned on and has been paired to the vehicle’s
uconnect™ phone. The uconnect™ phone allows up to
seven cellular phones to be linked to the system. Only
one linked (or paired) cellular phone can be used with the
system at a time. The system is available in English,
Spanish, or French languages.
WARNING!
Any voice commanded system should be used only
in safe driving conditions following local laws and
phone use. All attention should be kept on the
roadway ahead. Failure to do so may result in an
accident causing serious injury or death.
Phone Button
Depending on the vehicle options, either the
radio or the mirror will contain the two control
buttons (phone button) and (voice
recognition button) that will enable you to
access the system.
Voice Recognition Button
Actual button location may vary with the ra-
dio. The individual buttons are described in the
“Operation” section.
The uconnect™ phone can be used with any Hands-Free
Profile certified Bluetooth威cellular phone. See the
uconnect™ website for supported phones. If your cellu-
lar phone supports a different profile (e.g., Headset
Profile) you may not be able to use any uconnect™ phone
features. Refer to your cellular service provider or the
phone manufacturer for details.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 99
The uconnect™ phone is fully integrated with the vehi-
cle’s audio system. The volume of the uconnect™ phone
can be adjusted either from the radio volume control
knob or from the steering wheel radio control (right
switch), if so equipped.
The radio display will be used for visual prompts from
the uconnect™ phone such as ⬙CELL⬙or caller ID on
certain radios.
Operation
Voice commands can be used to operate the uconnect™
phone and to navigate through the uconnect™ phone
menu structure. Voice commands are required after most
uconnect™ phone prompts. You will be prompted for a
specific command and then guided through the available
options.
•
Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait for
the beep, which follows the ⬙Ready⬙prompt or another
prompt.
•
For certain operations, compound commands can be
used. For example, instead of saying ⬙Setup⬙and then
⬙Phone Pairing,⬙the following compound command
can be said: ⬙Setup Phone Pairing.⬙
•
For each feature explanation in this section, only the
combined form of the voice command is given. You
can also break the commands into parts and say each
part of the command when you are asked for it. For
example, you can use the combined form voice com-
mand ⬙Phonebook New Entry,⬙or you can break the
combined form command into two voice commands:
⬙Phonebook⬙and ⬙New Entry.⬙Please remember, the
uconnect™ phone works best when you talk in a
normal conversational tone, as if speaking to someone
sitting a few feet/meters away from you.
Voice Command Tree
Refer to “Voice Tree” in this section.
100 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Help Command
If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you want to
know your options at any prompt, say ⬙Help⬙following
the beep. The uconnect™ phone will play all the options
at any prompt if you ask for help.
To activate the uconnect™ phone from idle, simply press
the button and follow the audible prompts for
directions. All uconnect™ phone sessions begin with a
press of the button on the radio control head.
Cancel Command
At any prompt, after the beep, you can say ⬙Cancel⬙and
you will be returned to the main menu. However, in a
few instances the system will take you back to the
previous menu.
Pair (Link) uconnect™ phone to a Cellular Phone
To begin using your uconnect™ phone, you must pair
your compatible Bluetooth威enabled cellular phone.
To complete the pairing process, you will need to refer-
ence your cellular phone Owner’s Manual. The
uconnect™ website may also provide detailed instruc-
tions for pairing.
The following are general phone to uconnect™ phone
pairing instructions:
•
Press the button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Setup Phone Pairing.⬙
•
When prompted, after the beep, say ⬙Pair a Phone⬙and
follow the audible prompts.
•
You will be asked to say a four-digit Personal Identi-
fication Number (PIN), which you will later need to
enter into your cellular phone. You can enter any
four-digit PIN. You will not need to remember this PIN
after the initial pairing process.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 101
•
For identification purposes, you will be prompted to
give the uconnect™ phone a name for your cellular
phone. Each cellular phone that is paired should be
given a unique phone name.
•
You will then be asked to give your cellular phone a
priority level between one and seven, with one being
the highest priority. You can pair up to seven cellular
phones to your uconnect™ phone. However, at any
given time, only one cellular phone can be in use,
connected to your uconnect™ phone. The priority
allows the uconnect™ phone to know which cellular
phone to use if multiple cellular phones are in the
vehicle at the same time. For example, if priority three
and priority five phones are present in the vehicle, the
uconnect™ phone will use the priority three cellular
phone when you make a call. You can select to use a
lower priority cellular phone at any time (refer to
⬙Advanced Phone Connectivity⬙in this section).
Dial by Saying a Number
•
Press the button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Dial.⬙
•
The system will prompt you to say the number you
want to call.
•
For example, you can say ⬙234-567-8901⬙.
•
The uconnect™ phone will confirm the phone number
and then dial. The number will appear in the display
of certain radios.
Call by Saying a Name
•
Press the button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙prompt and the following beep, say
“Call.⬙
102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
•
The system will prompt you to say the name of the
person you want to call.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙prompt and the following beep, say
the name of the person you want to call. For example,
you can say ⬙John Doe,⬙where John Doe is a previ-
ously stored name entry in the uconnect™ phonebook
or downloaded phonebook. To learn how to store a
name in the phonebook, refer to ⬙Add Names to Your
uconnect™ Phonebook,⬙in the phonebook.
•
The uconnect™ system will confirm the name and
then dial the corresponding phone number, which
may appear in the display of certain radios.
Add Names to Your uconnect™ Phonebook
NOTE: Adding names to the uconnect™ phonebook is
recommended when the vehicle is not in motion.
•
Press the button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Phonebook New Entry.⬙
•
When prompted, say the name of the new entry. Use of
long names helps the voice recognition and it is
recommended. For example, say ⬙Robert Smith⬙or
⬙Robert⬙instead of ⬙Bob.⬙
•
When prompted, enter the number designation (e.g.,
⬙Home,⬙⬙Work,⬙⬙Mobile,⬙or ⬙Pager⬙). This will allow
you to store multiple numbers for each phonebook
entry, if desired.
•
When prompted, recite the phone number for the
phonebook entry that you are adding.
After you are finished adding an entry into the phone-
book, you will be given the opportunity to add more
phone numbers to the current entry or to return to the
main menu.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103
The uconnect™ phone will allow you to enter up to 32
names in the phonebook with each name having up to
four associated phone numbers and designations. Each
language has a separate 32-name phonebook accessible
only in that language. In addition, if equipped and
supported by your phone, uconnect™ phone automati-
cally downloads your cellular phone’s phonebook.
Phonebook Download – Automatic Phonebook
Transfer From Cellular Phone
If equipped and specifically supported by your phone,
uconnect™ phone automatically downloads names (text
names) and number entries from the cellular phone’s
phonebook. Specific Bluetooth威Phones with Phone Book
Access Profile may support this feature. See uconnect™
website for supported phones.
•
To call a name from downloaded (or uconnect™)
Phonebook, follow the procedure in “Call by Saying a
Name” section.
•
Automatic download and update, if supported, begins
as soon as the Bluetooth威wireless phone connection is
made to the uconnect™ phone, for example, after you
start the vehicle.
•
A maximum of 1000 entries per phone will be down-
loaded and updated every time a phone is connected
to the uconnect™ phone.
•
Depending on the maximum number of entries down-
loaded, there may be a short delay before the latest
downloaded names can be used. Until then, if avail-
able, the previous downloaded phonebook is available
for use.
•
Only the phonebook of the currently connected cellu-
lar phone is accessible.
•
Only the cellular phone’s phonebook is downloaded.
SIM card phonebook is not part of the Mobile phone-
book.
104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
•
This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or
deleted on the uconnect™ phone. These can only be
edited on the cellular phone. The changes are trans-
ferred and updated to uconnect™ phone on the next
phone connection.
Phonebook Download — Single Entry
If equipped and supported by your phone, uconnect™
phone allows the user to download entries from their
phone via Bluetooth威. To use this feature, press the
button and say “Phonebook Download.” The system
prompts, “Ready to accept “V” card entry via
Bluetooth威…” The system is now ready to accept phone-
book entries from your phone using the Bluetooth威
Object Exchange Profile (OBEX). Please see your phone
Owner’s Manual for specific instructions on how to send
these entries from your phone.
NOTE:
•
The phone handset must support Bluetooth威OBEX
transfers of phonebook entries to use this feature.
•
Some phones cannot send phonebook entries if they
are already connected to any system via Bluetooth威,
and you may see a message on the phone display that
the Bluetooth威link is busy. In this case, the user must
first disconnect or drop the Bluetooth威connection to
the uconnect™ phone, and then send the address book
entry via Bluetooth威. Please see your phone Owner’s
Manual for specific instructions on how to drop the
Bluetooth威connection.
•
If the phonebook entry is longer than 24 characters, it
will only use the first 24 characters.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105
Edit uconnect™ Phonebook Entries
NOTE:
•
Editing names in the phonebook is recommended
when the vehicle is not in motion.
•
Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be
deleted or edited.
•
Press the button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Phonebook Edit.⬙
•
You will then be asked for the name of the phonebook
entry that you wish to edit.
•
Next, choose the number designation (home, work,
cellular, or pager) that you wish to edit.
•
When prompted, recite the new phone number for the
phonebook entry that you are editing.
After you are finished editing an entry in the phonebook,
you will be given the opportunity to edit another entry in
the phonebook, call the number you just edited, or return
to the main menu.
⬙Phonebook Edit⬙can be used to add another phone
number to a name entry that already exists in the
phonebook. For example, the entry John Doe may have a
cellular and a home number, but you can add ”John
Doe’s” work number later using the ⬙Phonebook Edit⬙
feature.
Delete uconnect™ Phonebook Entry
NOTE: Editing phonebook entries is recommended
when the vehicle is not in motion.
•
Press the button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Phonebook Delete.⬙
106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
•
After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu, you will
then be asked for the name of the entry that you wish
to delete. You can either say the name of a phonebook
entry that you wish to delete or you can say ⬙List
Names⬙to hear a list of the entries in the phonebook
from which you choose. To select one of the entries
from the list, press the button while the
uconnect™ phone is playing the desired entry and say
⬙Delete.⬙
•
After you enter the name, the uconnect™ phone will
ask you which designation you wish to delete: home,
work, cellular, pager, or all. Say the designation you
wish to delete.
•
Note that only the phonebook entry in the current
language is deleted.
•
Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be
deleted or edited.
Delete/Erase “All” uconnect™ Phonebook Entries
•
Press the button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Phonebook Erase All.⬙
•
The uconnect™ phone will ask you to verify that you
wish to delete all the entries from the phonebook.
•
After confirmation, the phonebook entries will be
deleted.
•
Note that only the phonebook in the current language
is deleted.
•
Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be
deleted or edited.
List All Names in the uconnect™ Phonebook
•
Press the button to begin.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Phonebook List Names.⬙
•
The uconnect™ phone will play the names of all the
phonebook entries, including the downloaded phone-
book entries, if available.
•
To call one of the names in the list, press the
button during the playing of the desired name, and
say ⬙Call.⬙
NOTE: The user can also exercise ⬙Edit⬙or ⬙Delete⬙
operations at this point.
•
The uconnect™ phone will then prompt you as to the
number designation you wish to call.
•
The selected number will be dialed.
Phone Call Features
The following features can be accessed through the
uconnect™ phone if the feature(s) are available on your
cellular service plan. For example, if your cellular service
plan provides three-way calling, this feature can be
accessed through the uconnect™ phone. Check with your
cellular service provider for the features that you have.
Answer or Reject an Incoming Call - No Call
Currently in Progress
When you receive a call on your cellular phone, the
uconnect™ phone will interrupt the vehicle audio sys-
tem, if on, and will ask if you would like to answer the
call. Press the button to accept the call. To reject the
call, press and hold the button until you hear a
single beep, indicating that the incoming call was
rejected.
Answer or Reject an Incoming Call - Call
Currently in Progress
If a call is currently in progress and you have another
incoming call, you will hear the same network tones for
call waiting that you normally hear when using your
108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
cellular phone. Press the button to place the current
call on hold and answer the incoming call.
NOTE: The uconnect™ phone compatible phones in the
market today do not support rejecting an incoming call
when another call is in progress. Therefore, the user can
only answer an incoming call or ignore it.
Making a Second Call While Current Call is in
Progress
To make a second call while you are currently on a call,
press the button and say ⬙Dial⬙or ⬙Call⬙followed by
the phone number or phonebook entry you wish to call.
The first call will be on hold while the second call is in
progress. To go back to the first call, refer to ⬙Toggling
Between Calls⬙in this section. To combine two calls, refer
to ⬙Conference Call⬙in this section.
Place/Retrieve a Call From Hold
To put a call on hold, press the button until you hear
a single beep. This indicates that the call is on hold. To
bring the call back from hold, press and hold the
button until you hear a single beep.
Toggling Between Calls
If two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold),
press the button until you hear a single beep,
indicating that the active and hold status of the two calls
have switched. Only one call can be placed on hold at a
time.
Conference Call
When two calls are in progress (one active and one on
hold), press and hold the button until you hear a
double beep indicating that the two calls have been
joined into one conference call.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109
Three-Way Calling
To initiate three-way calling, press the button while
a call is in progress, and make a second phone call, as
described under ⬙Making a Second Call While Current
Call is in Progress.⬙After the second call has established,
press and hold the button until you hear a double
beep, indicating that the two calls have been joined into
one conference call.
Call Termination
To end a call in progress, momentarily press the
button. Only the active call(s) will be terminated and if
there is a call on hold, it will become the new active call.
If the active call is terminated by the far end, a call on
hold may not become active automatically. This is cell
phone-dependent. To bring the call back from hold, press
and hold the button until you hear a single beep.
Redial
•
Press the button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Redial.⬙
•
The uconnect™ phone will call the last number that
was dialed from your cellular phone.
NOTE: This may not be the last number dialed from the
uconnect™ phone.
Call Continuation
Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the
uconnect™ phone after the vehicle ignition key has been
switched to OFF. Call continuation functionality avail-
able on the vehicle can be any one of three types:
•
After the ignition key is switched to OFF, a call can
continue on the uconnect™ phone either until the call
ends, or until the vehicle battery condition dictates
cessation of the call on the uconnect™ phone and
transfer of the call to the cellular phone.
110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
•
After the ignition key is switched to OFF, a call can
continue on the uconnect™ phone for a certain dura-
tion, after which the call is automatically transferred
from the uconnect™ phone to the cellular phone.
•
An active call is automatically transferred to the
cellular phone after the ignition key is switched to
OFF.
uconnect™ phone Features
Language Selection
To change the language that the uconnect™ phone is
using:
•
Press the button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙prompt and the following beep, say
the name of the language you wish to switch to
English, Espanol, or Francais.
•
Continue to follow the system prompts to complete
the language selection.
After selecting one of the languages, all prompts and
voice commands will be in that language.
NOTE: After every uconnect™ phone language change
operation, only the language-specific 32-name phone-
book is usable. The paired phone name is not language-
specific and usable across all languages.
Emergency Assistance
If you are in an emergency and the cellular phone is
reachable:
•
Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency
number for your area.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111
If the phone is not reachable and the uconnect™ phone is
operational, you may reach the emergency number as
follows:
•
Press the button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Emergency⬙and the uconnect™ phone will instruct
the paired cellular phone to call the emergency num-
ber. This feature is supported in the U.S., Canada, and
Mexico.
NOTE:
•
The emergency number dialed is based on the country
where the vehicle is purchased (911 for the U.S. and
Canada and 060 for Mexico). The number dialed may
not be applicable with the available cellular service
and area.
•
If supported, this number may be programmable on
some systems. To do this, press the button and say
‘Setup’, followed by ‘Emergency’.
•
The uconnect™ phone does slightly lower your
chances of successfully making a phone call as to that
for the cellular phone directly.
WARNING!
Your phone must be turned on and paired to the
uconnect™ phone to allow use of this vehicle feature
in emergency situations, when the cellular phone has
network coverage and stays paired to the uconnect™
phone.
Towing Assistance
If you need towing assistance:
•
Press the button to begin.
112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Towing Assistance.⬙
NOTE:
•
The towing assistance number dialed is based on the
country where the vehicle is purchased (1-800-528-
2069 for the U.S., 1-877-213-4525 for Canada, 55-14-
3454 for Mexico City and 1-800-712-3040 for outside
Mexico City in Mexico). Please refer to the 24-Hour
⬙Towing Assistance⬙coverage details in the Warranty
Information Booklet and on the 24–Hour Towing
Assistance Card.
•
If supported, this number may be programmable on
some systems. To do this, press the button and
say “Setup”, followed by “Towing Assistance”.
Paging
To learn how to page, refer to ⬙Working with Automated
Systems.⬙Paging works properly except for pagers of
certain companies, which time out a little too soon to
work properly with the uconnect™ phone.
Voice Mail Calling
To learn how to access your voice mail, refer to ⬙Working
with Automated Systems.⬙
Working with Automated Systems
This method is used in instances where one generally has
to press numbers on the cellular phone keypad while
navigating through an automated telephone system.
You can use your uconnect™ phone to access a voice mail
system or an automated service, such as a paging service
or automated customer service line. Some services re-
quire immediate response selection. In some instances,
that may be too quick for use of the uconnect™ phone.
When calling a number with your uconnect™ phone that
normally requires you to enter in a touch-tone sequence
on your cellular phone keypad, you can press the
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113
button and say the sequence you wish to enter, followed
by the word ⬙Send.⬙For example, if required to enter
your PIN followed with a pound, (3746#),youcan
press the button and say, ⬙3746#Send.⬙Saying a
number, or sequence of numbers, followed by ⬙Send,⬙is
also to be used for navigating through an automated
customer service center menu structure, and to leave a
number on a pager.
You can also send stored uconnect™ phonebook entries
as tones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pager
entries. To use this feature, dial the number you wish to
call and then press the button and say, “Send.” The
system will prompt you to enter the name or number and
say the name of the phonebook entry you wish to send.
The uconnect™ phone will then send the corresponding
phone number associated with the phonebook entry, as
tones over the phone.
NOTE:
•
You may not hear all of the tones due to cellular phone
network configurations. This is normal.
•
Some paging and voice mail systems have system time
out settings that are too short and may not allow the
use of this feature.
Barge In - Overriding Prompts
The “Voice Recognition” button can be used when you
wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice
recognition command immediately. For example, if a
prompt is asking ⬙Would you like to pair a phone, clear
a...,⬙you could press the button and say, ⬙Pair a
Phone⬙to select that option without having to listen to
the rest of the voice prompt.
Turning Confirmation Prompts ON/OFF
Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the system
from confirming your choices (e.g., the uconnect™ phone
will not repeat a phone number before you dial it).
114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
•
Press the button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Setup Confirmations.⬙The uconnect™ phone will
play the current confirmation prompt status and you
will be given the choice to change it.
Phone and Network Status Indicators
If available on the radio and/or on a premium display
such as the instrument panel cluster, and supported by
your cellular phone, the uconnect™ phone will provide
notification to inform you of your phone and network
status when you are attempting to make a phone call
using uconnect™ phone. The status is given for roaming,
network signal strength, phone battery strength, etc.
Dialing Using the Cellular Phone Keypad
You can dial a phone number with your cellular phone
keypad and still use the uconnect™ phone (while dialing
via the cellular phone keypad, the user must exercise
caution and take precautionary safety measures). By
dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth威cellular
phone, the audio will be played through your vehicle’s
audio system. The uconnect™ phone will work the same
as if you dial the number using voice recognition.
NOTE: Certain brands of cellular phones do not send
the dial ring to the uconnect™ phone to play it on the
vehicle audio system, so you will not hear it. Under this
situation, after successfully dialing a number the user
may feel that the call did not go through even though the
call is in progress. Once your call is answered, you will
hear the audio.
Mute/Un-Mute (Mute OFF)
When you mute the uconnect™ phone, you will still be
able to hear the conversation coming from the other
party, but the other party will not be able to hear you. In
order to mute the uconnect™ phone:
•
Press the button.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115
•
Following the beep, say ⬙Mute.⬙
In order to un-mute the uconnect™ phone:
•
Press the button.
•
Following the beep, say ⬙Mute off.⬙
Advanced Phone Connectivity
Transfer Call to and from Cellular Phone
The uconnect™ phone allows ongoing calls to be trans-
ferred from your cellular phone to the uconnect™ phone
without terminating the call. To transfer an ongoing call
from your uconnect™ phone paired cellular phone to the
uconnect™ phone or vice versa, press the button
and say ⬙Transfer Call.⬙
Connect or Disconnect Link Between the
uconnect™ phone and Cellular Phone
Your cellular phone can be paired with many different
electronic devices, but can only be actively ⬙connected⬙
with one electronic device at a time.
If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth威
connection between a uconnect™ phone paired cellular
phone and the uconnect™ phone, follow the instructions
described in your cellular phone User’s Manual.
List Paired Cellular Phone Names
•
Press the button to begin.
•
After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Setup Phone Pairing.”
•
When prompted, say ⬙List Phones.⬙
116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
•
The uconnect™ phone will play the phone names of
all paired cellular phones in order from the highest to
the lowest priority. To “select” or “delete” a paired
phone being announced, press the button and say
“Select” or “Delete.” Also, see the next two sections for
an alternate way to “select” or “delete” a paired
phone.
Select Another Cellular Phone
This feature allows you to select and start using another
phone paired with the uconnect™ phone.
•
Press the button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Setup Select Phone⬙and follow the prompts.
•
You can also press the button at any time while
the list is being played, and then choose the phone that
you wish to select.
•
The selected phone will be used for the next phone
call. If the selected phone is not available, the
uconnect™ phone will return to using the highest
priority phone present in or near (approximately
within 30 ft (9 m)) the vehicle.
Delete uconnect™ phone Paired Cellular Phones
•
Press the button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Setup Phone Pairing.⬙
•
At the next prompt, say ⬙Delete⬙and follow the
prompts.
•
You can also press the button at any time while
the list is being played, and then choose the phone you
wish to delete.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117
Things You Should Know About Your uconnect™
phone
uconnect™ phone Tutorial
To hear a brief tutorial of the system features, press the
button and say “uconnect™ Tutorial.”
Voice Training
For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog-
nizing their voice commands or numbers, the uconnect™
phone Voice Training feature may be used. To enter this
training mode, follow one of the two following proce-
dures:
From outside the uconnect™ phone mode (e.g., from
radio mode):
•
Press and hold the button for five seconds until
the session begins, or,
•
Press the button and say the ⬙Setup, Voice Train-
ing⬙command.
Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by the
uconnect™ phone. For best results, the Voice Training
session should be completed when the vehicle is parked
with the engine running, all windows closed, and the
blower fan switched off.
This procedure may be repeated with a new user. The
system will adapt to the last trained voice only.
To restore the Voice Recognition system to factory default
settings, enter the Voice Training session via the above
procedure and follow the prompts.
Voice Recognition (VR)
•
For best performance, adjust the rearview mirror to
provide at least
1
⁄
2
in (1 cm) gap between the overhead
console (if equipped) and the mirror.
•
Always wait for the beep before speaking.
118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
•
Speak normally, without pausing, just as you would
speak to a person sitting a few feet/meters away from
you.
•
Make sure that no one other than you is speaking
during a voice recognition period.
•
Performance is maximized under:
•
low-to-medium blower setting,
•
low-to-medium vehicle speed,
•
low road noise,
•
smooth road surface,
•
fully closed windows,
•
dry weather condition.
•
Even though the system is designed for users speaking
in North American English, French, and Spanish ac-
cents, the system may not always work for some.
•
When navigating through an automated system such
as voice mail, or when sending a page, at the end of
speaking the digit string, make sure to say ⬙Send.⬙
•
Storing names in the phonebook when the vehicle is
not in motion is recommended.
•
It is not recommended to store similar sounding
names in the uconnect™ phonebook.
•
Phonebook (Downloaded and uconnect™ phone Lo-
cal) name recognition rate is optimized when the
entries are not similar.
•
Numbers must be spoken in single digits. “800” must
be spoken “eight-zero-zero” not “eight hundred”.
•
You can say ⬙O⬙(letter ⬙O⬙) for ⬙0⬙(zero).
•
Even though international dialing for most number
combinations is supported, some shortcut dialing
number combinations may not be supported.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119
•
In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be
compromised with the convertible top down.
Far End Audio Performance
•
Audio quality is maximized under:
•
low-to-medium blower setting,
•
low-to-medium vehicle speed,
•
low road noise,
•
smooth road surface,
•
fully closed windows,
•
dry weather conditions, and
•
operation from the driver’s seat.
•
Performance, such as audio clarity, echo, and loudness
to a large degree rely on the phone and network, and
not the uconnect™ phone.
•
Echo at the far end can sometimes be reduced by
lowering the in-vehicle audio volume.
•
In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be
compromised with the convertible top down.
Bluetooth威Communication Link
Cellular phones have been found to lose connection to
the uconnect™ phone. When this happens, the connec-
tion can generally be reestablished by switching the
phone off/on. Your cellular phone is recommended to
remain in Bluetooth威ON mode.
Power-Up
After switching the ignition key from OFF to either the
ON or ACC position, or after a language change, you
must wait at least five seconds prior to using the system.
120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121
122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123
Voice Commands
Primary Alternate(s)
zero
one
two
three
four
five
six
seven
eight
nine
star (*)
plus (+)
pound (#)
add location
all
Voice Commands
Primary Alternate(s)
call
cancel
confirmation prompts
continue
delete
dial
download
edit
emergency
English
erase all
Espanol
Francais
help
home
124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Voice Commands
Primary Alternate(s)
language
list names
list phones
mobile
mute
mute off
new entry
no
pager
pair a phone
phone pairing pairing
phonebook phone book
previous
record again
redial
Voice Commands
Primary Alternate(s)
return to main menu return or main menu
select phone select
send
set up phone settings or phone
set up
towing assistance
transfer call
uconnect™ Tutorial
try again
voice training
work
yes
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
•
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by
the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
•
This device may not cause harmful interference.
•
This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
VOICE RECOGNITION (VR) SYSTEM — IF
EQUIPPED
Voice Recognition (VR) System Operation
This Voice Recognition system allows you to
control your AM, FM radio, satellite radio, disc
player, and a memo recorder.
NOTE: Take care to speak into the Voice Interface
System as calmly and normally as possible. The ability of
the Voice Interface System to recognize user voice com-
mands may be negatively affected by rapid speaking or a
raised voice level.
126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Any voice commanded system should be used only
in safe driving conditions following local laws and
phone use. All attention should be kept on the
roadway ahead. Failure to do so may result in an
accident causing serious injury or death.
When you press the button, you will hear a beep.
The beep is your signal to give a command.
NOTE: If you do not say a command within a few
seconds, the system will present you with a list of
options.
If you ever wish to interrupt the system while it lists
options, press the button, listen for the beep, and say
your command.
Pressing the button while the system is speaking is
known as “barging in.” The system will be interrupted,
and after the beep, you can add or change commands.
This will become helpful once you start to learn the
options.
NOTE: At any time, you can say the words “Cancel”,
“Help”, or “Main Menu”.
These commands are universal and can be used from any
menu. All other commands can be used depending upon
the active application.
For example, if you are in the disc menu and you are
listening to FM radio, you can speak commands from the
disc menu or from the FM radio menu.
When using this system, you should speak clearly and at
a normal speaking volume.
The system will best recognize your speech if the win-
dows are closed, and the heater/air conditioning fan is
set to low.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127
At any point, if the system does not recognize one of your
commands, you will be prompted to repeat it.
To hear the first available Menu, press the button
and say “Help” or “Main Menu”.
Commands
The Voice Recognition (VR) system understands two
types of commands. Universal commands are available at
all times. Local commands are available if the supported
radio mode is active.
Changing the Volume
1. Start a dialogue by pressing the button.
2. Say a command (e.g., “Help”).
3. Use the ON/OFF VOLUME rotary knob to adjust the
volume to a comfortable level while the Voice Recogni-
tion (VR) system is speaking. Please note the volume
setting for VR is different than the audio system.
Main Menu
Start a dialogue by pressing the button. You may say
“Main Menu” to switch to the main menu.
In this mode, you can say the following commands:
•
“Radio” (to switch to the radio mode)
•
“Disc” (to switch to the disc mode)
•
“Memo” (to switch to the memo recorder)
•
“System Setup” (to switch to system setup)
Radio AM (or Radio Long Wave or Radio Medium
Wave — If Equipped)
To switch to the AM band, say “AM” or “Radio AM”. In
this mode, you may say the following commands:
•
“Frequency” (to change the frequency)
•
“Next Station” (to select the next station)
•
“Previous Station” (to select the previous station)
128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
•
“Radio Menu” (to switch to the radio menu)
•
“Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
Radio FM
To switch to the FM band, say “FM” or “Radio FM”. In
this mode, you may say the following commands:
•
“Frequency” (to change the frequency)
•
“Next Station” (to select the next station)
•
“Previous Station” (to select the previous station)
•
“Radio Menu” (to switch to the radio menu)
•
“Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
Satellite Radio
To switch to satellite radio mode, say “Sat” or “Satellite
Radio”. In this mode, you may say the following com-
mands:
•
“Channel Number” (to change the channel by its
spoken number)
•
“Next Channel” (to select the next channel)
•
“Previous Channel” (to select the previous channel)
•
“List Channel” (to hear a list of available channels)
•
“Select Name” (to say the name of a channel)
•
“Radio Menu” (to switch to the radio menu)
•
“Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
Disc
To switch to the disc mode, say “Disc”. In this mode, you
may say the following commands:
•
“Track” (#) (to change the track)
•
“Next Track” (to play the next track)
•
“Previous Track” (to play the previous track)
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129
•
“Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
Memo
To switch to the voice recorder mode, say “Memo”. In
this mode, you may say the following commands:
•
“New Memo” (to record a new memo) — During the
recording, you may press the button to stop
recording. You proceed by saying one of the following
commands:
−
“Save” (to save the memo)
−
“Continue” (to continue recording)
−
“Delete” (to delete the recording)
•
“Play Memos” (to play previously recorded memos)
— During the playback you may press the button
to stop playing memos. You proceed by saying one of
the following commands:
−
“Repeat” (to repeat a memo)
−
“Next” (to play the next memo)
−
“Previous” (to play the previous memo)
−
“Delete” (to delete a memo)
•
“Delete All” (to delete all memos)
System Setup
To switch to system setup, say “Setup”. In this mode, you
may say the following commands:
•
“Language German”
•
“Language Dutch”
•
“Language Italian”
•
“Language English”
•
“Language French”
•
“Language Spanish”
•
“Tutorial”
130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
•
“Voice Training”
NOTE: Keep in mind that you have to press the
button first and wait for the beep before speaking the
“Barge In” commands.
Voice Training
For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog-
nizing their voice commands or numbers, uconnect™
phone Voice Training feature may be used.
1. Press the button, say “System Setup” and once
you are in that menu then say “Voice Training.” This will
train your own voice to the system and will improve
recognition.
2. Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by
uconnect™ phone. For best results, the Voice Training
session should be completed when the vehicle is parked,
engine running, all windows closed, and the blower fan
switched off. This procedure may be repeated with a new
user. The system will adapt to the last trained voice only.
SEATS
Seats are a primary part of the Occupant Restraint System
of the vehicle. They need to be used properly for safe
operation of the vehicle.
WARNING!
•
DO NOT allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas
are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
•
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131
Manual Front Seat Adjustments
The manual seat adjustment bar is at the front of the seat,
near the floor.
Pull the bar upward to move the seat forward or rear-
ward. Release the bar once the seat is in the position
desired. Then, using body pressure, move forward and
rearward on the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters
have latched.
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could
cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not be
properly adjusted and you could be injured. Adjust
any seat only while the vehicle is parked.
Manual Seat Adjustment
132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Recliner Adjustment
The recliner control is located on the outboard side of the
seat.
To recline the seatback, lean forward slightly and lift the
lever. Then lean back to the position desired and release
the lever. To return the seatback to its normal upright
position, lean forward and lift the lever. Release the lever
once the seatback is in the upright position.
WARNING!
•
Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat
could cause you to lose control. The seat belt might
not be properly adjusted and you could be injured.
Adjust the seat only while the vehicle is parked.
•
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your
chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat
belt and be seriously or even fatally injured. Use
the recliner only when the vehicle is parked.
Seatback Release Lever
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133
Lumbar Support — If Equipped
This feature allows you to increase or decrease the
amount of lumbar support. The control lever is located
on the inboard side of the seat. Turn the control lever
downward to increase and upward to decrease the
desired amount of lumbar support.
Fold-Flat Front Passenger Seat — If Equipped
This feature allows the front passenger seatback to fold
flat for extended cargo space. Some fold flat seats also
have a hardback surface that you can use as a work
surface when the seat is folded flat. Pull up on the lever
to fold down the seatback.
Fold-Flat Passenger Seat
134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Power Seat — If Equipped
The power seat switch is located on the outboard side of
the seat, near the floor.
For vehicles equipped with a driver’s power seat, use this
switch to move the seat up, down, forward, rearward, or
to tilt the seat. For vehicles equipped with a passenger
power seat, use this switch to move the seat forward and
rearward.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under any seat as it may
cause damage to the seat or seat controls.
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could
cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not be
properly adjusted and you could be injured. Adjust
any seat only while the vehicle is parked.
Power Seat Switch
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135
Adjusting Active Head Restraints
Active Head Restraints can reduce the risk of injury in
the event of a rear impact. The Active Head Restraint
should be adjusted so the top of the head restraint is
located above the top of your ear.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint (on some models, you may need to press the
push button). To lower the head restraint, press the push
button, located at the base of the head restraint, and push
downward on the head restraint.
Adjusted Head Restraint Push Button
136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
For comfort the Active Head Restraints can be tilted
forward and backward. To tilt the head restraint closer to
the back of your head, pull outward on the bottom of the
head restraint. Push rearward on the bottom of the head
restraint to move the head restraint away from your
head.
NOTE:
•
The head restraints should only be removed by quali-
fied technicians, for service purposes only. If either of
the head restraints require removal, see your autho-
rized dealer.
Active Head Restraint (Normal Position)
Active Head Restraint (Tilted)
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137
•
In the event of deployment of an Active Head Re-
straint, refer to “Resetting Active Head Restraints
(AHR)” under “Occupant Restraints” in Section 2.
WARNING!
•
Driving a vehicle with the head restraints removed
or improperly adjusted could cause serious injury
or death in the event of a collision. The head
restraints should always be checked prior to oper-
ating the vehicle and never adjusted while the
vehicle is in motion. Always adjust the head
restraints when the vehicle is in PARK.
•
Do not place items over the top of the Active Head
Restraint, such as coats or seat covers. These items
may interfere with the operation of the Active
Head Restraint in the event of an accident and
could result in serious injury or death.
Heated Seats — If Equipped
This feature heats both the front driver and passenger
seats. The controls for the front heated seats are located
on the instrument panel below the climate controls. After
turning the ignition ON, you can choose from High, Low
or Off heat settings. Amber indicator lights in each switch
indicate the level of heat in use. Two indicator lights will
illuminate for High, one for Low and none for Off.
Press the switch once to select High-level heat-
ing. Press the switch a second time to select
Low-level heating. Press the switch a third time
to shut the heating elements Off.
When High-level heating is selected, the heaters provide
a boosted heat level during the first four minutes of
operation after heating is activated. The heat output then
drops to the normal High-level heating. If High-level
heating is selected, the system will automatically switch
to Low-level heating after approximately 30 minutes of
138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
continuous operation. At that time, the number of indi-
cator lights changes from two to one, indicating the
change. Operation on the Low-level heating will also
turn OFF automatically after approximately 30 minutes.
NOTE: When a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt
within two to five minutes.
WARNING!
•
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, ex-
haustion or other physical condition must exercise
care when using the seat heater. It may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if used for
long periods.
•
Do not place anything on the seat that insulates
against heat, such as a blanket or cushion. This
may cause the seat heater to overheat.
60/40 Split Folding Rear Seat with Fold-Flat
Feature
To provide additional storage area, each rear seat can be
folded flat. This allows for extended cargo space and still
maintains some rear seating room.
NOTE: Prior to folding the rear seat, it may be necessary
to position the front seat to its mid-track position. Also,
be sure that the front seats are fully upright and posi-
tioned forward. This will allow the rear seat to fold down
easily.
WARNING!
•
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seri-
ously injured or killed.
(Continued)
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
•
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
To Lower the Rear Seat
1. Locate the release strap on the lower outboard side of
each rear seatback.
2. Pull the release strap (toward the front of the vehicle).
3. Fold the rear seat completely forward.
4. If desired, push down on the seatback to lock it in the
folded position.
Rear Seat Release Strap
140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To Raise the Rear Seat
NOTE: If interference from the cargo area prevents the
seatback from fully locking, you will have difficulty
returning the seat to its proper position.
1. If locked in the folded position, pull the release strap
(toward the front of the vehicle).
2. Raise the seatback and lock it into place.
WARNING!
Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
position. If the seatback in not securely locked into
position the seat will not provide the proper stability
for child seats and/or passengers. An improperly
latched seat could cause serious injury.
Recliner Adjustment
The rear seatback also reclines for additional passenger
comfort. Pull the release strap while sitting in the rear
seat to recline the seatback.
Rear Seatback Release Strap
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt and
be seriously or even fatally injured. Use the recliner
only when the vehicle is parked.
DRIVER MEMORY SEAT — IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows the driver to store up to two different
memory profiles, for easy recall through a memory
switch. Each memory profile contains desired position
settings for the driver seat and side mirrors and a set of
desired radio station presets.
The memory switch is located on the instrument panel to
the left of the steering column. The switch contains a S
(SET) button to activate the memory save function. It also
contains a rocker switch labeled with the number (1) and
the number (2). The rocker switch allows the driver to
recall either of the two pre-programmed memory profiles
by pressing the appropriate side of the switch.
Programming the Memory Feature
To create a new memory profile, perform the following:
NOTE: Saving a new memory profile will erase an
existing profile from memory.
Driver Memory Switch
142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
1. Turn the ignition ON.
2. Adjust all memory profile settings to desired prefer-
ences (i.e., seat, side mirror and radio station presets).
3. Press and release the SET button on the memory
switch, then press the side of the rocker switch labeled (1)
within five seconds. The Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC), if equipped, will display which memory
position is being set.
If desired, a second memory profile can be stored into
memory as follows:
1. Turn the ignition ON.
2. Adjust all memory profile settings to desired prefer-
ences (i.e., seat, side mirror and radio station presets).
3. Press and release the SET button on the memory
switch, then press the side of the rocker switch labeled (2)
within five seconds. The EVIC, if equipped, will display
which memory position is being set.
NOTE:
•
For vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission,
memory profiles can be set without the vehicle in
PARK, but the vehicle must be in PARK to recall a
memory profile.
•
For vehicles equipped with a manual transmission, the
vehicle speed must be at 0 mph (0 km/h) to recall a
memory profile.
•
The Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock feature
can be turned on and off through the EVIC, if
equipped. For details, refer to “Personal Settings
(Customer-Programmable Features)” under “Elec-
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in Section 4
of this manual.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143
Linking and Unlinking the Remote Keyless Entry
Transmitter to Memory
Your Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitters can be
programmed to recall one of two pre-programmed
memory profiles with a press of the UNLOCK button on
the RKE transmitter.
To program your RKE transmitters, perform the follow-
ing:
1. Remove the key from the ignition.
2. Select the desired memory profile 1 or 2.
3. Press and release the SET button on the memory
switch, then within five seconds press and release the
side of the rocker switch labeled 1 or 2 accordingly.
⬙Memory Profile Set” (1 or 2) will display in the EVIC, if
equipped.
4. Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE
transmitter within 10 seconds.
NOTE: Your RKE transmitters can be unlinked to the
memory setting by pressing the SET button followed by
the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter in Step 4
above.
Memory Position Recall
NOTE:
•
For vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission,
the vehicle must be in PARK to recall memory posi-
tions. If a recall is attempted when the vehicle is not in
PARK, a message will display in the EVIC, if
equipped.
•
For vehicles equipped with a manual transmission, the
vehicle speed must be at 0 mph (0 km/h) to recall
memory positions. If a recall is attempted with the
vehicle speed above 0 mph (0 km/h), a message will
display in the EVIC, if equipped.
144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To recall the memory settings for driver one, press
MEMORY button number 1 or the UNLOCK button on
the RKE transmitter linked to memory position 1.
To recall the memory setting for driver two, press
MEMORY button number 2 or the UNLOCK button on
the RKE transmitter linked to memory position 2.
A recall can be cancelled by pressing any of the
MEMORY buttons (S, 1, or 2) during a recall. When a
recall is cancelled, the driver seat will stop moving. A
delay of one second will occur before another recall can
be selected.
Easy Entry/Exit Seat (Available with Memory Seat
Only)
This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to
enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the
vehicle.
The distance the driver seat moves depends on where
you have the driver seat positioned when you remove the
key from the ignition switch.
•
When you remove the key from the ignition switch,
the driver seat will move about 2.4 in (60 mm)
rearward if the driver’s seat position is greater than or
equal to 2.7 in (68 mm) forward of the rear stop. The
seat will return to its previously set position when you
insert the key into the ignition switch and turn it out of
the LOCK position.
•
When you remove the key from the ignition switch,
the driver seat will move to a position 0.3 in (8 mm)
forward of the rear stop if the driver’s seat position is
between 0.9 in and 2.7 in (23 mm and 68 mm) forward
of the rear stop. The seat will return to its previously
set position when you insert the key into the ignition
switch and turn it out of the LOCK position.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145
•
The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature is disabled when the
driver’s seat position is less than 0.9 in (23 mm)
forward of the rear stop. At this position, there is no
benefit to the driver by moving the seat for Easy Exit
or Easy Entry.
Each stored memory setting will have an associated Easy
Entry and Easy Exit position.
NOTE: The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature can be turned
on or off through the programmable features in the EVIC.
For details, refer to “Automatically Move Seat Back on
Exit,” under “Personal Settings (Customer-
Programmable Features)” under “Electronic Vehicle In-
formation Center (EVIC)” in Section 4 of this manual.
TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD
Two latches must be released to open the hood.
1. Pull the hood release lever located under the left side
of the instrument panel.
2. Outside of the vehicle, locate the safety latch lever
between the grille and hood opening (left of center when
facing hood). Push the safety latch lever to the right and
then raise the hood.
Hood Release
146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Use the hood prop rod to secure the hood in the open
position. Place the upper end of the prop rod in the hole
on the underside of the hood.
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage:
•
Before closing hood, make sure the hood prop rod
is fully seated into its storage retaining clips.
(Continued)
Underhood Safety Latch Hood Prop Rod Hole Location
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147
CAUTION! (Continued)
•
Lower the hood to approximately 6 in (15.2 cm)
above the closed position and drop the hood to
latch it.
•
Never drive your vehicle unless the hood is fully
closed, with both latches engaged.
WARNING!
If the hood is not fully latched, it could fly up when
the vehicle is moving and block your forward vision.
Be sure all hood latches are fully latched before
driving.
LIGHTS
Multifunction Lever
The multifunction lever on the left side of the steering
column controls the operation of the headlights, parking
lights, turn signal lights, instrument panel lights, instru-
ment panel light dimming, interior lights and fog lights
(if equipped).
Multifunction Lever
148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Headlights and Parking Lights
Turn the end of the multifunction lever to the first detent
for parking light operation. Turn the end of the lever to
the second detent for headlight operation.
Automatic Headlights — If Equipped
This system automatically turns the headlights on or off
according to ambient light levels. To turn the system on,
turn the end of the multifunction lever to the AUTO
position (third detent). When the system is on, the
Headlight Time Delay feature is also on. This means the
headlights will stay on for up to 90 seconds after you turn
the ignition switch to the LOCK position. To turn the
Automatic System off, turn the end of the multifunction
lever out of the AUTO position.
Headlight Switch
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149
NOTE: The engine must be running before the head-
lights will turn on in the Automatic mode.
Headlights with Wipers (Available with Automatic
Headlights Only)
When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on
approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on
if the multifunction lever is placed in the AUTO position.
In addition, the headlights will turn off when the wipers
are turned off if they were turned on by this feature.
The Headlights with Wipers feature can be turned on or
off through the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) — if equipped. For details, refer to ”Headlights
On with Wipers,” under “Personal Settings (Customer-
Programmable Features)” under “Electronic Vehicle In-
formation Center (EVIC)” in Section 4.
Headlight Time Delay — If Equipped
This feature is particularly useful when exiting your
vehicle in an unlit area. It provides the safety of headlight
illumination for about 90 seconds after turning the igni-
tion switch to the LOCK position.
To activate the delay, turn the ignition switch to the
LOCK position while the headlights are still on. Then,
turn off the headlights within 45 seconds. The delay
Headlight Switch
150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
interval begins when you turn off the headlights. Only
the headlights will illuminate during this time.
If you turn the headlights, or parking lights, or ignition
switch ON again, the system will cancel the delay.
If you turn the headlights off before the ignition, they will
turn off in the normal manner.
The Headlight delay time is programmable on vehicles
equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC). For details, refer to “Delay Turning Headlights
Off,” “Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Fea-
tures)” under “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC)” in Section 4.
Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped
The high beam headlights will turn on as Daytime
Running Lights (DRL) and operate at lower intensity
whenever the ignition is ON, the engine is running, the
headlight switch is off, the parking brake is released and
the shift lever is in any position except PARK.
NOTE: The Daytime Running Lights will turn off
automatically when a turn signal is in operation and turn
on again when the turn signal is not operating.
Lights-On Reminder
If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition
is turned to the LOCK position, a chime will sound to
alert the driver when the driver’s door is opened.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151
Fog Lights — If Equipped
To activate the front fog lights, turn on the parking
lights or the low beam headlights and pull out on
the end of the multifunction lever.
NOTE: The front fog lights will only operate with the
headlights on low beam. Selecting high beam headlights
will turn off the front fog lights.
Turn Signals
Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows
on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show
proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights.
NOTE: If either light remains on and does not flash, or
there is a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside
Front Fog Light Control
Turn Signal Control
152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
light bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is
moved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is
defective.
Lane Change Assist
Tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond
the detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash
three times then automatically turn off.
High/Low Beam Switch
Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch
the headlights to high beam. Pull the multifunction lever
toward you, to switch the headlights back to low beam.
Flash-To-Pass
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This
will turn on the high beam headlights until the lever is
released.
NOTE: If the multifunction lever is held in the flash-to-
pass position for more than 15 seconds, the high beams
will shut off. If this occurs, wait 30 seconds before
activating the flash-to-pass function again.
Instrument Panel Dimmer
Rotate the dimmer control to the extreme bottom position
to fully dim the instrument panel lights and prevent the
interior lights from illuminating when a door is opened.
Rotate the center portion of the lever up to increase the
brightness of the instrument panel lights when the park-
ing lights or headlights are on.
Rotate the center portion upward to the next detent
position to brighten the odometer and radio when the
parking lights or headlights are on.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153
Rotate the center portion upward to the last detent to
turn on the interior lighting.
Map/Reading Lights
These lights are mounted between the sun visors on the
overhead console and above the rear doors by the grab
handles. Each light is turned on by pressing the lens.
Press the lens a second time to turn off the light. These
lights also turn on when a door is opened, or when the
UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter is pressed, or when the dimmer control is
turned completely upward to the second detent.
Cargo Light
The cargo light is mounted in the headliner above the
rear cargo area. This light will turn on when you open the
liftgate or any door, or if you press the UNLOCK button
on the RKE transmitter, or rotate the dimmer control on
the multifunction lever completely upward to the second
detent.
Battery Saver Feature
To protect the battery, the interior lights will turn off
automatically 10 minutes after the ignition switch is
moved to the LOCK position. This will occur if the
interior lights were switched on manually or are on
because a door is open.
Dimmer Control
154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
The windshield wiper/washer control lever is located on
the right side of the steering column. The front wipers are
operated by rotating a switch, located at the end of the
lever. For information on using the rear window wiper/
washer, refer to “Rear Window Features” in this section.
Windshield Wiper Operation
Rotate the end of the lever upward to the LO position for
low-speed wiper operation.
Rotate the end of the lever upward to the HI position for
high-speed wiper operation.
Windshield Wiper/Washer Lever Front Wiper Control
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155
NOTE: The wipers will automatically return to the
“park” position if you turn OFF the ignition switch while
they are operating. The wipers will resume operation
when you turn the ignition switch back to the ON
position.
CAUTION!
•
Turn the windshield wipers off when driving
through an automatic car wash. Damage to the
windshield wipers may result if the wiper control
is left in any position other than off.
•
In cold weather, always turn off the wiper switch
and allow the wipers to return to the “Park”
position before turning off the engine. If the wiper
switch is left on and the wipers freeze to the
windshield, damage to the wiper motor may occur
when the vehicle is restarted.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
•
Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents
the windshield wiper blades from returning to the
off position. If the windshield wiper control is
turned off and the blades cannot return to the off
position, damage to the wiper motor may occur.
Intermittent Wiper System
Use the intermittent wiper system when weather condi-
tions make a single wiping cycle with a variable pause
between cycles desirable. Rotate the end of the wind-
shield wiper/washer control lever to the first detent, and
then turn the end of the lever to select the desired delay
interval.
156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
There are five delay settings, which allow you to regulate
the wipe interval from a minimum of one cycle every
second to a maximum of approximately 36 seconds
between cycles or from a minimum of one cycle every
second to a maximum of approximately 18 seconds
between cycles at vehicle speeds greater than 10 mph
(16 km/h).
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield
could lead to an accident. You might not see other
vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of
the windshield during freezing weather, warm the
windshield with defroster before and during wind-
shield washer use.
Windshield Washers
To use the washer, pull the windshield wiper/washer
control lever toward you and hold it for as long as
washer spray is desired.
Front Wiper Control
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157
If you activate the washer while the wiper control is in
the delay range, the wipers will operate in low-speed for
two wipe cycles after releasing the lever and then resume
the intermittent interval previously selected.
If you activate the washer while the wiper control is in
the off position, the wipers will operate for two wipe
cycles and then turn off.
Mist Feature
Push downward on the windshield wiper/washer con-
trol lever to activate a single wipe cycle to clear the
windshield of road mist or spray from a passing vehicle.
The wipers will continue to operate until you release the
lever.
Mist Control
158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Headlights with Wipers (Available with Automatic
Headlights Only)
When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on
approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on
if the multifunction lever (on the left side of the steering
column) is placed in the AUTO position. In addition, the
headlights will turn off when the wipers are turned off if
they were turned on by this feature.
The Headlights with Wipers feature can be turned on or
off through the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) — if equipped. For details, refer to ”Headlights
On with Wipers,” under “Personal Settings (Customer-
Programmable Features)” under “Electronic Vehicle In-
formation Center” in section 4 of this manual.
TILT STEERING COLUMN
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
upward or downward. The tilt control handle is located
below the steering wheel at the end of the steering
column.
Tilt Steering Control Handle
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159
To unlock the steering column, push the control handle
downward. To tilt the steering column, move the steering
wheel upward or downward as desired. To lock the
steering column in position, pull the control handle
upward until it is fully engaged.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving. The
tilt adjustment must be locked while driving. Adjust-
ing the steering wheel while driving or driving
without the tilt adjustment locked could cause the
driver to lose control of the vehicle.
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
When engaged, the Electronic Speed Control takes over
the accelerator operation at speeds greater than 25 mph
(40 km/h).
The Electronic Speed Control lever is located on the right
side of the steering wheel.
Electronic Speed Control Lever
160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Elec-
tronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut
down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated
simultaneously. If this occurs, the Electronic Speed Con-
trol System can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic
Speed Control ON/OFF button and resetting the desired
vehicle set speed.
To Activate
Push and release the ON/OFF button located
on the end of the Electronic Speed Control
lever. The Cruise indicator lamp in the instru-
ment cluster will illuminate. To turn the system
off, push and release the ON/OFF button a second time.
The Cruise indicator lamp will turn off. Be sure to turn
the Electronic Speed Control system off when not in use.
NOTE: The Electronic Speed Control system will auto-
matically turn off when the engine is turned off.
WARNING!
Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.
You could lose control and have an accident. Always
leave the Electronic Speed Control system off when
you are not using it.
To Set a Desired Speed
When the vehicle reaches the speed desired, press down
on the SET DECEL lever and release. Release the accel-
erator and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed.
NOTE:
•
The vehicle must be traveling at least 25 mph
(40 km/h) for the Electronic Speed Control to set.
•
The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed and
on level ground before pressing the SET DECEL lever.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161
To Deactivate
A soft tap on the brake pedal, or pulling the Electronic
Speed Control lever toward you (cancel), or normal brake
or clutch pressure while slowing the vehicle will deacti-
vate the speed control without erasing the set speed from
memory. Pressing the ON/OFF button or turning off the
ignition erases the set speed from memory.
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with a manual transmis-
sion, pressing the clutch pedal will disengage the speed
control. A slight increase in engine RPM before the
Electronic Speed Control disengages is normal.
To Resume Speed
If you deactivated the Electronic Speed Control without
erasing the set speed from memory and your vehicle
speed is above 20 mph (32 km/h) you can resume the
previous set speed. To do so, push the lever up and
release (RESUME ACCEL), and then remove your foot
from the accelerator pedal.
To Vary the Speed Setting
When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can in-
crease speed by pushing up and holding the RESUME
ACCEL lever. If the lever is continually held in the
RESUME ACCEL position, the set speed will continue to
increase in 5 mph (10 km/h) increments until the lever is
released. Release the lever when the desired speed is
reached and the new set speed will be established.
Tapping RESUME ACCEL once will result ina1mph
(2 km/h) speed increase. Each time the lever is tapped,
speed increases so that tapping the lever three times will
increase speed by 3 mph (5 km/h), etc.
To decrease speed while the Electronic Speed Control is
set, push down and hold the SET DECEL lever. If the
lever is continually held in the SET DECEL position, the
set speed will continue to decrease in 5 mph (10 km/h)
increments until the lever is released. Release the lever
when the desired speed is reached, and the new set speed
will be established.
162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Tapping the SET DECEL button once will result in a
1 mph (2 km/h) speed decrease. Each time the button is
tapped, speed decreases.
To Accelerate for Passing
Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills
NOTE: The Electronic Speed Control system maintains
speed up and down hills. A slight speed change on
moderate hills is normal.
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so
it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed
Control.
Vehicles equipped with a manual transmission may need
to be shifted into a lower gear to climb hills without
speed loss.
WARNING!
Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the
system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your ve-
hicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you
could lose control. An accident could be the result.
Do not use Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic
or on roads that are winding, icy, snow-covered or
slippery.
PARKSENSE姞REAR PARK ASSIST — IF
EQUIPPED
The ParkSense威Rear Park Assist system provides visual
and audible indications of the distance between the rear
fascia and the detected obstacle when backing up. Refer
to ParkSense威System Usage Precautions for limitations
of this system and recommendations.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163
ParkSense威will remember the last system state (enabled
or disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition
is changed to the RUN/ON position.
ParkSense威can be active only when the shift lever is in
REVERSE. If ParkSense威is enabled at this shift lever
position, the system will be active until the vehicle speed
is increased to approximately 11 mph (18 km/h) or
above. The system will be active again if the vehicle
speed is decreased to speeds less than approximately
10 mph (16 km/h).
ParkSense姞Sensors
The four ParkSense威sensors, located in the rear fascia/
bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is
within the sensors’ field of view.
The sensors can detect obstacles from approximately
12 in (30 cm) up to 79 in (200 cm) from the rear
fascia/bumper in the horizontal direction, depending on
the location, type and orientation of the obstacle.
ParkSense姞Warning Display
The ParkSense威Warning screen will only be displayed if
Sound and Display is selected from the Customer-
Programmable Features section of the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC). Refer to “Personal Settings
(Customer-Programmable Features)” under “Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in Section 4.
164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The ParkSense威Warning Display is located in the Instru-
ment cluster’s EVIC display. It provides both visual and
audible warnings to indicate the distance between the
rear fascia/bumper and the detected obstacle.
ParkSense姞Display
When the vehicle is in REVERSE, the warning display
will turn ON indicating the system status.
Rear Park Assist Display
Rear Park Assist ON
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing
three solid arcs and will produce a
1
⁄
2
second tone. As the
vehicle moves closer to the object the EVIC display will
show fewer arcs and the sound tone will change from
slow, to fast, to continuous.
Rear Park Assist Disabled
Slow Tone
166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the EVIC display
shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone.
Fast Tone Continuous Tone
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167
The following chart shows the warning display operation
when the system is detecting an obstacle:
WARNING DISPLAY DISTANCES
DISPLAY MESSAGE OBSTACLE DISTANCE FROM: ARC’s AUDIBLE SIGNAL
REAR CORNERS REAR CENTER
Park Assist ON None None
Warning Object Detected 78.7 in (200 cm) 3 Solid Yes, 1/2 second
Warning Object Detected 39.3 in (100 cm) 3 Flashing Slow Tone
Warning Object Detected 27.5 in (70 cm) 31.4 in (80 cm) 3 Flashing Slow Tone
Warning Object Detected 25.5 in (65 cm) 25.5 in (65 cm) 2 Flashing Fast Tone
Warning Object Detected 19.7 in (50 cm) 19.7 in (50 cm) 2 Flashing Fast Tone
Warning Object Detected 15.7 in (40 cm) 15.7 in (40 cm) 2 Flashing Fast Tone
Warning Object Detected 11.8 in (30 cm) 11.8 in (30 cm) 1 Flashing Continuous Tone
NOTE: ParkSense威will MUTE the radio, if on, when
the system is sounding an audio tone.
168 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Enabling and Disabling ParkSense姞
ParkSense威can be enabled and disabled with a switch
located in the switch bank of the instrument panel or
through the Customer-Programmable Features section of
the EVIC. The available choices are: OFF, Sound Only, or
Sound and Display. For details, refer to “Personal Set-
tings (Customer-Programmable Features)” under “Elec-
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in Section 4.
When the ParkSense威switch is pressed to
disable the system, the instrument cluster will
display the “PARK ASSIST DISABLED” mes-
sage for approximately five seconds. Refer to
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)”. When
the shift lever is moved to REVERSE and the system is
disabled, the EVIC will display the “PARK ASSIST DIS-
ABLED” message for as long as the vehicle is in RE-
VERSE.
The ParkSense威switch LED will be ON when Park-
Sense威is disabled or defective. The ParkSense威switch
LED will be OFF when the system is enabled.
Service the ParkSense姞Rear Park Assist System
When the ParkSense威Rear Park Assist System is defec-
tive, the instrument cluster will actuate a single chime,
once per ignition cycle, and it will display the “SERVICE
PARK ASSIST SYSTEM” message. Refer to “Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)”. When the shift lever
is moved to REVERSE and the system has detected a
faulted condition, the EVIC will display the “SERVICE
PARK ASSIST SYSTEM” message for as long as the
vehicle is in REVERSE. Under this condition ParkSense威
will not operate.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 169
If “SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM” appears in the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) after mak-
ing sure the rear fascia/bumper is clean and clear of
snow, ice, mud, dirt or other obstruction, see your
authorized dealer.
The ParkSense威system uses four sensors located in the
rear bumper fascia to scan for obstacles up to 79 in
(200 cm) away from the rear bumper fascia. The warning
display located above in the Instrument Cluster’s EVIC
provides both visible and audible warnings to indicate
the range of the object.
Cleaning the ParkSense姞System
Clean the ParkSense威sensors with water, car wash soap
and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do not
scratch or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could dam-
age the sensors.
ParkSense姞System Usage Precautions
NOTE:
•
Ensure that the rear bumper is free of snow, ice, mud,
dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense威system operat-
ing properly.
•
Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could
affect the performance of ParkSense威.
•
When you turn ParkSense威off, the instrument cluster
will display “PARK ASSIST DISABLED.” Further-
more, once you turn ParkSense威off, it remains off
until you turn it on again, even if you cycle the ignition
key.
•
When you move the shift lever to the REVERSE
position and ParkSense威is turned off, the instrument
cluster will display “PARK ASSIST DISABLED” mes-
sage for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
170 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
•
ParkSense威, when on, will MUTE the radio when it is
sounding a tone.
•
If a ParkSense威system malfunction occurs, a single
chime will sound once per ignition cycle. In addition,
the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) will
display “SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM” and the
LED in the ParkSense威switch will illuminate. If this
occurs after making sure the rear fascia/bumper is
clean and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt, or other
obstruction, see your authorized dealer for service.
•
Clean the ParkSense威sensors regularly, taking care
not to scratch or damage them. The sensors must not
be covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris.
Failure to do so can result in the system not working
properly. The ParkSense威system might not detect an
obstacle behind the fascia/bumper, or it could provide
a false indication that an obstacle is behind the fascia/
bumper.
•
Objects must not be within 12 in (30 cm) from the rear
fascia/bumper while driving the vehicle. Failure to do
so can result in the system misinterpreting a close
object as a sensor problem, causing the “SERVICE
PARK ASSIST SYSTEM” message to be displayed in
the instrument cluster.
CAUTION!
•
ParkSense威is only a parking aid and it is unable
to recognize every obstacle, including small ob-
stacles. Parking curbs might be temporarily de-
tected or not detected at all. Obstacles located
above or below the sensors will not be detected
when they are in close proximity.
(Continued)
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 171
CAUTION! (Continued)
•
The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
ParkSense威to be able to stop in time when the
obstacle is detected. It is recommended that the
driver looks over his/her shoulder when using
ParkSense威.
WARNING!
•
Drivers must be careful when backing up even
when using the ParkSense威Rear Park Assist Sys-
tem. Always check carefully behind your vehicle,
look behind you, and be sure to check for pedes-
trians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and
blind spots before backing up. You are responsible
for safety and must continue to pay attention to
your surroundings. Failure to do so can result in
serious injury or death.
(Continued)
172 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Before using the ParkSense威Rear Park Assist
System, it is strongly recommended that the ball
mount and hitch ball assembly is disconnected
from the vehicle when the vehicle is not used for
towing. Failure to do so can result in injury or
damage to vehicles or obstacles because the hitch
ball will be much closer to the obstacle than the
rear fascia when the warning display turns on the
single flashing arc and sounds the continuous
tone. Also, the sensors could detect the ball mount
and hitch ball assembly, depending on its size and
shape, giving a false indication that an obstacle is
behind the vehicle.
GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED
HomeLink威replaces up to three remote controls (hand-
held transmitters) that operate devices such as garage
door openers, motorized gates, lighting or home security
systems. The HomeLink威unit operates off your vehicle’s
battery.
The HomeLink威buttons that are located in the headliner
or sun visor designate the three different HomeLink威
channels.
HomeLink威Buttons
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 173
NOTE: HomeLink威is disabled when the Vehicle Secu-
rity Alarm is active.
WARNING!
•
Your motorized door or gate will open and close
while you are training the Universal Transceiver.
Do not train the transceiver if people, pets or other
objects are in the path of the door or gate. Only use
this transceiver with a garage door opener that has
a “stop and reverse” feature as required by Federal
safety standards. This includes most garage door
opener models manufactured after 1982. Do not
use a garage door opener without these safety
features. Call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the
Internet at www.HomeLink.com for safety infor-
mation or assistance.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dan-
gerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage
while training the transceiver. Exhaust gas can
cause serious injury or death.
Programming HomeLink姞
Before You Begin
If you have not trained any of the HomeLink威buttons,
erase all channels before you begin training.
To do this, press and hold the two outside buttons for
20 seconds until the red indicator flashes.
It is recommended that a new battery be placed in the
handheld transmitter of the device that is being copied to
HomeLink威for more efficient training and accurate
transmission of the radio-frequency signal.
174 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Your vehicle should be parked outside of the garage
when programming.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
2. Hold the battery side of the handheld transmitter
away from the HomeLink威button you wish to program.
Place the handheld transmitter 1–3 in (3-8 cm) away from
the HomeLink威button you wish to program while
keeping the indicator light in view.
3. Simultaneously press and hold both the chosen
HomeLink威button and the handheld transmitter button
until the HomeLink威indicator changes from a slow to a
rapidly blinking light, then release both the HomeLink威
and handheld transmitter buttons.
Watch for the HomeLink威indicator to change flash rates.
When it changes, it is programmed. It may take up to
30 seconds or longer in rare cases. The garage door may
open and close while you train.
NOTE:
•
Some gate operators and garage door openers may
require you to replace Step 3 with procedures noted in
the “Gate Operator/Canadian Programming” section.
•
After training a HomeLink威channel, if the garage
door does not operate with HomeLink威and the ga-
rage door opener was manufactured after 1995, the
garage door opener may have a rolling code. If so,
proceed to the heading “Programming A Rolling Code
System.”
4. Press and hold the just-trained HomeLink威button
and observe the indicator light.
If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming is
complete and the garage door (or device) should activate
when the HomeLink威button is pressed.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 175
If the indicator light blinks rapidly for two seconds, and
then turns to a constant light, continue with program-
ming for a Rolling Code.
5. PROGRAMMING A ROLLING CODE SYSTEM
At the garage door opener motor (in the garage), locate
the “Learn” or “Training” button.
This can usually be found where the hanging antenna
wire is attached to the garage door opener motor (it is
NOT the button normally used to open and close the
door).
6. Firmly press and release the LEARN or TRAINING
button. The name and color of the button may vary by
manufacturer.
NOTE: You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next
step after the LEARN button has been pressed.
1 — Garage Door Opener
2 — Training Button
176 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
7. Return to the vehicle and press the programmed
HomeLink威button twice (holding the button for two
seconds each time). If the device is plugged in and
activates, programming is complete.
If the device does not activate, press the button a third
time (for two seconds) to complete the training.
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at
www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
To program the remaining two HomeLink威buttons,
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
erase the channels.
Gate Operator/Canadian Programming
Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter sig-
nals to “time-out” (or quit) after several seconds of
transmission – which may not be long enough for
HomeLink威to pick up the signal during programming.
Similar to this Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are
designed to “time-out” in the same manner.
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling
process to prevent possible overheating of the garage
door or gate motor.
If you are having difficulties programming a garage door
opener or a gate operator, replace “Programming
HomeLink威” Step 3 with the following:
3. Continue to press and hold the HomeLink威button,
while you press and release (“cycle”), your handheld
transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink威has
successfully accepted the frequency signal. The indica-
tor light will flash slowly and then rapidly when fully
trained.
If you unplugged the device for training, plug it back in
at this time.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 177
Then proceed with Step 4 under “Programming
HomeLink威” earlier in this section.
Using HomeLink姞
To operate, press and release the programmed
HomeLink威button. Activation will now occur for the
trained device (i.e., garage door opener, gate operator,
Security system, entry door lock, home/office lighting,
etc.,). The handheld transmitter of the device may also be
used at any time.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink姞Button
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
follow these steps:
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink威button until
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not
release the button.
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with Program-
ming HomeLink威Step 2 and follow all remaining steps.
Security
It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn
in your vehicle.
To do this, press and hold the two outside buttons for
20 seconds until the red indicator flashes. Note that all
channels will be erased. Individual channels cannot be
erased.
The HomeLink威Universal Transceiver is disabled when
the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
178 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Troubleshooting Tips
If you are having trouble programming HomeLink威, here
are some of the most common solutions:
•
Replace the battery in the original transmitter.
•
Press the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener
to complete the training for a Rolling Code.
•
Did you unplug the device for training, and remember
to plug it back in?
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at
www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
General Information
This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry
Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference that may be
received including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
NOTE: The transmitter has been tested and it complies
with FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to operate the
device.
The term IC before the certification/registration number
only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifica-
tions were met.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 179
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED
The power sunroof switch is located between the sun
visors on the overhead console.
WARNING!
•
Never leave unattended children in a vehicle with
the key in the ignition switch. Occupants, particu-
larly unattended children, can become entrapped
by the power sunroof while operating the power
sunroof switch. Such entrapment may result in
serious injury or death.
•
In an accident, there is a greater risk of being
thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You
could also be seriously injured or killed. Always
fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all
passengers are properly secured too.
•
Do not allow small children to operate the sun-
roof. Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or
any object to project through the sunroof opening.
Injury may result.
Power Sunroof Switch
180 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Opening Sunroof — Express
Press the switch rearward and release it within one-half
second and the sunroof will open automatically from any
position. The sunroof will open fully and stop automati-
cally. This is called “Express Open”. During Express
Open operation, any movement of the sunroof switch
will stop the sunroof.
Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode
To open the sunroof, press and hold the switch rearward
to full open. Any release of the switch will stop the
movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially
opened condition until the switch is pushed and held
rearward again.
Closing Sunroof — Express
Press the switch forward and release it within one-half
second and the sunroof will close automatically from any
position. The sunroof will close fully and stop automati-
cally. This is called “Express Close”. During Express
Close operation, any movement of the switch will stop
the sunroof.
Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode
To close the sunroof, press and hold the switch in the
forward position. Any release of the switch will stop the
movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially
closed condition until the switch is pushed and held
forward again.
Pinch Protect Feature
This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of
the sunroof during Express Close operation. If an ob-
struction in the path of the sunroof is detected, the
sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstruc-
tion if this occurs. Next, press the switch forward and
release to Express Close.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 181
Pinch Protect Override
If a known obstruction (ice, debris, etc.) prevents closing
and moves the sunroof in the opposite direction, press
the switch forward and hold. This allows the sunroof to
move towards the closed position.
NOTE: Pinch protection is disabled while the switch is
pressed.
Venting Sunroof — Express
Press and release the ⬙Vent⬙button within one-half sec-
ond and the sunroof will open to the vent position. This
is called “Express Vent”, and it will occur regardless of
sunroof position. During Express Vent operation, any
movement of the switch will stop the sunroof.
Sunshade Operation
The sunshade can be opened manually. However, the
sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens.
NOTE: The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is
open.
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occur-
rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
the rear windows open, then open the front and rear
windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the
buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the sun-
roof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any
window.
Sunroof Maintenance
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean
the glass panel.
182 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Ignition Off Operation
For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), the power sunroof switch
will remain active for 45 seconds after the ignition switch
is turned to the LOCK position. Opening either front
door will cancel this feature.
For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, the power sunroof
switch will remain active for up to approximately ten
minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK
position. Opening either front door will cancel this
feature. The time is programmable. For details, refer to
“Delay Power Off to Accessories Until Exit,” under
“Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)”
under “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in
Section 4 of this manual.
SKY SLIDER™ FULL LENGTH OPEN ROOF — IF
EQUIPPED
The Sky Slider™ is a full-length, soft-top, power roof that
opens front to rear or rear to front.
Sky Slider™ Usage Precautions
NOTE:
•
The system will not operate when ambient tempera-
ture is at –4°F (–20°C) or lower.
•
The system will not operate at vehicle speeds of
86 mph (138 km/h) or above.
•
Opening and closing the Sky Slider™ repeatedly with-
out the engine running may run the battery down.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 183
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the Sky Slider™ vehicle contents, and the vehicle
interior:
•
Never attempt to open or close the Sky Slider™
when it is frozen. Wait until the Sky Slider™ is
thawed before operating.
•
Opening the Sky Slider™ when damp, wet, or
dirty can cause stains, mildew, and damage to the
soft-top material and the inside of your vehicle.
Make sure the Sky Slider™ is dry before opening.
•
Always close the Sky Slider™ when leaving your
vehicle, damage to the vehicle interior can occur.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
•
Do not leave the Sky Slider™ open for several
weeks at a time. Close it occasionally to prevent
discoloration in the folds of the fabric and to allow
the creases to smooth out. This is especially im-
portant if the Sky Slider™ was opened when not
completely dry.
WARNING!
Failure to follow these warnings can result in injuries
that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and
others around you:
•
In an accident, there is a greater risk of being
thrown from a vehicle with the Sky Slider™ open.
Always fasten your seat belt properly and make
sure all passengers are properly secured too.
(Continued)
184 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Before operating the Sky Slider™ make sure that
no moving parts of the Sky Slider™ can injure a
person or animal.
•
Never place any extremities (hands, feet, etc.) near
the Sky Slider™ components or the roof area
while operating the Sky Slider™.
•
If potential danger exists while opening or closing
the Sky Slider™ in Automatic Mode, press and
release the switch immediately to interrupt the
operation.
•
If potential danger exists while opening or closing
the Sky Slider™ in Operator Mode, release the
switch immediately to interrupt the operation.
•
Do not allow small children to operate the Sky
Slider™.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Never leave children in a vehicle, with the key in
the ignition switch. Occupants, particularly unat-
tended children, can become entrapped by the Sky
Slider™ while operating the Sky Slider™ switch.
Such entrapment may result in serious injury or
death.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 185
Sky Slider™ Control
The Sky Slider™ switch is located between the sun visors
on the overhead console.
NOTE: The Sky Slider™ switch will operate when the
ignition switch is turned to the ON or ACC position.
Opening the Sky Slider™
Using Automatic Mode
Press the switch rearward and release it within one-half
second and the Sky Slider™ will open from the front and
move automatically toward the rear of the vehicle.
Press the switch forward and release it within one-half
second and the Sky Slider™ will open from the rear and
move automatically toward the front of the vehicle.
NOTE:
•
During operation, any movement of the Sky Slider™
switch will stop the Sky Slider™ roof.
•
To resume the operation from a partially open posi-
tion, press and release the switch a second time.
•
The Sky Slider™ will not open from the front and the
rear at the same time. The Sky Slider™ must close fully
before opening it from the opposite end.
Sky Slider™ Switch
186 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Using Operator Mode
Press the switch rearward and hold it, the Sky Slider™
will open from the front and move toward the rear of the
vehicle.
Press the switch forward and hold it, the Sky Slider™
will open from the rear and move toward the front of the
vehicle.
NOTE: During operation, any movement of the Sky
Slider™ switch will stop the Sky Slider™ roof.
Closing the Sky Slider™
Using Automatic Mode
Press and release the button in the center of the switch
and the Sky Slider™ will close automatically from any
position.
Using Operator Mode
If the Sky Slider™ is open from the front, press the switch
forward and hold it, the Sky Slider™ will move forward.
Release the switch to stop the Sky Slider™ travel at any
point.
If the Sky Slider™ is open from the rear, press the switch
rearward and hold it and the Sky Slider™ will move
rearward. Release the switch to stop the Sky Slider™
travel at any point.
Manual Override
The Sky Slider™ drive motors are mounted to the roof
above the cargo lamp. In the event that your vehicle
losses battery power, you can close the Sky Slider™ by
turning the drive gears in the appropriate motor with a
6 mm Allen wrench. To do so, you must first remove the
cargo lamp from the headliner. Then, insert the wrench
into the “Allen” shaped hole in the appropriate motor
and turn the wrench clockwise until the top closes
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 187
completely. The left motor facing forward will close the
top when it is open from the rear of the vehicle. The right
motor will close the top when it is open from the front of
the vehicle.
Anti-Pinch Protect Feature
The Sky Slider™ will retract automatically if it detects an
obstruction while closing. If this occurs, remove the
obstruction and use the switch again to close the Sky
Slider™.
WARNING!
There is no anti-pinch protection when the Sky
Slider™ is almost closed. Be sure to clear all objects
from the Sky Slider™ before closing.
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the Sky Slider™ in certain open or
partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and
can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with the rear
windows open, then open the front and rear windows
together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs
with the Sky Slider™ open, adjust the Sky Slider™
opening to minimize the buffeting or open any window.
Sky Slider™ Maintenance
Refer to “Sky Slider™ Top Care” under “Maintaining
Your Vehicle” in Section 7 of this manual.
188 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLET
Your vehicle is equipped with a fused 12 Volt (DC) power
outlet. This power outlet is located on the instrument
panel, below the climate controls. It has power available
when the ignition switch is in the ON or ACC position.
Insert the cigar lighter or accessory plug into the outlet
for use to ensure proper operation.
NOTE:
•
To ensure proper operation a MOPAR威knob and
element must be used.
•
Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts (13
Amps) at 12 Volts.
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
•
Only devices designed for use in this type of
outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.
•
Do not touch with wet hands.
•
Close the lid when not in use and while driving
the vehicle.
•
If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an
electric shock and failure.
Front Power Outlet
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 189
CAUTION!
•
Many accessories that can be plugged in draw
power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in
use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life
and/or prevent the engine from starting.
•
Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the
battery even more quickly. Only use these inter-
mittently and with greater caution.
•
After the use of high power draw accessories, or
long periods of the vehicle not being started (with
accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be
driven a sufficient length of time to allow the
alternator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
•
Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs
only. Do not hang any type of accessory or acces-
sory bracket from the plug.
190 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CUPHOLDERS
There are two cupholders for the front seat passengers,
located in the center console.
The rear passengers have cupholders at the rear of the
center console.
Front Cupholders
Rear Cupholders
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 191
STORAGE
Front Storage Compartment
The front storage compartment (located on the left side of
the instrument panel) can hold cell phones, PDAs, and
other small items.
Console Storage Compartment
To open, press the latch and lift the cover.
Front Storage Compartment
Center Console
192 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The center console has a removable storage tray which
can hold cell phones, PDAs, and other small items.
CARGO AREA FEATURES
Cargo Load Floor
The cargo load floor system has a load capacity of 400 lbs
(181 kg). The load floor has a built-in storage bin that can
hold a variety of items. The underside of the storage bin
cover also contains a plastic lined tray. The cover can be
installed with either side facing up for added utility.
To provide additional storage area, each rear seat can be
folded flat. This allows for extended cargo space and still
maintains some rear seating room. Refer to “Seats” in this
Section for additional information on the 60/40 Split
Folding Rear Seat with Fold Flat feature.
Accessing the Storage Bin
NOTE: The spring-loaded latches that retain the
storage bin cover to the cargo load floor should not be
used as cargo tie-downs.
Removable Storage Tray
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 193
1. Flip the spring-loaded latch pull-loops up.
2. Pull the loops upward and twist them one-quarter
turn so that they are parallel to the slots in the storage bin
cover.
3. Lift the cover upward over the loops.
4. Turn over the cover and reinstall it.
NOTE: You can install the cover with either side facing
upward.
5. With the cover seated in the floor, pull upward on
loops and twist them one-quarter turn so that they are no
longer parallel to the slots in the cover.
6. Flip the loops down.
WARNING!
A loose storage bin cover thrown forward in a colli-
sion or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the
vehicle. Always latch the storage bin cover to the
cargo load floor with the spring-loaded latches when
not accessing the storage bin.
Cargo Load Floor Loops
194 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Cargo Tie-Down Hooks and Loops
The tie-downs located on cargo area floor should be used
to secure loads safely when the vehicle is moving.
Cargo tie-down loops are located on the trim panels.
Cargo Tie-Down Hooks
Cargo Tie-Down Loops
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 195
WARNING!
•
Cargo tie-downs are not safe anchors for a child
seat tether strap. In a sudden stop or collision, a
tie-down could pull loose and allow the child seat
to come loose. A child could be badly injured. Use
only the anchors provided for child seat tethers.
•
To help protect against personal injury, passengers
should not be seated in the rear cargo area. The
rear cargo space is intended for load carrying
purposes only, not for passengers, who should sit
in seats and use seat belts.
WARNING!
The weight and position of cargo and passengers can
change the vehicle center of gravity and vehicle
handling. To avoid loss of control resulting in per-
sonal injury, follow these guidelines for loading your
vehicle:
•
Do not carry loads that exceed the load limits
described on the label attached to the left door or
left door center pillar.
•
Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor. Put
heavier objects as low and as far forward as
possible.
•
Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear
axle. Too much weight or improperly placed
weight over or behind the rear axle can cause the
vehicle to sway.
(Continued)
196 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of
the seatback. This could impair visibility or become
a dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or collision.
Retractable Cargo Area Cover — If Equipped
NOTE: The purpose of this cover is for privacy, not to
secure loads. It will not prevent cargo from shifting or
protect passengers from loose cargo.
The removable retractable cargo area cover mounts in the
cargo area behind the top of the rear seats.
The cover, when extended, covers the cargo area to keep
items out of sight. Notches in the trim panels near the
liftgate opening secure the extended cover in place.
The cover rolls away neatly inside its housing when not
in use. You can also remove the cover from the vehicle to
make more room in the cargo area.
To install the cover, position it in the vehicle so that the
flat side of the housing faces upward. Then, insert either
the left or the right spring-loaded post (located on the
ends of the cover housing) into either of the left or the
right attachment points shown.
Installing Retractable Cargo Area Cover
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 197
Then, insert the spring-loaded post on the opposite end
of the cover housing into the attachment point on the
opposite side of the vehicle.
Next, grab the cover handle and pull the cover toward
you. As the cover nears the liftgate opening, guide the
rear attachment posts (on both ends of the cover) into the
notches in the trim panels. Then, lower the cover to
position the posts into the bottom of the notches and
release the handle.
Positioning Retractable Cargo Area Cover
198 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
In an accident, a cargo cover loose in the vehicle
could cause injury. It could fly around in a sudden
stop and strike someone in the vehicle. Do not store
the cargo cover on the cargo floor or in the passenger
compartment. Remove the cover from the vehicle
when taken from its mounting. Do not store in the
vehicle.
REAR WINDOW FEATURES
Rear Window Wiper/Washer
The rear wiper/washer is controlled by a rotary switch
located on the control lever. The control lever is located
on the right side of the steering column.
Rotate the switch upward to the “On” position to
activate the rear wiper.
NOTE: The rear wiper operates in an intermittent mode
only.
Rear Wiper/Washer Control
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 199
Rotate the switch upward to the “washer” position
to activate that rear washer. The washer pump will
continue to operate as long as the lever or ring is
engaged. Upon release, the wipers will cycle two times
before returning to the set position.
If the rear wiper is operating when the ignition is turned
OFF, the wiper will automatically return to the “park”
position. When the vehicle is restarted, the wiper will
resume function at whichever position the switch is set.
Rear Window Defroster
The rear window defroster button is located on the
climate control (Mode) knob. Press this button to
turn on the rear window defroster and the heated outside
mirrors. An indicator in the button will illuminate when
the rear window defroster is on. The rear window
defroster automatically turns off after approximately
10 minutes. For an additional five minutes of operation,
press the button a second time.
NOTE: To prevent excessive battery drain, use the rear
window defroster only when the engine is operating.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
•
Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to
the heating elements. Labels can be peeled off
after soaking with warm water.
•
Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abra-
sive window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
•
Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
200 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED
NOTE: Roof rack and crossbars cannot be used on
vehicles equipped with Skyslider威.
The load carried on the roof, when equipped with a
luggage rack, must not exceed 150 lbs (68 kg), and it
should be uniformly distributed over the cargo area.
Crossbars should always be used whenever cargo is
placed on the roof rack. Check the straps frequently to be
sure that the load remains securely attached.
NOTE: Crossbars are offered by MOPAR威accessories.
External racks do not increase the total load carrying
capacity of the vehicle. Be sure that the total occupant
and luggage load inside the vehicle, plus the load on the
luggage rack, do not exceed the maximum vehicle load
capacity.
CAUTION!
•
To avoid damage to the roof rack and vehicle, do
not exceed the maximum roof rack load capacity.
Always distribute heavy loads as evenly as pos-
sible and secure the load appropriately.
•
Long loads, which extend over the windshield,
such as wood panels or surfboards, should be
secured to both the front and rear of the vehicle.
•
Place a blanket or other protection between the
surface of the roof and the load.
•
Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners care-
fully when carrying large or heavy loads on the
roof rack. Wind forces, due to natural causes or
nearby truck traffic, can add sudden upward loads.
This is especially true on large flat loads and may
result in damage to the cargo or your vehicle.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 201
WARNING!
Cargo must be securely tied down before driving
your vehicle. Improperly secured loads can fly off the
vehicle, particularly at high speeds, resulting in per-
sonal injury or property damage. Follow the roof rack
cautions when carrying cargo on your roof rack.
202 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
䡵Instrument Panel Features ............... 206
䡵Instrument Cluster .................... 207
䡵Instrument Cluster Descriptions ........... 208
䡵Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) —
If Equipped .......................... 223
▫Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Displays ........................... 225
▫Oil Change Required .................. 226
▫Trip Functions ...................... 227
▫Compass Display / ECO (Fuel Saver Mode)
— If Equipped ...................... 229
▫Personal Settings
(Customer-Programmable Features) ....... 231
䡵Sales Code REQ — AM/FM Stereo Radio
And 6–Disc CD/DVD Changer
(MP3/WMA AUX Jack) .................. 235
▫Operating Instructions - Radio Mode ...... 236
▫Operation Instructions - (Disc Mode For CD
And MP3/WMA Audio Play, DVD-Video) . . . 243
▫Notes On Playing MP3/WMA Files ....... 245
4
▫
List Button (Disc Mode For MP3/WMA Play)
. . 248
▫Info Button (Disc Mode For MP3/WMA
Play) ............................. 248
䡵Sales Code (RER/REN) — AM/FM/CD/DVD
Radio – If Equipped .................... 250
▫Operating Instructions — Voice Recognition
System (VR) — If Equipped ............. 251
▫Operating Instructions — uconnect™ phone
— If Equipped ...................... 251
▫Clock Setting Procedure ............... 251
䡵Sales Code RES — AM/FM Stereo Radio With
CD Player (MP3 AUX Jack) ............... 253
▫Operating Instructions — Radio Mode ..... 253
▫Operation Instructions — CD Mode For CD
And MP3 Audio Play ................. 256
▫Notes On Playing MP3 Files ............ 259
▫Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode .... 261
䡵Sales Code RES/RSC — AM/FM Stereo Radio
With CD Player (MP3 AUX Jack) And Sirius
Radio............................... 262
▫Operating Instructions — Radio Mode ..... 262
▫Operation Instructions — CD Mode For CD
And MP3 Audio Play ................. 267
▫Notes On Playing MP3 Files ............ 270
▫List Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play) ...... 272
▫Info Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play) ...... 272
䡵uconnect™ studios (Satellite Radio) —
If Equipped (REN/REQ/RER/RES/REU
Radios Only) ......................... 273
▫System Activation .................... 274
204 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
▫Electronic Serial Number/Sirius
Identification Number (ESN/SID) ......... 274
▫Selecting uconnect™ studios (Satellite)
Mode ............................. 275
▫Satellite Antenna ..................... 275
▫Reception Quality .................... 275
▫Operating Instructions — uconnect™ studios
(Satellite) Mode ..................... 276
▫Operating Instructions — uconnect™ phone
(If Equipped) ....................... 279
▫Operating Instructions — Video
Entertainment System (VES)™
(If Equipped) ....................... 279
䡵Remote Sound System Controls —
If Equipped .......................... 279
▫Right-Hand Switch Functions ............ 279
▫Left-Hand Switch Functions For Radio
Operation .......................... 280
▫Left-Hand Switch Functions For Media
(i.e., CD) Operation ................... 280
䡵CD/DVD Maintenance ................. 280
䡵Climate Controls ...................... 281
▫Manual Heating And Air Conditioning ..... 281
▫Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) —
If Equipped ........................ 285
▫Operating Tips ...................... 291
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 205
INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES
1 — Air Outlet 4 — Radio 7 — Power Outlet
2 — Instrument Cluster 5 — Glove Compartment 8 — Lower Switch Bank
3 — Storage Tray 6 — Climate Control 9 — Storage Bin (if equipped)
206 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 207
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS
1. Fuel Gauge
The fuel gauge shows level of fuel in tank when ignition
switch is in the ON position.
2. Fuel Door Reminder
This symbol indicates the side of the vehicle
where the fuel cap is located.
3. Low Fuel Light
This indicator lights when the fuel level drops to
approximately one-eighth tank.
4. Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly, when cold and
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle
has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should
determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those
tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when
one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illumi-
nates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving
on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect
the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
208 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has
not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS
low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is
combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain continuously
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subse-
quent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the sys-
tem may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure
as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety
of reasons, including the installation of replacement or
alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle, to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS
to continue to function properly.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system opera-
tion or sensor damage may result when using re-
placement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Do not use tire sealant from a can, or
balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a
TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 209
5. Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Light
This light informs you of a problem with the
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. If a
problem is detected, the light will come on
while the engine is running. Cycle the ignition
key when the vehicle has completely stopped and the
shift lever is placed in the PARK position. The light
should turn off. If the light remains lit with the engine
running, your vehicle will usually be drivable; however,
see an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible. If
the light is flashing when the engine is running, imme-
diate service is required and you may experience reduced
performance, an elevated/rough idle or engine stall and
your vehicle may require towing. The light will come on
when the ignition is first turned ON and remain on
briefly as a bulb check. If the light does not come on
during starting, have the system checked by an autho-
rized dealer.
6. Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is part of
an onboard diagnostic system, called OBD, that
monitors engine and automatic transmission con-
trol systems. The light will illuminate when the key is in
the ON position, before engine start. If the bulb does not
come on when turning the key from OFF to ON, have the
condition checked promptly.
Certain conditions such as a loose or missing gas cap,
poor fuel quality, etc., may illuminate the MIL after
engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light
stays on through several of your typical driving cycles. In
most situations, the vehicle will drive normally and will
not require towing.
210 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
damage to the engine control system. It also could
affect fuel economy and drivability. If the MIL is
flashing, severe catalytic converter damage and
power loss will soon occur. Immediate service is
required.
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced
above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal
operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you
drive slowly or park over flammable substances such
as dry plants or wood or cardboard, etc. This could
result in death or serious injury to the driver, occu-
pants or others.
7. High Beam Indicator
This indicator shows that the high beam head-
lights are on. Pull the multifunction control lever
on the left side of the steering column toward you to
switch to low beam.
8. Front Fog Light Indicator — If Equipped
This indicator will illuminate when the fog lights
are on.
9. Speedometer
Shows the vehicle speed in Miles Per Hour (MPH) or
kilometers per hour (km/h).
10. Turn Signal Indicators
The arrow will flash with the exterior turn signal
when the turn signal lever is operated.
If the vehicle electronics sense that the vehicle has
traveled about 1 mile (1.6 km) with the turn signals on, a
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 211
continuous chime will sound to alert you to turn the
signals off. If either indicator flashes at a rapid rate, check
for a defective outside light bulb.
11. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Malfunction
Indicator Light — If Equipped
The “ESC Malfunction Indicator Light” in the
instrument cluster will come on when the
ignition switch is turned to the ON position. It
should go out with the engine running. If the
“ESC Malfunction Indicator Light” comes on continu-
ously with the engine running, a malfunction has been
detected in the ESC system. If this light remains on after
several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven
several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph
(48 km/h), see your authorized dealer as soon as possible
to have the problem diagnosed and corrected.
NOTE:
•
The “ESC Malfunction Indicator Light” come on mo-
mentarily each time the ignition switch is turned ON.
•
Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESC system
will be ON even if it was turned off previously.
•
The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop
when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver
that caused the ESC activation.
12. Charging System Light
This light shows the status of the electrical charg-
ing system. The light should come on when the
ignition switch is first turned ON and remain on briefly
as a bulb check. If the light stays on or comes on while
driving, turn off some of the vehicle’s non-essential
electrical devices or increase engine speed (if at idle). If
the charging system light remains on, it means that the
212 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging
system. Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY. See an autho-
rized dealer.
If jump starting is required, refer to “Jump Starting
Procedures” in section 6 of this manual.
13. Oil Pressure Warning Light
This light indicates low engine oil pressure. The
light should turn on momentarily when the engine
is started. If the light turns on while driving, stop the
vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A
chime will sound for four minutes when this light turns
on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected.
This light does not indicate how much oil is in the engine.
The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
14. Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Light
This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS). The light will turn on when the ignition
switch is turned to the ON position and may
stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, it
indicates that the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system
is not functioning and that service is required. However,
the conventional brake system will continue to operate
normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on.
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced
as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti-Lock
brakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when the
Ignition switch is turned to the ON position, have the
light inspected by an authorized dealer.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 213
15. Tachometer
This gauge measures engine revolutions-per-minute
(RPM x 1000). Before the pointer reaches the red area,
ease up on the accelerator to prevent engine damage.
16. 4WD LOW Indicator — If Equipped
This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in
the 4WD LOW mode. In this mode, the front
driveshaft and rear driveshaft are mechanically
locked together forcing the front and rear
wheels to rotate at the same speed.
17. Hill Descent Control Indicator — If Equipped
The symbol indicates the status of the Hill
Descent Control (HDC) feature. The lamp will
be on solid when HDC is armed. HDC can only
be armed when the transfer case is in the “4WD
LOW” position and the vehicle speed is less then 30 mph
(48 km/h). If these conditions are not met while attempt-
ing to use the HDC feature, the HDC indicator light will
flash on/off.
18. TOW/HAUL Indicator — If Equipped
This light will illuminate when selecting
TOW/HAUL. The TOW/HAUL button is lo-
cated on the gearshift bezel.
19. 4WD Indicator — Vehicles Equipped with
Command-Trac威
This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in
the four-wheel drive mode. In this mode, the
front driveshaft and rear driveshaft are me-
chanically locked together forcing the front and
rear wheels to rotate at the same speed.
214 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
20. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator
Light — If Equipped
This light indicates the Electronic Stability Con-
trol (ESC) is off.
21. SERV (Service) 4WD Indicator Light — If Equipped
The “SERV 4WD Indicator Light” will turn on
when the ignition key is turned to the ON
position and it will stay on for two seconds. If
the light stays on or turns on during driving, it
means that the 4WD system is not functioning properly
and that service is required.
22. Engine Temperature Warning Light
This light warns of an overheated engine condi-
tion. As temperatures rise and the gauge ap-
proaches H, this indicator will illuminate and a
single chime will sound after reaching a set threshold.
Further overheating will cause the temperature gauge to
pass H, the indicator will continuously flash and a
continuous chime will occur until the engine is allowed
to cool.
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and
stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it off. Also,
shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the ve-
hicle. If the temperature reading does not return to
normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for
service. Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in Section 6
for more information.
23. Temperature Gauge
The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tempera-
ture. Any reading within the normal range indicates that
the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily.
The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher tempera-
ture when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades,
or when towing a trailer. It should not be allowed to
exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 215
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could
damage your vehicle. If temperature gauge reads “H”
pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with
the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops
back into the normal range. If the pointer remains on
the “H” and you hear continuous chimes, turn the
engine off immediately, and call an authorized deal-
ership for service.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealer-
ship for service if your vehicle overheats. If you
decide to look under the hood yourself, see Section 7
of this manual. Follow the warnings under the Cool-
ing System Pressure Cap paragraph.
24. Transmission Temperature Indicator — If Equipped
This light indicates that the transmission fluid
temperature is running hot. This may occur
with severe usage, such as trailer towing. If this
light turns on, safely pull over and stop the
vehicle. Then, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and
run the engine at idle or faster until the light turns off.
216 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CAUTION!
Continuous driving with the Transmission Tempera-
ture Indicator illuminated will eventually cause se-
vere transmission damage or transmission failure.
WARNING!
In some circumstances a Transmission Temperature
Indicator, under continued operation, could cause the
fluid to boil over, come in contact with hot engine or
exhaust components and cause a fire.
25. Odometer / Trip Odometer / ECO (Fuel Saver
Indicator) Button
Changing the Display
Press this button to change the display from odometer to
either of the two trip odometer settings or the “ECO”
display. Trip A or Trip B will appear when in the trip
odometer mode. On vehicles equipped with a Base
Cluster, press and release it once again to display the
outside temperature. On vehicles equipped with a Mid
Line Cluster, press and release it once again to display the
outside temperature and compass heading in the screen
below the speedometer. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle In-
formation Center (EVIC) — If Equipped” for details.
Resetting the Trip Odometer
Display the trip mileage that you want to reset, “Trip A”
or “Trip B.” Then push and hold the button (approxi-
mately two seconds) until the display resets to 0. The
odometer must be in Trip Mode to reset the trip odom-
eter.
26. 4WD Indicator — Vehicles Equipped with
Selec-Trac威II
This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in
the full-time four-wheel drive auto mode. In
this mode, the system operates with a normal
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 217
torque split of 42% front axle and 58% rear axle. It can
redirect up to 100% of torque to the front or rear axle, if
necessary.
27. Odometer/Trip Odometer
The odometer shows the total distance the vehicle has
been driven. The trip odometer shows individual trip
mileage. Refer to “Trip Odometer button” for additional
information.
NOTE: U.S. Federal regulations require that upon trans-
fer of vehicle ownership, the seller certify to the pur-
chaser the correct mileage that the vehicle has been
driven. If your odometer needs to be repaired or serviced,
the repair technician should leave the odometer reading
the same as it was before the repair or service. If s/he
cannot do so, then the odometer must be set at zero, and
a sticker must be placed in the door jamb stating what the
mileage was before the repair or service. It is a good idea
for you to make a record of the odometer reading before
the repair/service, so that you can be sure that it is
properly reset, or that the door jamb sticker is accurate if
the odometer must be reset at zero.
Vehicle Odometer Messages
When the appropriate conditions exist, the following
messages will display in the odometer:
ECO ......................Fuel Saver Indicator
ECO-ON ................Fuel Saver Indicator On
door .............................Door Ajar
gATE ........................... Liftgate Ajar
gLASS ......................Flipper Glass Ajar
LoW tirE.....................LowTirePressure
gASCAP .......................Fuel Cap Fault
noFUSE ..........................Fuse Fault
CHAngE OIL ...............OilChange Required
218 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
On vehicles equipped with a Premium Instrument Clus-
ter, this display shows the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC) messages when the appropriate conditions
exist. Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) in this section for more information.
ECO / ECO-ON (Fuel Saver Indicator) — If Equipped
The ECO-ON indicator will illuminate when you are
driving in a fuel efficient manner and can be used to
modify driving habits in order to increase fuel economy.
The ECO display will toggle between ECO and ECO-ON
depending on driving habits and vehicle usage. Press the
Odometer / Trip Odometer / ECO (Fuel Saver Indicator)
button to change the display from odometer to either of
the two trip odometer settings or the “ECO” display.
LoW tirE
When the appropriate condition exists, the odometer
display will toggle between LoW and tirE for three
cycles.
gASCAP Message
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel
filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, the
words “gASCAP” will display in the odometer display
area. If this occurs, tighten the fuel filler cap properly and
press the odometer reset button to turn off the message.
If the problem continues, the message will appear the
next time the vehicle is started.
A loose, improperly installed, or damaged fuel filler cap
may also turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL).
noFUSE
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the
Ignition Off Draw (IOD) fuse is improperly installed, or
damaged, a “noFUSE” message will display in the odom-
eter display area. For more information on fuses and fuse
locations refer to “Fuses” in Section 7.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 219
CHAngE OIL Message (Base And Mid Line Clusters
Only)
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
indicator system. The “CHANgE OIL” message will flash
in the instrument cluster odometer for approximately
12 seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate
the next scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil
change indicator system is duty cycle based, which
means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate
dependent upon your personal driving style.
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
time you turn the ignition switch to the ON position. To
turn off the message temporarily, press and release the
Trip Odometer button on the instrument cluster. To reset
the oil change indicator system (after performing the
scheduled maintenance) perform the following proce-
dure:
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. Do not
start the engine.
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three
times within 10 seconds.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position.
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
28. Cruise Indicator — If Equipped
This indicator lights when the electronic speed
control system is turned on.
29. Shift Lever Indicator
The Shift Lever Indicator is self-contained within the
instrument cluster. It displays the gear position of the
automatic transmission.
220 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
30. Seat Belt Reminder Light
This light will turn on for several seconds after the
ignition is turned ON as a reminder to “buckle
up.” This light will remain on as long as the seat
belt remains unbuckled.
31. Brake Warning Light
This light monitors various brake functions,
including brake fluid level and parking brake
application. If the brake light turns on, it may
indicate that the parking brake is applied, that
the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with
the anti-lock brake system reservoir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been
disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the
master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake
hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the
Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Program (ESP) sys-
tem. In this case, the light will remain on until the
condition has been corrected. If the problem is related to
the brake booster, the ABS pump will run when applying
the brake and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during
each stop.
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac-
ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic
system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is
indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on
when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
dropped below a specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level condi-
tions. The vehicle should have service performed, and
the brake fluid level checked.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 221
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is neces-
sary.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed.
It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have
an accident. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS), are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force
Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the
Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS
Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by
turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the
ON position. The light should illuminate for approxi-
mately two seconds. The light should then turn off unless
the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected.
If the light does not illuminate, have the light inspected
by an authorized dealer.
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
applied with the ignition switch in the ON position.
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
32. Vehicle Security Light — If Equipped
This light will flash rapidly for approximately
16 seconds when the vehicle security system is
arming and then flash slowly when the system
is armed. The light will also turn on for about
three seconds when the ignition is first turned ON.
33. Airbag Warning Light
This light turns on and remains on for six to
eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition
switch is first turned ON. If the light does not
222 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
turn on during starting, stays on, or turns on while
driving, have the system checked by an authorized
dealer.
34. Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) /
Compass Display — If Equipped
On vehicles equipped with a Premium Cluster, this
display shows the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) messages when the appropriate conditions exist.
Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) —
If Equipped” in this Section for more information.
On vehicles equipped with a Mid Line Cluster, this
display shows the compass heading (N, S, E, W, NE, NW,
SE, and SW) and the outside temperature.
ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER
(EVIC) — IF EQUIPPED
The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) fea-
tures a driver-interactive display that is located in the
instrument cluster.
This system conveniently allows the driver to select a
variety of useful information by pressing the switches
mounted on the steering wheel. The EVIC consists of the
following:
•
System Status
•
Vehicle information warning message displays
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 223
•
Tire Pressure Monitor System (if equipped)
•
Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)
•
Compass display
•
Outside temperature display
•
Trip computer functions
•
Navigation system screens (if equipped)
•
Audio mode display
The system allows the driver to select information by
pressing the following buttons mounted on the steering
wheel:
Press and release the MENU button and the
mode displayed will change between Trip
Functions, Navigation (if equipped), System
Status, Personal Settings.
Press the SCROLL button to scroll through Trip
Functions, Navigation (if equipped), System
Status Messages, and Personal Settings
(Customer-Programmable Features).
Press and release the COMPASS/
TEMPERATURE button to display one of eight
compass readings and the outside temperature.
Press the FUNCTION SELECT button to accept
a selection.
MENU
Button
SCROLL
Button
FUNCTION
SELECT
Button
224 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Displays
When the appropriate conditions exist, the EVIC displays
the following messages.
•
Turn Signal On (with a continuous warning chime)
•
Left Front Turn Signal Light Out (with a single chime)
•
Left Rear Turn Signal Light Out (with a single chime)
•
Right Front Turn Signal Light Out (with a single
chime)
•
Right Rear Turn Signal Light Out (with a single chime)
•
RKE Battery Low (with a single chime)
•
Memory #1/#2 Profile Set
•
Memory #1/#2 Profile Recall
•
Memory System Disabled – Vehicle Not in Park (with
a single chime) — automatic transmission
•
Memory System Disabled – Vehicle in Motion (with a
single chime) — manual transmission
•
Memory System Disabled – Seat Belt Buckled (with a
single chime)
•
Personal Settings Not Available – Vehicle Not in Park
— automatic transmission
•
Personal Settings Not Available – Vehicle in Motion —
manual transmission
•
Left/Right Front Door Ajar (one or more, with a single
chime if speed is above 1 mph (1.6 km/h))
•
Left/Right Rear Door Ajar (one or more, with a single
chime if speed is above 1 mph(1.6 km/h))
•
Door(s) Ajar (with a single chime if vehicle is in
motion)
•
Liftgate Ajar (with a single chime)
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 225
•
Left Front Low Pressure (with a single chime). Refer to
“Tire Pressure Monitoring System” in Section 5 of this
manual.
•
Left Rear Low Pressure (with a single chime). Refer to
“Tire Pressure Monitoring System” in Section 5 of this
manual.
•
Right Front Low Pressure (with a single chime). Refer
to “Tire Pressure Monitoring System” in Section 5 of
this manual.
•
Right Rear Low Pressure (with a single chime). Refer
to “Tire Pressure Monitoring System” in Section 5 of
this manual.
•
Check TPM System (with a single chime). Refer to
“Tire Pressure Monitoring System” in Section 5 of this
manual.
•
Check Gascap (refer to “Adding Fuel” in Section 5 of
this manual for more details)
•
Service Park Assist System (with a single chime)
•
Oil Change Required (with a single chime)
•
ECO (Fuel Saver Indicator) — if equipped
Oil Change Required
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
indicator system. The “Oil Change Required” message
will flash in the EVIC display for approximately 10 sec-
onds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next
scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change
indicator system is duty cycle based, which means the
engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon
your personal driving style.
226 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
time you turn the ignition switch to the ON position. To
turn off the message temporarily, press and release the
MENU button. To reset the oil change indicator system
(after performing the scheduled maintenance) perform
the following procedure:
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. Do not
start the engine.
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three times
within 10 seconds.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position.
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
Trip Functions
Press and release the MENU button until one of the
following Trip Functions displays in the EVIC:
•
Average Fuel Economy
•
Distance To Empty
•
Elapsed Time
•
Display Units of Measure in
Press the SCROLL button to cycle through all the Trip
Computer functions.
The Trip Functions mode displays the following information:
•
Average Fuel Economy
Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset. When
the fuel economy is reset, the display will read “RESET” or
show dashes for two seconds. Then, the history informa-
tion will be erased, and the averaging will continue from
the last fuel average reading before the reset.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 227
•
Distance To Empty (DTE)
Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with
the fuel remaining in the tank. This estimated distance is
determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous
and average fuel economy, according to the current fuel
tank level. DTE cannot be reset through the FUNCTION
SELECT button.
NOTE: Significant changes in driving style or vehicle
loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of
the vehicle, regardless of the DTE displayed value.
When the DTE value is less than 30 miles (48 km)
estimated driving distance, the DTE display will change
to a text display of ⬙LOW FUEL.⬙This display will
continue until the vehicle runs out of fuel. Adding a
significant amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the
⬙LOW FUEL⬙text and a new DTE value will display.
•
Elapsed Time
Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset
when the ignition switch is in the ACC position. Elapsed
time will increment when the ignition switch is in the ON
or START position.
•
Display Units of Measure in:
To make your selection, press and release the FUNC-
TION SELECT button until “ENGLISH” or “METRIC”
appears.
To Reset The Display
Reset will only occur while a resettable function is being
displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT
button once to clear the resettable function being dis-
played. To reset all resettable functions, press and release
the FUNCTION SELECT button a second time within
three seconds of resetting the currently displayed func-
tion (reset ALL will display during this three-second
window).
228 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Compass Display / ECO (Fuel Saver Mode) — If
Equipped
The compass readings indicate the direction
the vehicle is facing. Press and release the
COMPASS button to display one of eight com-
pass readings and the outside temperature.
ECO (Fuel Saver Mode) — If Equipped
The ECO message will display below the outside tem-
perature in the EVIC display. This message will appear
whenever you are driving in a fuel efficient manner.
This feature allows you to monitor when you are driving
in a fuel efficient manner, and it can be used to modify
driving habits in order to increase fuel economy.
Automatic Compass Calibration
This compass is self-calibrating, which eliminates the
need to set the compass manually. When the vehicle is
new, the compass may appear erratic and the EVIC will
display “CAL” until the compass is calibrated. You may
also calibrate the compass by completing one or more
360–degree turns (in an area free from large metal or
metallic objects) until the “CAL” message displayed in
the EVIC turns off. The compass will now function
normally.
NOTE: A good calibration requires a level surface and
an environment free from large metallic objects such as
buildings, bridges, underground cables, railroad tracks,
etc.
Manual Compass Calibration
If the compass appears erratic and the “CAL” indicator
does not appear in the EVIC display, you must put the
compass into the Calibration Mode manually as follows:
1. Start the engine. Leave the shift lever in PARK in order
to enter the EVIC Programming Menus.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 229
2. Press the MENU button until the Personal Settings
(Customer-Programmable Features) menu displays in the
EVIC.
3. Press the SCROLL button until “Calibrate Compass”
displays in the EVIC.
4. Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button to
start the calibration. The “CAL” indicator will display in
the EVIC.
5. Complete one or more 360–degree turns (in an area
free from large metal or metallic objects) until the “CAL”
indicator turns off. The compass will now function
normally.
Compass Variance
Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic
North and Geographic North. To compensate for the
differences, the variance should be set for the zone where
the vehicle is driven, per the zone map. Once properly
set, the compass will automatically compensate for the
differences and provide the most accurate compass head-
ing.
NOTE: Magnetic materials should be kept away from
the top of the right rear quarter window. This is where
the compass sensor is located.
Compass Variance Map
230 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
1. Turn the ignition switch ON.
2. Press and hold the COMPASS button for approxi-
mately two seconds.
3. Press the SCROLL button until “Compass Variance”
message and the last variance zone number displays in
the EVIC.
4. Press and release FUNCTION SELECT button until
the proper variance zone is selected according to the
map.
5. Press and release the COMPASS button to exit.
Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable
Features)
Personal Settings allows the driver to set and recall
features when the vehicle speed is at 0 mph (0 km/h)
(manual transmission) or when the shift lever is in PARK
(auto transmission).
Press and release the MENU button until Personal Set-
tings displays in the EVIC.
Use the SCROLL button to display one of the following
choices:
Language
When in this display you may select one of five lan-
guages for all display nomenclature, including the trip
functions and the navigation system (if equipped). Press
the FUNCTION SELECT button while in this display to
select English, Espanol, Deutsch, Italiano, or Francais.
Then, as you continue, the information will display in the
selected language.
Lock Doors Automatically at 15 mph (24 km/h)
When on is selected, all doors will lock automatically
when the vehicle reaches a speed of 15 mph (24 km/h).
To make your selection, press and release the FUNC-
TION SELECT button until “On” or “Off” appears.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 231
Unlock Doors Automatically on Exit
When ON is selected, all doors will unlock when the
vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the PARK or
NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is opened. To
make your selection, press and release the FUNCTION
SELECT button until “On” or “Off” appears.
Remote Key Unlock
When Driver Door 1st Press is selected, only the driver’s
door will unlock on the first press of the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter UNLOCK button. When Driver
Door 1st Press is selected, you must press the RKE
transmitter UNLOCK button twice to unlock the passen-
ger’s doors. When All Doors 1st Press is selected, all of
the doors will unlock on the first press of the RKE
transmitter UNLOCK button. To make your selection,
press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until
“Driver Door 1st Press” or “All Doors 1st Press” appears.
Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock — If
Equipped
When on is selected, you can use your RKE transmitter to
recall one of two pre-programmed memory profiles. Each
memory profile contains desired position settings for the
driver seat, side mirror, adjustable pedals (if equipped),
power tilt and telescopic steering column (if equipped),
and a set of desired radio station presets. When OFF is
selected, only the memory switch on the driver’s door
panel will recall memory profiles. To make your selec-
tion, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button
until “ON” or “OFF” appears. Refer to “Driver Memory
Seat” in Section 3 of this manual for more information.
Sound Horn with Remote Key Lock
When on is selected, a short horn sound will occur when
the RKE transmitter LOCK button is pressed. This feature
may be selected with or without the Flash Lights with
232 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Remote Key Lock feature. To make your selection, press
and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until “On”
or “Off” appears.
Automatically Move Seat Back on Exit — If
Equipped
This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to
enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the
vehicle. To make your selection, press and release the
FUNCTION SELECT button until “On” or “Off” appears.
NOTE: The seat will return to the memorized seat
location (if Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock is set
to ON) when the RKE transmitter is used to unlock the
door. Refer to “Easy Entry/Exit Seat” under “Driver
Memory Seat” in Section 3 of this manual for more
information.
Flash Lights with Remote Key Lock
When on is selected, the front and rear turn signals will
flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the
RKE transmitter. This feature may be selected with or
without the sound horn on lock feature selected. To make
your selection, press and release the FUNCTION SE-
LECT button until “On” or “Off” appears.
Headlights On with Wipers (Available with Auto
Headlights Only)
When on is selected, and the headlight switch is in the
AUTO position, the headlights will turn on approxi-
mately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on. If the
headlights were turned on by this feature they will also
turn off when the wipers are turned off. To make your
selection, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT
button until “On” or “Off” appears.
NOTE: Turning the headlights on during the daytime
causes the instrument panel lights to dim. To increase the
brightness, refer to “Lights” in Section 3 of this manual.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 233
Delay Turning Headlights Off
When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to
have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds
when exiting the vehicle. To make your selection, press
and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until “0,”
“30,” “60,” or “90” appears.
Turn Headlights On with Remote Key Unlock
When this feature is selected, the headlights will activate
and remain on for up to 90 seconds when the doors are
unlocked with the RKE transmitter. To make your selec-
tion, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button
until “Off,” “30 sec.,” “60 sec.,” or “90 sec.” appears.
Delay Power Off to Accessories Until Exit
When this feature is selected, the power window
switches, radio, hands–free system (if equipped), DVD
video system (if equipped), power sunroof (if equipped),
and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes
after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position.
Opening a vehicle door will cancel this feature. To make
your selection, press and release the FUNCTION SE-
LECT button until “Off,” “45 sec.,” “5 min.,” or “10 min.”
appears.
Illumination Approach
When this feature is selected, the headlights will activate
and remain on for up to 90 seconds when the doors are
unlocked with the RKE transmitter. To make your selec-
tion, press and hold the RESET button until “Off,”
“30 sec,” “60 sec,” or “90 sec” appears.
Enable/Disable the Rear Park Assist System
The Rear Park Assist system will scan for objects behind
the vehicle when the transmission is in the REVERSE and
the vehicle speed is less than 11 mph (18 km/h). The
system can be enabled with Sound Only, Sound and
Display, or turned OFF through the EVIC, to make your
selection, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT
234 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
button. Refer to “Rear Park Assist System” in Section 3 of
this manual for system function and operating
information.
Hill Start Assist (HSA) — If Equipped
When on is selected, the HSA system is active. Refer to
“HSA (Hill Start Assist)” under “Electronic Brake Control
System” in Section 5 of this manual for system function
and operating information. To make your selection, press
and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until “On”
or “Off” appears.
Display ECO — If Equipped
The “ECO” message is located in the Compass/
Temperature display, this message can be turned on or
off. To make your selection, press and release the FUNC-
TION SELECT button until “ON” or “OFF” appears.
SALES CODE REQ — AM/FM STEREO RADIO
AND 6–DISC CD/DVD CHANGER (MP3/WMA AUX
JACK)
NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right
side of the radio faceplate.
REQ Radio
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 235
Operating Instructions - Radio Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the
radio. Press the ON/VOLUME control knob a second
time to turn off the radio.
Electronic Volume Control
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
degrees) in either direction without stopping. Turning the
ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the
volume and to the left decreases it.
When the audio system is turned ON, the sound will be
set at the same volume level as last played.
SEEK Buttons
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch
to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio
will remain tuned to the new station until you make
another selection. Holding either button will bypass
stations without stopping until you release it.
SCAN Button
Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for
the next listenable station in AM, FM or Satellite (if
equipped) frequencies, pausing for five seconds at each
listenable station before continuing to the next. To stop
the search, press the SCAN button a second time.
Voice Recognition Button uconnect™ phone — If
Equipped
Press this button to operate the uconnect™ phone feature
(if equipped). Refer to “uconnect™ phone” in Section 3.
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With
uconnect” message will display on the radio screen.
236 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Phone Button uconnect™ phone — If Equipped
Press this button to operate the uconnect™ phone feature
(if equipped). Refer to “uconnect™ phone” in Section 3.
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With
uconnect” message will display on the radio screen.
TIME Button
Press the TIME button to alternate locations of the time
and frequency display.
Clock Setting Procedure
1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink.
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob.
3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes
will begin to blink.
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to save the time change.
5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait five seconds.
The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button
and selecting the “SET HOME CLOCK” entry. Once in
this display follow the above procedure, starting at
step 2.
INFO Button
Press the INFO button for an RDS station (one with call
letters displayed). The radio will return a Radio Text
message broadcast from an FM station (FM mode only).
RW/FF
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the
direction of the arrows. This feature operates in AM, FM
or Satellite (if equipped) frequencies.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 237
TUNE Control
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise
to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency.
Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS
will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to
the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second
time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
mid-range tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third
time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
treble tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth
time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the
sound level from the right or left side speakers.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time
and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between
the front and rear speakers.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to
exit setting tone, balance, and fade.
MUSIC TYPE Button
Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type
mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button
or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five
seconds will allow the program format type to be se-
lected. Many radio stations do not currently broadcast
Music Type information.
238 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following
format types:
Program Type 16-Digit Character Dis-
play
No program type or un-
defined None
Adult Hits Adlt Hit
Classical Classicl
Classic Rock Cls Rock
College College
Country Country
Foreign Language Language
Information Inform
Jazz Jazz
News News
Nostalgia Nostalga
Oldies Oldies
Program Type 16-Digit Character Dis-
play
Personality Persnlty
Public Public
Rhythm and Blues R & B
Religious Music Rel Musc
Religious Talk Rel Talk
Rock Rock
Soft Soft
Soft Rock Soft Rck
Soft Rhythm and Blues Soft R & B
Sports Sports
Talk Talk
Top 40 Top 40
Weather Weather
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 239
By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon is
displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency
station with the same selected Music Type name. The
Music Type function only operates when in the FM mode.
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be
exited and the radio will tune to the preset station.
SETUP Button
Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between
the following items:
NOTE: Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to scroll
through the entries. Push the AUDIO/SELECT button to
select an entry and make changes.
•
DVD Enter - When the disc is in DVD Menu mode,
selecting DVD Enter will allow you to play the current
highlighted selection. Use the remote control to scroll
up and down the menu (if equipped).
•
DISC Play/Pause - You can toggle between
playing the DVD and pausing the DVD by
pushing the SELECT button (if equipped).
•
DVD Play Options - Selecting the DVD Play Options
will display the following:
•
Subtitle – Repeatedly pressing SELECT will switch
subtitles to different subtitle languages that are
available on the disc (if equipped).
•
Audio Stream – Repeatedly pressing SELECT will
switch to different audio languages (if supported on
the disc) (if equipped).
•
Angle – Repeatedly pressing SELECT will change
the viewing angle if supported by the DVD disc (if
equipped).
240 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE:
•
The available selections for each of the above entries
varies depending upon the disc.
•
These selections can only be made while playing a
DVD.
•
VES™ Power - Allows you to turn VES™ ON and
OFF (if equipped).
•
VES™ Lock - Locks out rear VES™ remote controls (if
equipped).
•
VES™ CH1/CH2 - Allows the user to change the
mode of either the IR1 or IR2 wireless headphones by
pressing the AUDIO/SELECT button (if equipped).
•
Set Home Clock - Pressing the SELECT button allows
you to set the clock. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to adjust the hours and then press and turn the
TUNE/SCROLL control knob to adjust the minutes.
Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to save
changes.
•
Player Defaults - Selecting this item will allow the
user to scroll through the following items and set
defaults according to customer preference.
Menu Language — If Equipped
Selecting this item will allow the user to choose the
default startup DVD menu language (effective only if
language supported by disc). If you want to select a
language not listed, then scroll down and select ⬙other.⬙
Enter the four-digit country code using the TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down to select the
number and then push to select.
Audio Language — If Equipped
Selecting this item allows you to choose a default audio
language (effective only if the language is supported by
the disc). You can select a language not listed by scrolling
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 241
down and selecting ⬙other.⬙Enter the country code using
the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down
to select the number and then push to select.
Subtitle Language — If Equipped
Selecting this item allows you to choose a default subtitle
language (effective only if the language is supported by
the disc). You can select a language not listed by scrolling
down and selecting ⬙other.⬙Enter the country code using
the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down
to select the number and then push to select.
Subtitles — If Equipped
Selecting this item allows you to choose between subtitle
Off or On.
Audio DRC — If Equipped
Selecting this item allows you to limit maximum audio
dynamic range. The default is set to ⬙High,⬙and under
this setting, dialogues will play at 11 db higher than if the
setting is ⬙Normal.⬙
Aspect Ratio — If Equipped
Selecting this item allows you to choose between wide
screen, pan scan, and letter box.
AutoPlay — If Equipped
When this is set to On and a DVD video is inserted, it will
bypass the DVD menu screen and automatically play the
movie. In some rare cases, the DVD player may not
auto-play the main title. In such cases, use the MENU
button on the remote control to select desired title to play.
NOTE: The user will have to set these defaults before
loading a disc. If changes are made to these settings after
a disc is loaded, changes will not be effective. Also, the
defaults are effective only if the disc supports the
customer-preferred settings.
AM and FM Buttons
Press the buttons to select AM or FM mode.
242 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SET Button — To Set the Pushbutton Memory
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET button.
The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window.
Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this station
and press and release that button. If a button is not
selected within five seconds after pressing the SET but-
ton, the station will continue to play but will not be
stored into pushbutton memory.
You may add a second station to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display
window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in
both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM, 12 FM,
and 12 Satellite (if equipped) stations to be stored into
pushbutton memory. The stations stored in SET 2
memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton
twice.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
button number will display.
Buttons1-6
These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you
commit to pushbutton memory {12 AM, 12 FM, and 12
Satellite (if equipped) stations}.
DISC Button
Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from
AM/FM modes to Disc modes.
Operation Instructions - (DISC MODE for CD and
MP3/WMA Audio Play, DVD-VIDEO)
The radio DVD player and many DVD discs are coded by
geographic region. These region codes must match in
order for the disc to play. If the region code for the DVD
disc does not match the region code for the radio DVD
player, it will not play the disc. Customers may take their
vehicle to an authorized dealer to change the region code
of the player a maximum of five times.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 243
CAUTION!
The radio may shut down during extremely hot
conditions. When this occurs, the radio will indicate
“Disc Hot” and shut off until a safe temperature is
reached. This shutdown is necessary to protect the
optics of the DVD player and other radio internal
components.
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
LOAD Button — Loading Compact Disc(s)
Press the LOAD button and the pushbutton with the
corresponding number (1-6) where the CD is being
loaded. The radio will display PLEASE WAIT and
prompt when to INSERT DISC. After the radio displays
⬙INSERT DISC,⬙insert the CD into the player.
Radio display will show ⬙LOADING DISC⬙when the disc
is loading and “READING DISC” when the radio is
reading the disc.
CAUTION!
This CD player will accept 4–3/4 in (12 cm) discs only.
The use of other sized discs may damage the CD
player mechanism.
Eject Button — Ejecting Compact Disc(s)
Press the EJECT button and the pushbutton
with the corresponding number (1-6) where the
CD was loaded and the disc will unload and
move to the entrance for easy removal. Radio
display will show ⬙EJECTING DISC⬙when the disc is
being ejected and prompt the user to remove the disc.
Press and hold the EJECT button for five seconds and all
CDs will be ejected from the radio.
244 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
SEEK Button (CD MODE)
Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the
CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning
of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the
previous selection if the CD is within the first second of
the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK
button will allow you to scroll through the tracks faster in
CD and MP3/MWA modes.
SCAN Button (CD MODE)
Press the SCAN button to scan through each track on the
CD currently playing.
TIME Button (CD MODE)
Press this button to change the display from a large CD
playing time display to a small CD playing time display.
RW/FF (CD MODE)
Press and hold FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will
begin to fast forward until FF is released, or RW or
another CD button is pressed. The RW (Rewind) button
works in a similar manner.
AM or FM Button (CD MODE)
Switches the radio into the AM or FM radio mode.
Notes On Playing MP3/WMA Files
The radio can play MP3/WMA files; however, acceptable
MP3/WMA file recording media and formats are limited.
When writing MP3/WMA files, pay attention to the
following restrictions.
Supported Media (Disc Types)
The MP3/WMA file recording media supported by the
radio are CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3,WMA, DVD Video,
DVD-R, DVD-RW, DVD+R, DVD+RW, and CDDA+MP3.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 245
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
When reading discs recorded using formats other than
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
files properly and may be unable to play the file nor-
mally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
•
Maximum number of directory levels: 8
•
Maximum number of files: 255
•
Maximum number of folders: 100
•
Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
•
Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙and a three-
character extension)
•
Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙.⬙and a three-
character extension)
Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3/
WMA files). Discs created with an option such as ⬙keep
disc open after writing⬙are most likely multisession
discs. The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3/
WMA playback may result in longer disc loading times.
If a disc contains multi-formats, such as CD audio and
MP3/WMA tracks, the radio will only play the MP3/
WMA tracks on that disc.
Supported MP3/WMA File Formats
The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3/WMA
extension as MP3/WMA files. Non-MP3/WMA files
named with the *.MP3/WMA extension may cause play-
back problems. The radio is designed to recognize the file
as an invalid MP3/WMA and will not play the file.
246 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
When using the MP3/WMA encoder to compress audio
data to an MP3/WMA file, the bit rate and sampling
frequencies in the following table are supported. In
addition, variable bit rates (VBR) are also supported. The
majority of MP3/WMA files use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate
and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or VBR bit rates.
MPEG
Specification
Sampling
Frequency (kHz) Bit Rate (kbps)
MPEG-1 Audio
Layer 3 48, 44.1, 32
320, 256, 224,
192, 160, 128,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48
MPEG-2 Audio
Layer 3 24, 22.05, 16
160, 128, 144,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48
WMA
Specification
Sampling
Frequency (kHz) Bit Rate (kbps)
WMA 44.1 and 48 48, 64, 96, 128,
160, 192 VBR
ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title
are supported for ID3 version 1 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
supported by the radios.
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not
supported.
Playback of MP3/WMA Files
When a medium containing MP3/WMA data is loaded,
the radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more
time to start playing the MP3/WMA files.
Loading times for playback of MP3/WMA files may be
affected by the following:
•
Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
CD-R media
•
Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer
to load than non-multisession discs
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 247
•
Number of files and folders - Loading times will
increase with more files and folders
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option
before writing to the disc.
LIST Button (DISC Mode for MP3/WMA Play)
Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders
on the disc. Scrolling up or down the list is done by
turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob. Selecting a
folder by pressing the TUNE/SCROLL control knob will
begin playing the files contained in that folder (or the
next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain
playable files).
The folder list will time out after five seconds.
INFO Button (DISC Mode for MP3/WMA Play)
Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through
the following TAG information: Song Title, Artist, File
Name, and Folder Name (if available).
Press the INFO button once more to return to ⬙elapsed
time⬙priority mode.
Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or
more and radio will display song titles for each file.
Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds
to return to ⬙elapsed time⬙display.
Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode
The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack which
allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an
MP3/WMA player, cassette player, or microphone and
utilize the vehicle’s audio system to amplify the source
and play through the vehicle speakers.
248 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxil-
iary device if the AUX jack is connected.
NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the
device’s volume set to the proper level. If the AUX audio
is not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the
AUX audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume
down.
SEEK Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
SCAN Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
EJECT Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)
Press the TIME button to change the display from
elapsed playing time to time of day. The time of day will
display for five seconds.
RW/FF (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
SET Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
Operating Instructions — Voice Recognition
System (VR) (If Equipped)
For the radio, refer to “Voice Recognition System (VR)” in
Section 3.
For uconnect™ “Voice Recognition System (VR),” refer to
“uconnect™ phone” in Section 3.
Operating Instructions - uconnect™ phone (If
Equipped)
Refer to “uconnect™ phone” in Section 3.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 249
Operating Instructions - uconnect™ studios
(Satellite Radio) (If Equipped)
Refer to “uconnect™ studios (Satellite Radio)” in this
section.
Operating Instructions - Video Entertainment
System (VES)™ (If Equipped)
Refer to separate “Video Entertainment System (VES)™
Guide.”
Dolby威
Manufactured under license from Dolby威Laboratories.
⬙Dolby威⬙ and the double-D symbol are trademarks of
Dolby威Laboratories.
Macrovision
This product incorporates copyright protection technol-
ogy that is protected by U.S. patents and other intellec-
tual property rights. Use of this copyright protection
technology must be authorized by Macrovision, and is
intended for home and other limited viewing uses only,
unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision. Reverse
engineering or disassembly is prohibited.
DTS™
⬙DTS™⬙and ⬙DTS™ 2.0⬙are trademarks of Digital The-
ater Systems, Inc.
SALES CODE (RER/REN) — AM/FM/CD/DVD
RADIO – IF EQUIPPED
NOTE: The sales code is located on the lower right side
of the unit’s faceplate.
The REN and RER radios contain a CD/DVD player, USB
port, and a 30-gigabyte hard drive (HDD). Sirius Satellite
Radio is optional. The 6.5 in (16.5 cm) touch screen allows
for easy menu selection.
The RER radio also contains a Global Positioning System
(GPS)-based Navigation system.
250 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Refer to your uconnect™ tunes (REN) or (RER) user’s
manual for detailed operating instructions.
Operating Instructions — Voice Recognition
System (VR) — If Equipped
For the radio, refer to “Voice Recognition System (VR)” in
Section 3.
Operating Instructions — uconnect™ phone — If
Equipped
Refer to “uconnect™ phone” in Section 3.
Clock Setting Procedure
uconnect™ gps — RER only
The GPS receiver used in this system is synchronized to
the time data being transmitted by the GPS satellite. The
satellite clock is Greenwich Mean Time (GMT). This is the
worldwide standard for time. This makes the system’s
clock very accurate once the appropriate time zone and
daylight savings information is set.
To Manually Set the Clock — RER/REN
1. Turn on the radio.
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed.
3. Touch the screen where “User Clock” is displayed. The
clock setting menu will appear on the screen.
4. To move the hour forward, touch the screen where the
word “Hour” with the arrow pointing upward is dis-
played. To move the hour backward, touch the screen
where the word “Hour” with the arrow pointing down-
ward is displayed.
5. To move the minute forward, touch the screen where
the word “Min” with the arrow pointing upward is
displayed. To move the minute backward, touch the
screen where the word “Min” with the arrow pointing
downward is displayed.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 251
6. To save the new time setting, touch the screen where
the word “Save” is displayed.
Changing Daylight Savings Time
When selected, this feature will display the time of day in
daylight savings time. Proceed as follows to change the
current setting:
1. Turn on the radio.
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed. The
clock setting menu will appear on the screen.
3. When this feature is on, a check mark will appear in
the box next to the words “Daylight Savings.” Touch the
screen where the words “Daylight Savings” are dis-
played to change the current setting.
Show Time if Radio is Off
When selected, this feature will display the time of day
on the touch screen when the radio is turned off. Proceed
as follows to change the current setting:
1. Turn on the radio.
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed. The
clock setting menu will appear on the screen.
3. When this feature is on, a check mark will appear in
the box next to the words “Show Time if Radio is Off.”
Touch the screen where the words “Show Time if Radio is
Off” are displayed to change the current setting.
Changing the Time Zone
1. Turn on the radio.
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed. The
clock setting menu will appear on the screen.
252 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
3. Touch the screen where the words “Set Time Zone” are
displayed. The time zone selection menu will appear on
the screen.
4. Select a time zone by touching the screen where your
selection appears. If you do not see a time zone that you
want to select, touch the screen where the word “Page” is
displayed to view additional time zones in the menu.
5. Touch the screen where the word “Save” is displayed.
SALES CODE RES — AM/FM STEREO RADIO
WITH CD PLAYER (MP3 AUX JACK)
NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right
side of the radio faceplate.
Operating Instructions — Radio Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
RES Radio
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 253
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the
radio. Push the ON/VOLUME control knob a second
time to turn off the radio.
Electronic Volume Control
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
degrees) in either direction, without stopping. Turning
the ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the
volume, and to the left decreases it.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be
set at the same volume level as last played.
SEEK Buttons
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch
to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio
will remain tuned to the new station until you make
another selection. Holding either button will bypass
stations without stopping, until you release it.
TIME Button
Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time
and radio frequency.
Clock Setting Procedure
1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink.
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob.
3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes
will begin to blink.
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to save time change.
5. To exit, press any button/knob, or wait five seconds.
254 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
RW/FF
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the
direction of the arrows. This feature operates in either
AM or FM frequencies.
TUNE Control
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise
to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency.
Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS
will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to
the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second
time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
mid-range tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third
time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
treble tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth
time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the
sound level from the right or left side speakers.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time
and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between
the front and rear speakers.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to
exit setting tone, balance, and fade.
AM/FM Button
Press the buttons to select either AM or FM mode.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 255
SET/RND Button — To Set the Pushbutton
Memory
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET/RND
button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display
window. Select the button (1 to 6) you wish to lock onto
this station and press and release that button. If a button
is not selected within five seconds after pressing the
SET/RND button, the station will continue to play but
will not be stored into pushbutton memory.
You may add a second station to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET/RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the
display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and
SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM
and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory.
The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by
pressing the pushbutton twice.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
button number will display.
Buttons1-6
These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you
commit to pushbutton memory (12 AM and 12 FM
stations).
DISC Button
Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from
AM/FM modes to Disc modes.
Operation Instructions — CD MODE For CD And
MP3 Audio Play
NOTE:
•
The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
256 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
•
This radio is capable of playing compact discs (CD),
recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact
discs (CD-RW), compact discs with MP3 tracks and
multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.
Inserting Compact Disc(s)
Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD
label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into
the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the
radio display. If a CD does not go into the slot more than
1.0 in (2.5 cm), a disc may already be loaded and must be
ejected before a new disc can be loaded.
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio
ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and
begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will
show the track number, and index time in minutes and
seconds. Play will begin at the start of track 1.
CAUTION!
•
This CD player will accept 4-3/4 in (12 cm) discs
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the
CD player mechanism.
•
Do not use adhesive labels. These labels can peel
away and jam the player mechanism.
•
RES is a single CD player. Do not attempt to insert
a second CD if one is already loaded.
•
Dual-media disc types (one side is a DVD, the
other side is a CD) should not be used, and they
can cause damage to the player.
EJECT Button - Ejecting a CD
Press the EJECT button to eject the CD.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 257
If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within
10 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,
the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it.
A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
NOTE: Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on
convertible or soft-top models (if equipped).
SEEK Button
Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the
CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning
of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the
previous selection if the CD is within the first second of
the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK
button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in
CD and MP3 modes.
TIME Button
Press this button to change the display from a large CD
playing time display to a small CD playing time display.
RW/FF
Press and hold the FF (Fast Forward) button and the CD
player will begin to fast forward until FF is released, or
RW or another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse)
button works in a similar manner.
AM/FM Button
Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.
SET/RND Button (Random Play Button)
Press this button while the CD is playing to activate
Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the
compact disc in random order to provide an interesting
change of pace.
Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ran-
domly selected track.
Press the RND button a second time to stop Random
Play.
258 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Notes on Playing MP3 Files
The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3
file recording media and formats are limited. When
writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restric-
tions.
Supported Media (Disc Types)
The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are
CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, and CDDA+MP3.
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
When reading discs recorded using formats other than
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
files properly and may be unable to play the file nor-
mally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
•
Maximum number of folder levels: 8
•
Maximum number of files: 255
•
Maximum number of folders. (The radio display of file
names and folder names is limited. For large numbers
of files and/or folders, the radio may be unable to
display the file name and folder name, and will assign
a number instead. With a maximum number of files,
exceeding 20 folders will result in this display. With
200 files, exceeding 50 folders will result in this
display.)
•
Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
•
Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙and a three-
character extension)
•
Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙.⬙and a three-
character extension)
Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 259
Discs created with an option such as ⬙keep disc open after
writing⬙are most likely multisession discs. The use of
multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in
longer disc loading times.
Supported MP3 File Formats
The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 exten-
sion as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3
extension may cause playback problems. The radio is
designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will
not play the file.
When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to
an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the
following table are supported. In addition, variable bit
rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files
use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or
VBR bit rate.
MPEG
Specification
Sampling
Frequency (kHz) Bit Rate (kbps)
MPEG-1 Audio
Layer 3 48, 44.1, 32
320, 256, 224,
192, 160, 128,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32
MPEG-2 Audio
Layer 3 24, 22.05, 16
160, 128, 144,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32, 24,
16, 8
ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title
are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
supported by the radios.
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not
supported.
260 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Playback of MP3 Files
When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the
radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more
time to start playing the MP3 files.
Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected
by the following:
•
Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
CD-R media
•
Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer
to load than non-multisession discs
•
Number of files and folders - Loading times will
increase with more files and folders
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option
before writing to the disc.
Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode
The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack, which
allows the user to plug in a portable device, such as an
MP3 player, or cassette player, and utilize the vehicle’s
audio system to amplify the source and play through the
vehicle speakers.
Pressing the DISC/AUX button will change the mode to
auxiliary device if the AUX jack is connected.
NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the
device’s volume set to proper level. If the AUX audio is
not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the AUX
audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume down.
TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)
Press this button to change the display to time of day. The
time of day will display for five seconds (when ignition is
OFF).
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 261
SALES CODE RES/RSC — AM/FM STEREO
RADIO WITH CD PLAYER (MP3 AUX JACK) AND
SIRIUS RADIO
NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right
side of the radio faceplate.
Operating Instructions — Radio Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the
radio. Push the ON/VOLUME control knob a second
time to turn off the radio.
Electronic Volume Control
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
degrees) in either direction without stopping. Turning the
ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the
volume and to the left decreases it.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be
set at the same volume level as last played.
SEEK Buttons
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch
RES/RSC Radio
262 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio
will remain tuned to the new station until you make
another selection. Holding either button will bypass
stations without stopping until you release it.
Voice Recognition System (Radio) — If Equipped
Refer to “Voice Recognition System (VR)” in Section 3.
Voice Recognition Button uconnect™ phone — If
Equipped
Press this button to operate the uconnect™ phone feature
(if equipped). Refer to “uconnect™ phone” in Section 3.
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With
UConnect” message will display on the radio screen.
Phone Button uconnect™ phone — If Equipped
Press this button to operate the uconnect™ phone feature
(if equipped). Refer to “uconnect™ phone” in Section 3.
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With
UConnect” message will display on the radio screen.
TIME Button
Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time
and radio frequency.
Clock Setting Procedure
1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink.
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob.
3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes
will begin to blink.
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to save time change.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 263
5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait five seconds.
The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button.
For vehicles equipped with satellite radio, press the
SETUP button, use the TUNE/SCROLL control to select
SET CLOCK, and then follow the above procedure,
starting at Step 2. For vehicles not equipped with satellite
radio, press the SETUP button and then follow the above
procedure, starting at Step 2.
INFO Button
Press the INFO button for an RDS station (one with call
letters displayed). The radio will return a Radio Text
message broadcast from an FM station (FM mode only).
RW/FF
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the
direction of the arrows. This feature operates in either
AM or FM frequencies.
TUNE Control
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise
to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency.
Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS
will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to
the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second
time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
mid-range tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third
time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
treble tones.
264 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth
time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the
sound level from the right or left side speakers.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time
and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between
the front and rear speakers.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to
exit setting tone, balance, and fade.
MUSIC TYPE Button
Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type
mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button
or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five
seconds will allow the program format type to be se-
lected. Many radio stations do not currently broadcast
Music Type information.
Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following
format types:
Program Type 16-Digit Character
Display
No program type or un-
defined None
Adult Hits Adlt Hit
Classical Classicl
Classic Rock Cls Rock
College College
Country Country
Foreign Language Language
Information Inform
Jazz Jazz
News News
Nostalgia Nostalga
Oldies Oldies
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 265
Program Type 16-Digit Character
Display
Personality Persnlty
Public Public
Rhythm and Blues R & B
Religious Music Rel Musc
Religious Talk Rel Talk
Rock Rock
Soft Soft
Soft Rock Soft Rck
Soft Rhythm and Blues Soft R&B
Sports Sports
Talk Talk
Top 40 Top 40
Weather Weather
By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon
is displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency
station with the same selected Music Type name. The
Music Type function only operates when in the FM
mode.
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be
exited and the radio will tune to the preset station.
SETUP Button
Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between
the following items:
•
Set Clock — Pressing the SELECT button will allow
you to set the clock. Adjust the hours by turning the
TUNE/SCROLL control knob. After adjusting the
hours, press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to set
the minutes. The minutes will begin to blink. Adjust
the minutes using the right side TUNE/SCROLL
control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob
to save time change.
266 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
AM/FM Button
Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.
SET/RND Button — To Set the Pushbutton
Memory
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET/RND
button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display
window. Select the button (1–6) you wish to lock onto this
station and press and release that button. If a button is
not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET/
RND button, the station will continue to play but will not
be stored into pushbutton memory.
You may add a second station to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET/RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the
display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and
SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM
and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory.
The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by
pressing the pushbutton twice.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
button number will display.
Buttons1-6
These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you
commit to pushbutton memory (12 AM and 12 FM
stations).
DISC/AUX Button
Pressing the DISC/AUX button will allow you to switch
from AM/FM modes to DISC/AUX mode.
Operation Instructions — CD MODE for CD and
MP3 Audio Play
NOTE:
•
The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 267
•
This radio is capable of playing compact discs (CD),
recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact
discs (CD-RW), compact discs with MP3 tracks and
multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.
Inserting Compact Disc(s)
Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD
label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into
the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the
radio display. If a CD does not go into the slot more than
1.0 in (2.5 cm), a disc may already be loaded and must be
ejected before a new disc can be loaded.
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio
ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and
begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will
show the track number, and index time in minutes and
seconds. Play will begin at the start of track 1.
CAUTION!
•
This CD player will accept 4–3/4 in (12 cm) discs
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the
CD player mechanism.
•
Do not use adhesive labels. These labels can peel
away and jam the player mechanism.
•
RES is a single CD player. Do not attempt to insert
a second CD if one is already loaded.
•
Dual-media disc types (one side is a DVD, the
other side is a CD) should not be used, and they
can cause damage to the player.
EJECT Button - Ejecting a CD
Press the EJECT button to eject the CD.
268 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within
10 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,
the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it.
A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
NOTE: Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on
convertible or soft-top models (if equipped).
SEEK Button
Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the
CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning
of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the
previous selection if the CD is within the first second of
the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK
button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in
CD and MP3 modes.
TIME Button
Press this button to change the display from a large CD
playing time display to a small CD playing time display.
RW/FF
Press and hold FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will
begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or
another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse) button
works in a similar manner.
AM/FM Button
Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.
SET/RND Button (Random Play Button)
Press this button while the CD is playing to activate
Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the
compact disc in random order to provide an interesting
change of pace.
Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ran-
domly selected track.
Press the SET/RND button a second time to stop Ran-
dom Play.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 269
Notes On Playing MP3 Files
The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3
file recording media and formats are limited. When
writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restric-
tions.
Supported Media (Disc Types)
The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are
CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, and CDDA+MP3.
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
When reading discs recorded using formats other than
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
files properly and may be unable to play the file nor-
mally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
•
Maximum number of folder levels: 8
•
Maximum number of files: 255
•
Maximum number of folders. (The radio display of file
names and folder names is limited. For large numbers
of files and/or folders, the radio may be unable to
display the file name and folder name and will assign
a number instead. With a maximum number of files,
exceeding 20 folders will result in this display. With
200 files, exceeding 50 folders will result in this
display.)
•
Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
•
Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙and a three-
character extension)
•
Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙.⬙and a three-
character extension)
Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).
270 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Discs created with an option such as ⬙keep disc open after
writing⬙are most likely multisession discs. The use of
multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in
longer disc loading times.
Supported MP3 File Formats
The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 exten-
sion as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3
extension may cause playback problems. The radio is
designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will
not play the file.
When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to
an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the
following table are supported. In addition, variable bit
rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files
use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or
VBR bit rates.
MPEG
Specification
Sampling
Frequency (kHz) Bit Rate (kbps)
MPEG-1 Audio
Layer 3 48, 44.1, 32
320, 256, 224,
192, 160, 128,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32
MPEG-2 Audio
Layer 3 24, 22.05, 16
160, 128, 144,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32, 24,
16, 8
ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title
are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
supported by the radios.
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not
supported.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 271
Playback of MP3 Files
When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the
radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more
time to start playing the MP3 files.
Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected
by the following:
•
Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
CD-R media
•
Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer
to load than non-multisession discs
•
Number of files and folders - Loading times will
increase with more files and folders
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option
before writing to the disc.
LIST Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders
on the disc. Scrolling up or down the list is done by
turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob. Selecting a
folder by pressing the TUNE/SCROLL control knob will
begin playing the files contained in that folder (or the
next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain
playable files).
The folder list will time out after five seconds.
INFO Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through
the following TAG information: Song Title, Artist, File
Name, and Folder Name (if available).
Press the INFO button once more to return to ⬙elapsed
time⬙priority mode.
Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or
more and the radio will display song titles for each file.
272 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds
to return to ⬙elapsed time⬙display.
Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode
The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack which
allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an
MP3 player or cassette player and utilize the vehicle’s
audio system to amplify the source and play through the
vehicle speakers.
Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxil-
iary device if the AUX jack is connected.
NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the
device’s volume set to the proper level. If the AUX audio
is not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the
AUX audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume
down.
TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)
Press this button to change the display to time of day. The
time of day will display for five seconds (when the
ignition is OFF).
Operating Instructions - uconnect™ phone (If
Equipped)
Refer to “uconnect™ phone” in Section 3.
Operating Instructions - uconnect™ studios
(Satellite Radio) (If Equipped)
Refer to “uconnect™ studios (Satellite Radio)” in this
section.
uconnect™ studios (SATELLITE RADIO) — IF
EQUIPPED (REN/REQ/RER/RES/REU RADIOS
ONLY)
Satellite radio uses direct satellite-to-receiver broadcast-
ing technology to provide clear digital sound, coast to
coast. The subscription service provider is Sirius Satellite
Radio. This service offers over 130 channels of music,
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 273
sports, news, entertainment, and programming for chil-
dren, directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios.
NOTE: Sirius service is not available in Hawaii and has
limited coverage in Alaska.
System Activation
Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre-activated and you
may begin listening immediately to the one year of audio
service that is included with the factory-installed satellite
radio system in your vehicle. Sirius will supply a wel-
come kit that contains general information, including
how to setup your on-line listening account. For further
information, call the toll-free number 888-539-7474, or
visit the Sirius web site at www.sirius.com, or at www-
.siriuscanada.ca for Canadian residents.
Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Number (ESN/SID)
Please have the following information available when
calling:
1. The Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Number (ESN/SID).
2. Your Vehicle Identification Number.
To access the ESN/SID, refer to the following steps:
ESN/SID Access With REQ/RES Radios
With the ignition switch in the ON/RUN or ACC posi-
tion and the radio on, press the SETUP button and scroll
using the TUNE/SCROLL control knob until Sirius ID is
selected. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob and the
Sirius ID number will display. The Sirius ID number
display will time out in two minutes. Press any button on
the radio to exit this screen.
274 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
ESN/SID Access With REN/RER Radios
While in SAT mode, press the MENU button on the radio
faceplate.
Next, touch the SUBSCRIPTION tab on the touch screen.
All the ESNs that apply to your vehicle will display.
ESN/SID Access With REU Radio
While in SAT mode, press the MENU button on the radio
faceplate.
Next, turn the knob surrounding the joystick in the center
of the radio to scroll to Subscription, and then press and
release the joystick. All of the ESNs that apply to your
vehicle will display.
Selecting uconnect™ studios (Satellite) Mode
Press the SAT button until ⬙SAT⬙appears in the display. A
CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio
mode.
Satellite Antenna
To ensure optimum reception, do not place items on the
roof around the rooftop antenna location or strap items to
the trunk lid around the trunk lid antenna (if equipped).
Metal objects placed within the line of sight of the
antenna will cause decreased performance. Larger lug-
gage items such as bikes should be placed as far rearward
as possible, within the loading design of the rack. Do not
place items directly on or above the antenna.
Reception Quality
Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the
following reasons:
•
The vehicle is parked in an underground parking
structure or under a physical obstacle.
•
Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the
form of short audio mutes.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 275
•
Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can
cause intermittent reception.
•
Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can
cause signal blockage.
Operating Instructions — uconnect™ studios
(Satellite) Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
SEEK Buttons
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
channel in Satellite mode. Press the right switch to seek
up and the left switch to seek down. The radio will
remain tuned to the new channel until you make another
selection. Holding either button will bypass channels
without stopping until you release it.
SCAN Button (When Equipped)
Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for
the next channel, pausing for eight seconds before con-
tinuing to the next. To stop the search, press the SCAN
button a second time.
INFO Button — Except REU Radio
Pressing the INFO button will cycle the display informa-
tion between Artist, Song Title, and Composer (if avail-
able). Also, pressing and holding the INFO button for an
additional three seconds will make the radio display the
song title all of the time (press and hold again to return to
normal display).
INFO Button — REU Radio
Pressing the INFO button will display information about
Artist, Song Title, and Composer (if available). Pressing
the INFO button again will close the INFO screen.
276 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
RW/FF
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
causes the tuner to search for the next channel in the
direction of the arrows.
TUNE Control (Rotary)
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise
to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the channel.
MUSIC TYPE Button — Except REU Radio
Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type
mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button
or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five
seconds will allow the program format type to be se-
lected.
Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button again to select the music
type.
By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type
function is active, the radio will be tuned to the next
channel with the same selected Music Type name.
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be
exited and the radio will tune to the preset channel.
MUSIC TYPE Button — REU Radio
Pressing this button provides a Music Type list from
which you can make a selection. Once a selection is
made, you can seek up or down or scan the channels and
the radio will tune to the next station matching the
selected format. There is no time-out for this screen.
Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button again will close the
Music Type screen. Once closed, seek up, seek down, and
scan will no longer be based on your selection.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 277
SETUP Button
Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select the
following items:
•
Display Sirius ID number — Press the AUDIO/
SELECT button to display the Sirius ID number. This
number is used to activate, deactivate, or change the
Sirius subscription.
SET Button – To Set the Pushbutton Memory
When you are receiving a channel that you wish to
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET button.
The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window.
Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this channel
and press and release that button. If a button is not
selected within five seconds after pressing the SET but-
ton, the channel will continue to play but will not be
stored into pushbutton memory.
You may add a second channel to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display
window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2. This
allows a total of 12 Satellite channels to be stored into
pushbutton memory. The channels stored in SET 2
memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton
twice.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
button number will display.
Buttons1-6
These buttons tune the radio to the channels that you
commit to pushbutton memory (12 Satellite stations).
278 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Operating Instructions — uconnect™ phone (If
Equipped)
Refer to “uconnect™ phone” in Section 3.
Operating Instructions — Video Entertainment
System (VES)™ (If Equipped)
Refer to separate “Video Entertainment System (VES)™
Guide.”
REMOTE SOUND SYSTEM CONTROLS — IF
EQUIPPED
The remote sound system controls are located on the rear
surface of the steering wheel. The left and right controls
are rocker-type switches with a pushbutton in the center
of each switch. Reach behind the steering wheel to access
the switches.
Right-Hand Switch Functions
•
Press the top of the switch to increase the volume.
•
Press the bottom of the switch to decrease the volume.
Remote Sound System Controls (Back View Of Steering
Wheel)
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 279
•
Press the button in the center of the switch to change
modes (i.e., AM, FM, etc.).
Left-Hand Switch Functions for Radio Operation
•
Press the top of the switch to SEEK the next listenable
station up from the current setting.
•
Press the bottom of the switch to SEEK the next
listenable station down from the current setting.
•
Press the button in the center of the switch to tune to
the next preset that you have programmed.
Left-Hand Switch Functions for Media (i.e., CD)
Operation
•
Press the top of the switch once to listen to the next
track.
•
Press the bottom of the switch once either to listen to
the beginning of the current track or to listen to the
beginning of the previous track if it is within one
second after the current track begins to play.
•
Press the switch up or down twice to listen to the
second track, three times to listen to the third track,
and so forth.
•
Press the button located in the center of the switch to
change to the next preset that you have programmed.
CD/DVD MAINTENANCE
To keep a CD/DVD in good condition, take the following
precautions:
1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the
surface.
2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth,
wiping from center to edge.
3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratch-
ing the disc.
280 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
4. Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, cleaners,
or anti-static sprays.
5. Store the disc in its case after playing.
6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.
7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become
too high.
NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particu-
lar disc, it may be damaged (i.e., scratched, reflective
coating removed, a hair, moisture or dew on the disc)
oversized, or have protection encoding. Try a known
good disc before considering disc player service.
CLIMATE CONTROLS
The Air Conditioning and Heating System is designed to
make you comfortable in all types of weather.
Manual Heating and Air Conditioning
The Manual Temperature Controls consist of a series of
outer rotary dials and inner push knobs.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 281
Blower Control
Rotate this control to regulate the
amount of air forced through the ven-
tilation system in any mode. The
blower speed increases as you move
the control to the right from the “O”
(OFF) position. There are seven blower
speeds.
Temperature Control
Rotate this control to regulate the tem-
perature of the air inside the passenger
compartment. Rotating the dial left
into the blue area of the scale indicates
cooler temperatures while rotating
right into the red area indicates
warmer temperatures.
NOTE: If your air conditioning performance seems
lower than expected, check the front of the A/C con-
denser located in front of the radiator for an accumula-
tion of dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray
from behind the radiator and through the condenser.
Fabric front fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the
condenser, reducing air conditioning performance.
Mode Control (Air Direction)
Rotate this control to choose from sev-
eral patterns of air distribution. You
can select either a primary mode as
identified by the symbols on the con-
trol, or a blend of two of these modes.
The closer the setting is to a particular
symbol, the more air distribution you
receive from that mode.
282 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Panel
Air is directed through the outlets in the instrument
panel. These outlets can be adjusted to direct airflow.
NOTE: The center instrument panel outlets can be
aimed so that they are directed toward the rear seat
passengers for maximum airflow to the rear.
Bi-Level
Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets.
NOTE: For all settings except full cold or full hot, there
is a difference in temperature between the upper and
lower outlets. The warmer air flows to the floor outlets.
This feature gives improved comfort during sunny but
cool conditions.
Floor
Air is directed through the floor outlets with a
small amount flowing through the defrost and side
window demist outlets.
Mix
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side
window demist outlets. This setting works best in
cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to
the windshield. This setting is good for maintaining
comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield.
Defrost
Air is directed through the windshield and side
window demist outlets. Use this mode with maxi-
mum blower and temperature settings for best wind-
shield and side window defrosting.
NOTE: The air conditioning compressor operates in
Mix, Defrost, or a blend of these modes, even if the Air
Conditioning (A/C) button is not pressed. This dehu-
midifies the air to help dry the windshield. To improve
fuel economy, use these modes only when necessary.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 283
Recirculation Control
Pressing the Recirculation Control button will
put the system in recirculation mode. This can
be used when outside conditions such as
smoke, odors, dust, or high humidity are
present. Activating recirculation will cause the LED in the
control button to illuminate. After ten minutes, the sys-
tem will return to normal mode function and the LED
will turn off.
NOTE:
•
Continuous use of the recirculation mode may make
the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur.
Extended use of this mode is not recommended.
•
The use of the recirculation mode in cold or damp
weather will cause windows to fog on the inside,
because of moisture buildup inside the vehicle. Select
the Outside Air position for maximum defogging.
•
The A/C will engage automatically to prevent fogging
when the recirculation button is pressed and the mode
control is set to panel or panel / floor.
•
The A/C can be deselected manually without disturb-
ing the mode control selection.
•
When the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK
position, the recirculation feature will be cancelled.
Air Conditioning Control
Press this button to engage the Air
Conditioning. A light will illuminate
when the Air Conditioning System is
engaged. Rotating the dial left into the
blue area of the scale indicates cooler
temperatures while rotating right into
the red area indicates warmer tem-
peratures.
284 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: The air conditioning compressor will not engage
until the engine has been running for about 10 seconds.
•
MAX A/C
For maximum cooling use the A/C and recirculation
buttons at the same time.
•
ECONOMY MODE
If economy mode is desired, press the A/C button to turn
OFF the indicator light and the A/C compressor. Then,
move the temperature control to the desired temperature.
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If
Equipped
Automatic Operation
The Automatic Temperature Control system automati-
cally maintains the climate in the cabin of the vehicle at
the comfort levels desired by the driver and passenger.
Automatic Temperature Control
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 285
Operation of the system is quite simple.
1. Turn the Mode Control knob (on the right) and the
Blower Control knob (on the left) to AUTO.
NOTE: The AUTO position performs best for front seat
occupants only.
2. Dial in the temperature you would
like the system to maintain by rotating
the Temperature Control knob. Once
the comfort level is selected, the sys-
tem will maintain that level automati-
cally using the heating system. Should
the desired comfort level require air
conditioning, the system will automatically make the
adjustment.
You will experience the greatest efficiency by simply
allowing the system to function automatically. Selecting
the “O” (OFF) position on the blower control stops the
system completely and closes the outside air intake.
The recommended setting for maximum comfort is 72°F
(22°C) for the average person; however, this may vary.
NOTE:
•
The temperature setting can be adjusted at anytime
without affecting automatic operation.
•
Pressing the Air Conditioning Control button while in
AUTO mode will cause the LED in the control button
to flash three times and then turn off. This indicates
that the system is in AUTO mode and requesting the
air conditioning is not necessary.
286 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
•
If your air conditioning performance seems lower than
expected, check the front of the A/C condenser located
in front of the radiator for an accumulation of dirt or
insects. Clean with a gentle water spray from behind
the radiator and through the condenser. Fabric front
fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the condenser,
reducing air conditioning performance.
Blower Control
For full automatic operation or for
automatic blower operation turn the
knob to AUTO position. In manual
mode there are seven blower speeds
that can be individual selected. In off
position the blower will shut off.
Manual Operation
This system offers a full complement of manual override
features, which consist of Blower Preferred Automatic,
Mode Preferred Automatic, or Blower and Mode Pre-
ferred Automatic. This means the operator can override
the blower, the mode, or both. There is a manual blower
range for times when the AUTO setting is not desired.
The blower can be set to any fixed blower speed by
rotating the Blower Control knob (on the left).
NOTE: Please read the Automatic Temperature Control
Operation Chart that follows for details.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 287
288 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The operator can override the AUTO mode setting to
change airflow distribution by rotating the Mode Control
knob (on the right) to one of the following positions.
•
Panel
Air is directed through the outlets in the instrument
panel. These outlets can be adjusted to direct airflow.
NOTE: The center instrument panel outlets can be
aimed so that they are directed toward the rear seat
passengers for maximum airflow to the rear.
•
Bi-Level
Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets.
NOTE: For all settings except full cold or full hot, there
is a difference in temperature between the upper and
lower outlets. The warmer air flows to the floor outlets.
This feature gives improved comfort during sunny but
cool conditions.
•
Floor
Air is directed through the floor outlets with a
small amount flowing through the defrost and side
window demist outlets.
•
Mix
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side
window demist outlets. This setting works best in
cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to
the windshield. This setting is good for maintaining
comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield.
•
Defrost
Air is directed through the windshield and side
window demist outlets. Use this mode with maxi-
mum blower and temperature settings for best wind-
shield and side window defrosting.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 289
•
Air Conditioner Control
Press this button to turn on the air
conditioning during manual operation
only. When the air conditioning is
turned on, cool dehumidified air will
flow through the outlets selected with
the Mode control dial. Press this but-
ton a second time to turn OFF the air
conditioning. An LED in the button illuminates when
manual compressor operation is selected.
•
Recirculation Control
The system will automatically control recircu-
lation. However, pressing the Recirculation
Control button will temporarily put the system
in recirculation mode (ten minutes). This can
be used when outside conditions such as smoke, odors,
dust, or high humidity are present. Activating recircula-
tion will cause the LED in the control button to illumi-
nate. After ten minutes, the system will return to normal
AUTO mode function and the LED will turn off.
NOTE:
•
When the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK
position, the recirculation feature will be cancelled.
•
In cold weather, use of the Recirculation mode may
lead to excessive window fogging. The Recirculation
mode is not allowed in the floor, defrost, or defrost/
floor mode in order to improve window clearing.
Recirculation will be disabled automatically if these
modes are selected.
290 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
•
Extended use of recirculation may cause the windows
to fog. If the interior of the windows begins to fog,
press the Recirculation button to return to outside air.
Some temp/humidity conditions will cause captured
interior air to condense on windows and hamper
visibility. For this reason, the system will not allow
Recirculation to be selected while in floor, defrost, or
defrost/floor mode. Attempting to use the recircula-
tion while in these modes will cause the LED in the
control button to blink and then turn off.
•
Most of the time, when in Automatic Operation, you
can temporarily put the system into Recirculation
Mode by pressing the Recirculation button. However,
under certain conditions, while in Automatic Mode,
the system is blowing air out the defrost vents. When
these conditions are present, and the Recirculation
button is pressed, the indicator will flash and then turn
off. This tells you that you are unable to go into
Recirculation Mode at this time. If you would like the
system to go into Recirculation Mode, you must first
move the Mode knob to Panel, Panel/Floor and then
press the Recirculation button. This feature reduces the
possibility of window fogging.
Operating Tips
NOTE: Refer to the chart at the end of this section for
suggested control settings for various weather condi-
tions.
Summer Operation
The engine cooling system in air-conditioned vehicles
must be protected with a high-quality antifreeze coolant
to provide proper corrosion protection and to protect
against engine overheating. A solution of 50% ethylene
glycol antifreeze coolant and 50% water is recommended.
Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in Section 7 of this
manual for proper coolant selection.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 291
Winter Operation
Use of the air Recirculation Mode during winter months
is not recommended because it may cause window
fogging.
Vacation Storage
Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of service
(i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air
conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the
fresh air and high blower settings. This will ensure
adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility
of compressor damage when the system is started again.
Window Fogging
Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly re-
moved by turning the mode selector to Defrost. The
Defrost/Floor mode can be used to maintain a clear
windshield and provide sufficient heating. If side win-
dow fogging becomes a problem, increase blower speed.
Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild but
rainy or humid weather.
NOTE: Recirculate without A/C should not be used for
long periods as fogging may occur.
Side Window Demisters
A side window demister outlet is located at each end of
the instrument panel. These non-adjustable outlets direct
air toward the side windows when the system is in the
FLOOR, MIX, or DEFROST mode. The air is directed at
the area of the windows through which you view the
outside mirrors.
292 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Outside Air Intake
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
windshield, is free of obstructions such as leaves. Leaves
collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, and if they
enter the plenum, they could plug the water drains. In
winter months, make sure the air intake is clear of ice,
slush, and snow.
A/C Air Filter — If Equipped
The A/C Filter prevents most dust and pollen from
entering the cabin. The filter acts on air coming from
outside the vehicle and recirculated air within the pas-
senger compartment. Refer to “Maintenance Procedures”
in Section 7 of this manual for A/C Air Filter service
information or see your authorized dealer for service.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedules” in Section 8 of this
manual for filter service intervals.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 293
Control Setting Suggestions for Various Weather Conditions
294 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
䡵Starting Procedures .................... 299
▫Normal Starting ..................... 299
▫Extreme Cold Weather
(Below –20°F Or –29°C) ................ 300
▫If Engine Fails To Start ................ 300
▫After Starting ....................... 301
䡵Engine Block Heater — If Equipped ........ 301
䡵Automatic Transmission ................. 302
▫Key Ignition Park Interlock ............. 303
▫Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System . . 303
▫Brake/Transmission Interlock Manual
Override .......................... 303
▫Four–Speed Automatic Transmission ....... 305
▫Gear Ranges ........................ 305
䡵Four-Wheel Drive Operation ............. 309
▫MP1522 Command-Trac威Transfer Case —
If Equipped ........................ 309
▫MP3022 Selec-Trac威II Transfer Case —
If Equipped ........................ 315
5
䡵On-Road Driving Tips .................. 321
䡵Off-Road Driving Tips .................. 321
▫When To Use 4WD Low Range .......... 321
▫Driving Through Water ................ 322
▫Driving In Snow, Mud And Sand ......... 323
▫Hill Climbing ....................... 323
▫Traction Downhill .................... 324
▫After Driving Off-Road ................ 324
䡵Power Steering ....................... 325
▫Power Steering Fluid Check ............. 327
䡵Parking Brake ........................ 327
䡵Anti-Lock Brake System ................. 329
䡵Electronic Brake Control System ........... 331
▫Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ........... 332
▫Traction Control System (TCS) ........... 332
▫Brake Assist System (BAS) .............. 333
▫Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) ......... 334
▫Hill Start Assist (HSA) ................ 334
▫Hill Descent Control (HDC) — If Equipped . . 337
▫Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ......... 339
䡵Tire Safety Information ................. 343
▫Tire Markings ....................... 343
▫Tire Identification Number (TIN) ......... 347
▫Tire Loading And Tire Pressure .......... 348
296 STARTING AND OPERATING
䡵Tires — General Information ............. 352
▫Tire Pressure ....................... 352
▫Tire Inflation Pressures ................ 353
▫Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation . . . 355
▫Radial-Ply Tires ..................... 355
▫Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped ....... 355
▫Tire Spinning ....................... 356
▫Tread Wear Indicators ................. 357
▫Life Of Tire ........................ 358
▫Replacement Tires .................... 359
䡵Tire Chains .......................... 360
䡵Tire Rotation Recommendations ........... 361
䡵Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) ....... 363
▫Base System ........................ 365
▫Premium System — If Equipped ......... 368
▫General Information .................. 372
䡵Fuel Requirements ..................... 373
▫Reformulated Gasoline ................ 373
▫Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends ............. 374
▫E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles ...... 374
▫MMT In Gasoline .................... 375
▫Materials Added To Fuel ............... 375
▫Fuel System Cautions ................. 376
▫Carbon Monoxide Warnings ............ 377
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 297
䡵Adding Fuel ......................... 378
▫Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap) .............. 378
▫Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message ........... 379
䡵Vehicle Loading ...................... 380
▫Certification Label ................... 380
䡵Trailer Towing ........................ 382
▫Common Towing Definitions ............ 382
▫Trailer Hitch Classification .............. 387
▫Trailer Towing Weights
(Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings) ........ 388
▫Trailer And Tongue Weight ............. 390
▫Towing Requirements ................. 391
▫Towing Tips ........................ 396
䡵Recreational Towing
(Behind Motorhome, Etc.) ................ 397
▫Towing – Two-Wheel Drive Models ....... 397
▫Towing — Four-Wheel Drive Models ...... 397
298 STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING PROCEDURES
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust both
inside and outside mirrors, and fasten your seat belts.
WARNING!
Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
Start the engine with the shift lever in the NEUTRAL or
PARK position. Apply the brake before shifting to any
driving range.
Normal Starting
NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm
engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the
accelerator pedal.
Turn the ignition switch to the START position and
release when the engine starts. If the engine fails to start
within 10 seconds, turn the ignition switch to the LOCK
position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal
Starting” procedure.
Tip Start Feature
Turn the ignition switch to START position and release it
as soon as the starter engages. The starter motor will
continue to run, but will automatically disengage itself
when the engine is running. If the engine fails to start, the
starter will disengage automatically in 10 seconds. If this
occurs, turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position,
wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting”
procedure.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 299
Extreme Cold Weather (below –20°F or –29°C)
To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of
an externally powered electric engine block heater (avail-
able from your authorized dealer) is recommended.
If Engine Fails to Start
WARNING!
•
Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids into
the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to
start the vehicle. This could result in a flash fire
causing serious personal injury.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get
it started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic
transmission cannot be started this way. Unburned
fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once
the engine has started, ignite and damage the
converter and vehicle. If the vehicle has a dis-
charged battery, booster cables may be used to
obtain a start from a booster battery or the battery
in another vehicle. This type of start can be dan-
gerous if done improperly. Refer to Section 6 of
this manual for proper jump starting procedures
and follow them carefully.
With Tip Start
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
“Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold Weather” proce-
dures, it may be flooded. To clear any excess fuel, press
the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it.
300 STARTING AND OPERATING
Then, turn the ignition switch to the START position and
release it as soon as the starter engages. The starter motor
will disengage automatically in 10 seconds. Once this
occurs, release the accelerator pedal, turn the ignition
switch to the LOCK position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then
repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, wait 10 to 15 sec-
onds before trying again.
After Starting
The idle speed will automatically decrease as the engine
warms up.
WARNING!
Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build up may
cause serious injury or death.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED
The engine block heater warms the engine, and permits
quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the cord to a
standard 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a
grounded three-wire extension cord.
•
The engine block heater cord is found under the hood
clipped to the heater line on the left side of the engine.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 301
WARNING!
Remember to disconnect the cord before driving.
Damage to the 110-115 Volt AC electrical cord could
cause electrocution.
Use the heater when temperatures below 0 °F (-18 °C) are
expected to last for several days.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow-
ing precautions are not observed:
•
Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to
a complete stop.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
•
Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the
vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine
is at idle speed.
•
Do not shift from REVERSE, PARK, or NEUTRAL
into any forward gear when the engine is above
idle speed.
•
Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly on the brake pedal.
302 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
It is dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK or
NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle
speed. If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal,
the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in
reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when the
engine is idling normally and when your foot is
firmly on the brake pedal.
Key Ignition Park Interlock
This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Inter-
lock which requires the shift lever to be placed in PARK
prior to rotating the key to the LOCK position. The key
can only be removed from the ignition when the ignition
is in the LOCK position and once removed the shift lever
is locked in PARK.
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System
This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift
Interlock System (BTSI) that holds the shift lever in the
PARK position when the ignition switch is in the LOCK
position. To move the shift lever out of the PARK
position, the ignition switch must be turned to any other
switch position (ACC, ON, or START) (engine running or
not) and the brake pedal must be pressed.
Brake/Transmission Interlock Manual Override
Your vehicle may be equipped with a shift lock manual
override. The manual override may be used in the event
that the shift lever should fail to move from PARK with
the key in the ON position and the brake pedal pressed.
To operate the shift lock manual override, perform the
following steps:
1. Turn the key to the ON position but do not start the
engine.
2. Firmly set the parking brake.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 303
3. Using a flat blade screwdriver, carefully remove the
shift lock manual override cover which is located on the
PRNDL bezel.
4. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal.
5. Using the screwdriver, reach into the manual override
opening. Press and hold the shift lock lever down.
6. Move the shift lever into the NEUTRAL position.
7. The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL.
Have your vehicle inspected by your local authorized
dealer if the shift lock manual override has been used.
Shift Lock Manual Override
304 STARTING AND OPERATING
Four–Speed Automatic Transmission
NOTE: Under extreme cold temperatures (-6°F (-21°C)
and when in DRIVE, transmission operation may be
briefly limited to only second gear operation. Normal
operation will resume once the transmission temperature
has risen to a suitable level.
Shifting from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE should be
done only after the accelerator pedal is released and the
vehicle is stopped. Be sure to keep your foot on the brake
when moving the shift lever between these gears.
Gear Ranges
PARK
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
Never use PARK while the vehicle is in motion. Apply
Shift Lever
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 305
the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this range.
Always apply the parking brake first, then place the shift
lever in the PARK position.
WARNING!
•
Never use the PARK position as a substitute for
the parking brake. Always apply the parking
brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle
movement and possible injury or damage.
•
It is dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK
or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than
idle speed. If your foot is not firmly on the brake
pedal, the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward
or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle
and hit someone or something. Only shift into
gear when the engine is idling normally and when
your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal.
REVERSE
This range is for moving the vehicle rearward. Use this
range only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop.
NEUTRAL
This range is used when the vehicle is standing for
prolonged periods with the engine running. The engine
may be started in this range. Set the parking brake if you
must leave the vehicle.
NOTE: Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any
other reason with shift lever in NEUTRAL can result in
severe transmission damage. Refer to “Recreational Tow-
ing” in Section 5 and “Towing a Disabled Vehicle” in
Section 6 of this manual.
DRIVE
This range is used for most city and highway driving.
306 STARTING AND OPERATING
2 (Second)
This range is used for moderate grades and to assist
braking on dry pavement or in mud and snow. Begins at
a stop in low gear with automatic upshift into second
gear. Will not shift into third gear.
1 (First)
This range is used for hard pulling at low speeds in mud,
sand, snow, or on steep grades. Begins and stays in low
gear with no upshift. Provides engine compression brak-
ing at low speeds.
Overdrive Operation
The overdrive automatic transmission contains an elec-
tronically controlled fourth gear (OVERDRIVE). The
transmission will automatically shift from third gear into
OVERDRIVE if the following conditions are present:
•
the shift lever is in DRIVE
•
vehicle speed is above approximately 30 mph
(48 km/h)
•
the TOW/HAUL button has not been activated
The transmission will downshift from OVERDRIVE to
DRIVE if the accelerator pedal is fully pressed at vehicle
speeds above approximately 35 mph (56 km/h).
When To Use TOW/HAUL Mode
When driving in hilly areas, towing a trailer, carrying a
heavy load, etc., and frequent transmission shifting oc-
curs, press the TOW/HAUL button. This will improve
performance and reduce the potential for transmission
overheating or failure due to excessive shifting. When
operating in TOW/HAUL mode, the transmission will
shift into third gear.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 307
NOTE: TOW/HAUL mode locks out Overdrive.
The “TOW/HAUL Indicator Light” will illuminate in the
instrument cluster to indicate when the switch has been
activated. Pressing the switch a second time restores nor-
mal operation. If the TOW/HAUL mode is desired, the
switch must be pressed each time the engine is started.
Transmission Limp Home Mode
Transmission function is monitored for abnormal condi-
tions. If a condition is detected that could result in
transmission damage, the Transmission Limp Home
Mode will be engaged. In this mode, the transmission
will remain in second gear in any forward driving range.
To reset the transmission, use the following procedure:
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Move the shift lever into the PARK position.
3. Turn the engine off and turn the key to the LOCK
position.
4. Wait approximately 10 seconds, then restart the en-
gine.
5. Move the shift lever into the desired gear range.
Tow/Haul Button
308 STARTING AND OPERATING
If the problem is no longer detected, the transmission will
return to normal operation. If the problem persists,
PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL will continue to oper-
ate. Only second gear range will operate in the DRIVE
position. Have the transmission checked at your autho-
rized dealer as soon as possible.
Torque Converter Clutch
A feature designed to improve fuel economy has been
added to the automatic transmission of this vehicle. A
clutch within the torque converter engages automatically
at calibrated speeds. This may result in a slightly differ-
ent feeling or response during normal operation in high
gear. When the vehicle speed drops or during accelera-
tion, the clutch automatically and smoothly disengages.
FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION
MP1522 Command-Trac姞Transfer Case — If
Equipped
Operating Information and Precautions
The Command-Trac威transfer case provides four positions:
•
Two–wheel drive (2WD) high range
•
Four-wheel drive (4WD LOCK) high range
•
Four-wheel drive (4WD LOW) low range
•
Neutral (N)
This transfer case is intended to be driven in the two-
wheel drive position (2WD) for normal street and high-
way conditions such as dry hard-surfaced roads.
When additional traction is required, select the transfer
case 4WD LOCK position or 4WD LOW position. This
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 309
position locks the front driveshaft and rear driveshaft
together and forces the front and rear wheels to rotate at
the same speed.
Use the transfer case NEUTRAL position for recreational
towing only. Refer to “Recreational Towing” in this
section for specific procedures on shifting into and out of
NEUTRAL.
CAUTION!
•
Do not attempt to make a shift while only the front
wheels or rear wheels are spinning. The MP1522
Command-Trac威transfer case is not equipped
with a synchronizer and therefore the speed of the
front driveshaft and rear driveshaft must be equal
for the shift to take place. Shifting while only the
front wheels or rear wheels are spinning can cause
damage to the transfer case.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
•
The 4WD LOCK position and 4WD LOW position
are intended for loose or slippery road surfaces
only. Driving in these positions on dry hard-
surfaced roads may cause increased tire wear and
damage to the driveline components.
•
When operating your vehicle in 4WD LOW, the
engine speed is approximately three times that of
the 2WD position or 4WD LOCK position at a
given road speed. Take care not to over-speed the
engine and do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
•
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles de-
pends on tires of equal size, type, and circumfer-
ence on each wheel. Any difference in tire size can
cause damage to the transfer case.
310 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
•
You or others could be injured if you leave the
vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the
NEUTRAL position without first fully engaging
the parking brake. The transfer case NEUTRAL
position disengages both the front driveshaft and
rear driveshaft from the powertrain and it will
allow the vehicle to move even if the transmission
is in PARK. The parking brake should always be
applied when the driver is not in the vehicle.
•
Always engage the parking brake when powering
down the vehicle if the “SERV 4WD Warning
Light” is illuminated. Not engaging the parking
brake may allow the vehicle to roll, which may
cause personal injury.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Since four-wheel drive provides improved trac-
tion, there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and
stopping speeds. Do not go faster than road con-
ditions permit. You or others could be injured.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 311
Shift Positions
The transfer case switch is located on the center console
next to the shift lever.
2WD
Rear Wheel Drive High Range - This range is used for
normal street and highway driving on dry hard-surfaced
roads.
4WD Lock
Four-Wheel Drive High Range - This range locks the
front driveshaft and rear driveshaft together forcing the
front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed.
Additional traction for loose or slippery road surfaces
only.
4WD Low
Four-Wheel Drive Low Range - This range provides low
speed four-wheel drive. Locks the front driveshaft and
rear driveshaft together forcing the front and rear wheels
to rotate at the same speed. Additional traction and
maximum pulling power for loose or slippery road
surfaces only. Do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
Transfer Case Switch
312 STARTING AND OPERATING
N
Neutral - This range disengages both the front driveshaft
and rear driveshaft from the powertrain. To be used for
flat towing behind another vehicle. Refer to “Recreational
Towing” in this section for more information.
Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights
The four-wheel drive indicator lights (4WD and 4 LOW)
are located in the instrument cluster. The NEUTRAL
indicator light is located on the transfer case switch. If
there is no indicator light on or flashing, the transfer case
position is two-wheel drive (2WD). If the indicator light
is on, the desired position (4WD LOCK, 4WD LOW, or
NEUTRAL) has been obtained.
If one or more shift requirements are not met:
•
An indicator light will flash.
•
The transfer case will not shift.
NOTE: The “SERV 4WD Warning Light” monitors the
electric shift four-wheel drive system. If this light re-
mains on after engine start up, or it illuminates during
driving, it means that the four-wheel drive system is not
functioning properly and that service is required.
Shifting Procedures
NOTE: If any of the requirements to select a new
transfer case position have not been met, the transfer case
will not shift, the indicator light for the previous position
will remain on, and the newly selected position indicator
light will continue to flash until all the requirements for
the selected position have been met. To retry a shift, move
the transfer case switch back to the original position,
make certain all shift requirements have been met, wait
five seconds, and try the shift again.
2WD to 4WD Lock
Move the transfer case switch to the desired position.
Shifts between 2WD and 4WD LOCK can be done with
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 313
the vehicle stopped or in motion. With the vehicle in
motion, the transfer case will engage/disengage faster if
you momentarily release the accelerator pedal after mov-
ing the transfer case switch. If the vehicle is stopped, the
ignition switch must be in the ON position with the
engine either OFF or RUNNING. This shift cannot be
completed if the ignition switch is in the ACC position.
NOTE: The four-wheel drive system will not allow
shifts between 2WD and 4WD LOCK if the rear wheels
are spinning (no traction). In this situation, the selected
position indicator light will flash and the original posi-
tion indicator light will remain ON. At this time, reduce
speed and stop spinning the wheels to complete the shift.
There may be a delay up to 10 seconds for the shift to
complete after the wheels have stopped spinning.
Delayed shifting out of 4WD LOCK may be experienced
due to uneven tire wear, low tire pressure, or excessive
loading.
4WD Lock to 4WD Low
When shifting into or out of 4WD LOW, some gear noise
may be heard. This noise is normal and is not detrimental
to the vehicle or its occupants.
Shifting can be performed with the vehicle rolling 2 to
3 mph (3 to 5 km/h) using the “Preferred Procedure” or
completely stopped using the “Alternate Procedure.”
Preferred Procedure
1. With the engine RUNNING, slow the vehicle speed to
2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h).
2. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
3. While still rolling, move the transfer case switch to the
desired position.
4. After the desired position indicator light is ON (not
flashing), shift the transmission into gear.
314 STARTING AND OPERATING
Alternate Procedure
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.
2. With the ignition switch in the ON position, and the
engine OFF or RUNNING, shift the transmission into
NEUTRAL.
3. Move the transfer case switch to the desired position.
4. After the desired position indicator light is on (not
flashing), shift the transmission into gear.
NOTE: Steps 1 and 2 in the “Preferred Procedure” and
the “Alternate Procedure” are requirements for shifting
the transfer case. If these requirements are not met prior
to attempting the shift or while the shift attempt is in
process, then the indicator light will flash, and the
current transfer case position will be maintained. To retry
a shift, move the transfer case switch back to the original
position, make certain all shift requirements have been
met, wait five seconds, and try the shift again.
The ignition switch must be in the ON position for a shift
to take place and for the position indicator lights to be
operable. If the ignition switch is not in the ON position,
then the shift will not take place and no position indicator
lights will be on or flashing.
MP3022 Selec-Trac姞II Transfer Case — If
Equipped
Operating Information and Precautions
The Selec-Trac威II active on-demand transfer case pro-
vides four positions:
•
Two-wheel drive (2WD) high range
•
Four-wheel drive Auto (4WD AUTO) high range
•
Neutral (N)
•
Four-wheel drive (4WD) low range
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 315
This transfer case is intended to be driven in either the
two-wheel drive position (2WD) or the four-wheel drive
Auto position (4WD AUTO) for normal street and high-
way conditions such as dry hard-surfaced roads.
For added capability when traversing steep grades,
rough terrain, or extremely poor traction surfaces, select
the transfer case 4WD LOW position. This position locks
the front driveshaft and rear driveshaft together and
forces the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same
speed while multiplying engine torque.
Use the transfer case NEUTRAL position for recreational
towing only. Refer to “Recreational Towing” in this
section for specific procedures on shifting into and out of
NEUTRAL.
CAUTION!
•
The 4WD LOW position is intended for loose or
slippery road surfaces only. Driving in this posi-
tion on dry hard-surfaced roads may cause in-
creased tire wear and damage to the driveline
components.
•
When operating your vehicle in 4WD LOW, the
engine speed is approximately three times that of
the 2WD position or 4WD AUTO position at a
given road speed. Take care not to over-speed the
engine and do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
•
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles de-
pends on tires of equal size, type, and circumfer-
ence on each wheel. Any difference in tire size can
cause damage to the transfer case.
316 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
•
You or others could be injured if you leave the
vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the
NEUTRAL position without first fully engaging
the parking brake. The transfer case NEUTRAL
position disengages both the front driveshaft and
rear driveshaft from the powertrain and it will
allow the vehicle to move despite the transmission
position. The parking brake should always be
applied when the driver is not in the vehicle.
•
Always engage the parking brake when powering
down the vehicle if the “SERV 4WD Warning
Light” is illuminated. Not engaging the parking
brake may allow the vehicle to roll, which may
cause personal injury.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Since four-wheel drive provides improved trac-
tion, there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and
stopping speeds. Do not go faster than road con-
ditions permit. You or others could be injured.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 317
Shift Positions
The transfer case switch is located on the center console
next to the shift lever.
2WD
Rear Wheel Drive High Range - This range is for normal
street and highway driving on dry hard-surfaced roads.
4WD Auto
Four-Wheel Drive Auto High Range – This active on-
demand range makes available optimum traction for a
wide range of conditions, while maximizing driver con-
venience. This position is always in four-wheel drive
mode, with a normal 42% front axle, 58% rear axle torque
split. The system also anticipates and prevents slip by
redirecting torque as necessary, up to 100% to the front or
rear axle, if needed.
4WD Low
Four-Wheel Drive Low Range - This range is for low
speed four-wheel drive. Locks the front driveshaft and
rear driveshaft together forcing the front and rear wheels
to rotate at the same speed. Additional traction and
maximum pulling power for loose or slippery road
surfaces only. Do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
Transfer Case Switch
318 STARTING AND OPERATING
N
Neutral - This range disengages both the front driveshaft
and rear driveshaft from the powertrain. To be used for
flat towing behind another vehicle. Refer to “Recreational
Towing” in this section for more information.
Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights
The four-wheel drive indicator lights (4WD, 4 LOW) are
located in the instrument cluster. The NEUTRAL indica-
tor light is located on the transfer case switch. If there is
no indicator light on or flashing, the transfer case posi-
tion is two-wheel drive (2WD). If the indicator light is on,
the desired position (4WD AUTO, 4WD LOW, or NEU-
TRAL) has been obtained.
If one or more shift requirements are not met:
•
An indicator light will flash.
•
The transfer case will not shift.
NOTE: The “SERV 4WD Warning Light” monitors the
electric shift four-wheel drive system. If this light re-
mains on after engine start up, or it illuminates during
driving, it means that the four-wheel drive system is not
functioning properly and that service is required.
Shifting Procedures
NOTE: If any of the requirements to select a new
transfer case position have not been met, the transfer case
will not shift, the indicator light for the previous position
will remain on, and the newly selected position indicator
light will continue to flash until all the requirements for
the selected position have been met. To retry a shift, move
the transfer case switch back to the original position,
make certain all shift requirements have been met, wait
five seconds, and try the shift again.
2WD to 4WD Auto
Move the transfer case switch to the desired position.
Shifts between 2WD and 4WD Auto can be done with the
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 319
vehicle stopped or in motion. If the vehicle is stopped,
the ignition switch must be in the ON position with the
engine either OFF or RUNNING. This shift cannot be
completed if the ignition switch is in the ACC position.
2WD or 4WD Auto to 4WD Low
When shifting into or out of 4WD LOW, some gear noise
may be heard. This noise is normal and is not detrimental
to the vehicle or its occupants.
Shifting can be performed with the vehicle rolling 2 to
3 mph (3 to 5 km/h) using the “Preferred Procedure” or
completely stopped using the “Alternate Procedure.”
Preferred Procedure
1. With the engine RUNNING, slow the vehicle speed to
2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h).
2. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
3. While still rolling, move the transfer case switch to the
desired position.
4. After the desired position indicator light is on (not
flashing), shift the transmission into gear.
Alternate Procedure
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.
2. With the ignition switch in the ON position and the
engine OFF or RUNNING, shift the transmission into
NEUTRAL.
3. Move the transfer case switch to the desired position.
4. After the desired position indicator light is on (not
flashing), shift the transmission into gear.
NOTE: Steps 1 and 2 in the “Preferred Procedure” and
the “Alternate Procedure” are requirements for shifting
the transfer case. If these requirements are not met prior
to attempting the shift or while the shift attempt is in
320 STARTING AND OPERATING
process, then the indicator light will flash, and the
current transfer case position will be maintained. To retry
a shift, move the transfer case switch back to the original
position, make certain all shift requirements have been
met, wait five seconds, and try the shift again.
The ignition switch must be in the ON position for a shift
to take place and for the position indicator lights to be
operable. If the ignition switch is not in the ON position,
the shift will not take place, and no position indicator
lights will be on or flashing.
ON-ROAD DRIVING TIPS
Utility vehicles have higher ground clearance and a
narrower track to make them capable of performing in a
wide variety of off-road applications. Specific design
characteristics give them a higher center of gravity than
ordinary cars.
An advantage of the higher ground clearance is a better
view of the road, allowing you to anticipate problems.
They are not designed for cornering at the same speeds as
conventional two-wheel drive vehicles any more than
low-slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfacto-
rily in off-road conditions. If at all possible, avoid sharp
turns or abrupt maneuvers. As with other vehicles of this
type, failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in
loss of control or vehicle rollover.
OFF-ROAD DRIVING TIPS
When To Use 4WD LOW Range
When off-road driving, shift to 4WD LOW for additional
traction and control on slippery or difficult terrain,
ascending or descending steep hills, and to increase
low-speed pulling power. This range should be limited to
extreme situations such as deep snow, mud, or sand
where additional low speed pulling power is needed.
Vehicle speeds in excess of 25 mph (40 km/h) should be
avoided when in 4WD LOW range.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 321
Driving Through Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through
water, there are a number of precautions that must be
considered before entering the water:
CAUTION!
When driving through water, do not exceed 5 mph
(8 km/h). Always check water depth before entering
as a precaution, and check all fluids afterward. Driv-
ing through water may cause damage that may not be
covered by the new vehicle limited warranty.
Driving through water more than a few inches/
centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure
safety and prevent damage to your vehicle. If you must
drive through water, try to determine the depth and the
bottom condition (and location of any obstacles) prior to
entering. Proceed with caution and maintain a steady
controlled speed less than 5 mph (8 km/h) in deep water
to minimize wave effects.
Flowing Water
If the water is swift flowing and rising (as in storm
run-off) avoid crossing until the water level recedes
and/or the flow rate is reduced. If you must cross
flowing-water, avoid depths in excess of 9 in (22 cm). The
flowing water can erode the streambed causing your
vehicle to sink into deeper water. Determine exit point(s)
that are downstream of your entry point to allow for
drifting.
Standing Water
Avoid driving in standing water deeper than 20 in
(51 cm), and reduce speed appropriately to minimize
wave effects. Maximum speed in 20 in (51 cm) of water is
less than 5 mph (8 km/h).
322 STARTING AND OPERATING
Maintenance
After driving through deep water, inspect your vehicle
fluids and lubricants (engine, transmission, axle, transfer
case) to assure they have not been contaminated. Con-
taminated fluids and lubricants (milky, foamy in appear-
ance) should be flushed/changed as soon as possible to
prevent component damage.
Driving In Snow, Mud and Sand
In heavy snow, when pulling a load, or for additional
control at slower speeds, shift the transmission to a low
gear and shift the transfer case to 4WD LOW if necessary.
Refer to “Four-Wheel Drive Operation” in this section.
Do not shift to a lower gear than necessary to maintain
headway. Over-revving the engine can spin the wheels
and traction will be lost.
Avoid abrupt downshifts on icy or slippery roads be-
cause engine braking may cause skidding and loss of
control.
Hill Climbing
NOTE: Before attempting to climb a hill, determine the
conditions at the crest and/or on the other side.
Before climbing a steep hill, shift the transmission to a
lower gear and shift the transfer case to 4WD LOW. Use
first gear and 4WD LOW for very steep hills.
If you stall or begin to lose headway while climbing a
steep hill, allow your vehicle to come to a stop and
immediately apply the brakes. Restart the engine and
shift to REVERSE. Back slowly down the hill allowing the
compression braking of the engine to help regulate your
speed. If the brakes are required to control vehicle speed,
apply them lightly and avoid locking or skidding the
tires.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 323
WARNING!
If the engine stalls or you lose headway or cannot
make it to the top of a steep hill or grade, never
attempt to turn around. To do so may result in
tipping and rolling the vehicle. Always back straight
down a hill in REVERSE gear carefully. Never back
down a hill in NEUTRAL using only the brake.
Remember, never drive diagonally across a hill - drive
straight up or down.
If the wheels start to slip as you approach the crest of a
hill, ease off the accelerator and maintain headway by
turning the front wheels slowly left and right. This may
provide a fresh “bite” into the surface and will usually
provide traction to complete the climb.
Traction Downhill
Shift the transmission into a low gear and the transfer
case to 4WD LOW range. Let the vehicle go slowly down
the hill with all four wheels turning against engine
compression drag. This will permit you to control the
vehicle speed and direction.
When descending mountains or hills, repeated braking
can cause brake fade with loss of braking control. Avoid
repeated heavy braking by downshifting the transmis-
sion whenever possible.
After Driving Off-Road
Off-road operation puts more stress on your vehicle than
does most on-road driving. After going off-road, it is
always a good idea to check for damage. That way you
can get any problems taken care of right away and have
your vehicle ready when you need it.
324 STARTING AND OPERATING
•
Completely inspect the underbody of your vehicle.
Check tires, body structure, steering, suspension, and
exhaust system for damage.
•
Check threaded fasteners for looseness, particularly on
the chassis, drivetrain components, steering, and sus-
pension. Retighten them, if required, and torque to the
values specified in the Service Manual.
•
Check for accumulations of plants or brush. These
things could be a fire hazard. They might hide damage
to fuel lines, brake hoses, axle pinion seals, and
propeller shafts.
•
After extended operation in mud, sand, water, or
similar dirty conditions, have brake rotors, wheels,
brake linings, and axle yokes inspected and cleaned as
soon as possible.
WARNING!
Abrasive material in any part of the brakes may cause
excessive wear or unpredictable braking. You might
not have full braking power when you need it to
prevent an accident. If you have been operating your
vehicle in dirty conditions, get your brakes checked
and cleaned as necessary.
•
If you experience unusual vibration after driving in
mud, slush, or similar conditions, check the wheels for
impacted material. Impacted material can cause a
wheel imbalance and freeing the wheels of it will
correct the situation.
POWER STEERING
The standard power steering system will give you good
vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability
in tight spaces. The system will provide mechanical
steering capability if power assist is lost.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 325
If for some reason the power assist is interrupted, it will
still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these condi-
tions, you will observe a substantial increase in steering
effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and during
parking maneuvers.
NOTE:
•
Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel
travel are considered normal and do not indicate that
there is a problem with the power steering system.
•
Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the power steer-
ing pump may make noise for a short amount of time.
This is due to the cold, thick fluid in the steering
system. This noise should be considered normal, and it
does not in any way damage the steering system.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced power steering
assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others.
Service should be obtained as soon as possible.
CAUTION!
Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end
of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering
fluid temperature and it should be avoided when
possible. Damage to the power steering pump may
occur.
326 STARTING AND OPERATING
Power Steering Fluid Check
Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined
service interval is not required. The fluid should only be
checked if a leak is suspected, abnormal noises are
apparent, and/or the system is not functioning as antici-
pated. Coordinate inspection efforts through an autho-
rized dealer.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your power steering
system as the chemicals can damage your power
steering components. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
WARNING!
Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and
with the engine off to prevent injury from moving
parts and to ensure accurate fluid level reading. Do
not overfill. Use only manufacturer’s recommended
power steering fluid.
If necessary, add fluid to restore to the proper indicated
level. With a clean cloth, wipe any spilled fluid from all
surfaces. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in Section 7 for the correct fluid type.
PARKING BRAKE
To set the parking brake, pull the lever up as firmly as
possible. When the parking brake is applied with the
ignition ON, the “Brake Warning Light” in the instru-
ment cluster will light. To release the parking brake, pull
up slightly, press the center button, then lower the lever
completely.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 327
NOTE: The “Brake Warning Light” indicates only that
the parking brake is applied. You must be sure the
parking brake is fully applied before leaving the vehicle.
Be sure the parking brake is firmly set when parked, and
the shift lever is in the PARK position. When parking on
a hill, you should apply the parking brake before placing
the shift lever in PARK. Otherwise, the load on the
transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to
move the shift lever out of PARK.
WARNING!
•
Always apply the parking brake fully when leav-
ing your vehicle or it may roll and cause damage or
injury. Also, be certain to leave the transmission in
the PARK position. Failure to do so may allow the
vehicle to roll and cause damage or injury.
•
Leaving unattended children in a vehicle is dan-
gerous for a number of reasons. A child or others
could be injured. Do not leave the keys in the
ignition. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
•
Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged before
driving, failure to do so can lead to brake problems
due to excessive heating of the rear brakes.
Parking Brake
328 STARTING AND OPERATING
When parking on a hill, turn the front wheels toward the
curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an
uphill grade.
The parking brake should always be applied whenever
the driver is not in the vehicle.
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) is designed to aid the
driver in maintaining vehicle control under adverse
braking conditions. The system operates with a separate
computer to modulate hydraulic pressure, to prevent
wheel lock-up and help avoid skidding on slippery
surfaces.
All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and
type, and tires must be properly inflated, to produce
accurate signals for the computer.
WARNING!
Significant over or under-inflation of tires or mixing
sizes of tires or wheels on the vehicle can lead to loss
of braking effectiveness.
The ABS conducts a low-speed self-test at about 12 mph
(20 km/h). If you have your foot lightly on the brake
while this test is occurring, you may feel slight pedal
movement. The movement can be more apparent on ice
and snow. This is normal.
The ABS pump motor runs during the self-test at 12 mph
(20 km/h) and during an ABS stop. The pump motor
makes a low humming noise during operation, which is
normal.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 329
WARNING!
•
Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish
their effectiveness and may lead to an accident.
Pumping makes the stopping distance longer. Just
press firmly on your brake pedal when you need
to slow down or stop.
•
The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of phys-
ics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase
braking or steering efficiency beyond that af-
forded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and
tires or the traction afforded.
•
The ABS cannot prevent accidents, including
those resulting from excessive speed in turns,
following another vehicle too closely, or hydro-
planing. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver
can prevent accidents.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner, which could jeopardize the user’s safety
or the safety of others.
CAUTION!
The ABS is subject to possible detrimental effects of
electronic interference caused by improperly in-
stalled aftermarket radios or telephones.
NOTE: During severe braking conditions, a pulsing
sensation may occur and a clicking noise will be heard.
This is normal, indicating that the ABS is functioning.
330 STARTING AND OPERATING
•
Do not “ride” the brakes by resting your foot on the
pedal. This could overheat the brakes and result in
unpredictable braking action, longer stopping dis-
tances, or brake damage.
•
When descending mountains or hills, repeated brak-
ing can cause brake fade with loss of braking control.
Avoid repeated heavy braking by downshifting the
transmission or locking out overdrive whenever pos-
sible.
•
Engines may idle at higher speeds during warm-up,
which could cause rear wheels to spin and result in
loss of vehicle control. Be especially careful while
driving on slippery roads, in close-quarter maneuver-
ing, parking, or stopping.
•
Do not drive too fast for road conditions, especially
when roads are wet or slushy. A wedge of water can
build up between the tire tread and the road. This
hydroplaning action can cause loss of traction, braking
ability, and control.
•
After going through deep water or a car wash, brakes
may become wet, resulting in decreased performance
and unpredictable braking action. Dry the brakes by
gentle, intermittent pedal action while driving at very
slow speeds.
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic
brake control system commonly referred to as ESC. This
system includes Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS), Traction
Control System (TCS), Brake Assist System (BAS), Hill
Start Assist (HSA), Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM), and
Electronic Stability Control (ESC). These systems work
together to enhance both vehicle stability and control in
various driving conditions.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 331
Two additional electronic brake control system options
are Hill Descent Control (HDC) and Trailer Sway Control
(TSC). Your vehicle may be equipped with one or both of
these options.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
This system aids the driver in maintaining vehicle control
under adverse braking conditions. The system controls
hydraulic brake pressure to prevent wheel lock-up to
help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces during braking.
Refer to “Anti-Lock Brake System” in Section 5 of this
manual for more information about ABS.
WARNING!
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) cannot prevent
the natural laws of physics from acting on the ve-
hicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by
prevailing road conditions. ABS cannot prevent acci-
dents, including those resulting from excessive speed
in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydro-
planing. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can
prevent accidents. The capabilities of an ABS-
equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reck-
less or dangerous manner, which could jeopardize
the user’s safety or the safety of others.
Traction Control System (TCS)
This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of
the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, brake
pressure is applied to the slipping wheel(s) and engine
power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and
332 STARTING AND OPERATING
stability. A feature of the TCS system functions similar to
a limited slip differential and controls the wheel spin
across a driven axle. If one wheel on a driven axle is
spinning faster than the other, the system will apply the
brake of the spinning wheel. This will allow more engine
torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning.
This feature remains active even if TCS and ESC are in
the “Partial Off” mode or the “Full Off” mode. Refer to
“Electronic Stability Control (ESC)” in this section for
more information.
Brake Assist System (BAS)
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking
capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The
system detects an emergency braking situation by sens-
ing the rate and amount of brake application and then
applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help
reduce braking distances. The BAS complements the
anti-lock brake system (ABS). Applying the brakes very
quickly results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the
benefit of the system, you must apply continuous brak-
ing pressure during the stopping sequence, (do not
“pump” the brakes). Do not reduce brake pedal pressure
unless braking is no longer desired. Once the brake pedal
is released, the BAS is deactivated.
WARNING!
The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot prevent the
natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle,
nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing
road conditions. BAS cannot prevent accidents, in-
cluding those resulting from excessive speed in
turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydro-
planing. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can
prevent accidents. The capabilities of a BAS-
equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reck-
less or dangerous manner, which could jeopardize
the user’s safety or the safety of others.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 333
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)
This system anticipates the potential for wheel lift by
monitoring the driver’s steering wheel input and the
speed of the vehicle. When ERM determines that the rate
of change of the steering wheel angle and vehicle’s speed
are sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift, it then
applies the appropriate brake and may also reduce
engine power to lessen the chance that wheel lift will
occur. ERM will only intervene during very severe or
evasive driving maneuvers. ERM can only reduce the
chance of wheel lift occurring during severe or evasive
driving maneuvers. It cannot prevent wheel lift due to
other factors, such as road conditions, leaving the road-
way, or striking objects or other vehicles.
NOTE: ERM is disabled anytime the ESC is in “Full Off”
mode. Refer to Electronic Stability Control (ESC) for a
complete explanation of the available ESC modes.
WARNING!
Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road condi-
tions, and driving conditions, influence the chance
that wheel lift or rollover may occur. Electronic Roll
Mitigation (ERM) cannot prevent all wheel lift or
rollovers, especially those that involve leaving the
roadway or striking objects or other vehicles. Only a
safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent acci-
dents. The capabilities of an ERM-equipped vehicle
must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner, which could jeopardize the user’s safety or
the safety of others.
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
The HSA system is designed to help the driver accelerate
the vehicle from a complete stop while on an incline. If
the driver releases the brake while stopped on an incline,
HSA will continue to hold the brake pressure for a short
334 STARTING AND OPERATING
period. If the driver does not apply the throttle before this
time expires, the system will release brake pressure and
the vehicle will roll down the hill as normal. The system
will release brake pressure in proportion to amount of
throttle applied.
The following conditions must be met in order for HSA to
activate:
•
The vehicle must be stopped.
•
The vehicle must be on a 7% or greater incline.
•
The gear selection must match vehicle uphill direction
(i.e., vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle
backing uphill is in REVERSE gear).
•
For vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission,
the HSA will work in REVERSE gear and all forward
gears. The system will not activate if the transmission
is in PARK.
WARNING!
There may be situations where the Hill Start Assist
(HSA) will not activate and slight rolling may occur,
such as on minor hills (i.e., less than 7%), or with a
loaded vehicle, or while pulling a trailer. HSA is not
a substitute for active driving involvement. It is
always the driver’s responsibility to be attentive to
distance to other vehicles, people, and objects, and
most importantly brake operation to ensure safe
operation of the vehicle under all road conditions.
Your complete attention is always required while
driving to maintain safe control of your vehicle.
Failure to follow these warnings can result in an
accident or serious personal injury.
Towing with HSA
HSA will provide assistance during acceleration on an
incline while towing a trailer.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 335
WARNING!
•
If you use a trailer brake controller with your
trailer, the trailer brakes may be activated and
deactivated with the brake switch. If so, there may
not be enough brake pressure to hold both the
vehicle and the trailer on a hill when the brake
pedal is released. In order to avoid rolling down
an incline while resuming acceleration, manually
activate the trailer brake or apply more vehicle
brake pressure prior to releasing the brake pedal.
•
HSA is not a parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when leaving your vehicle.
Also, be certain to leave the transmission in PARK.
•
Failure to follow these warnings can result in an
accident or serious personal injury.
Disabling and Enabling HSA
This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change the
current setting, proceed as follows:
For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Infor-
mation Center (EVIC), refer to “Hill Start Assist,” under
⬙Personal Settings (Customer Programmable Features),”
under “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in
Section 4 of this manual.
For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the
following steps:
NOTE: You must complete Steps 1 through 8 within
90 seconds.
1. Center the steering wheel (front wheels pointing
straight forward).
2. Shift the transmission into PARK.
3. Apply the parking brake.
336 STARTING AND OPERATING
4. Start the engine.
5. Rotate the steering wheel one-half turn to the left.
6. Press the “ESC Off” button located in the lower switch
bank below the climate control four times within twenty
seconds. The “ESC Off Indicator Light” should turn on
and turn off two times.
7. Rotate the steering wheel back to center and then an
additional one-half turn to the right.
8. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and then
back to the ON position. If the sequence was completed
properly, the “ESC Off Indicator Light” will blink several
times to confirm HSA is disabled.
9. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
its previous setting.
Hill Descent Control (HDC) — If Equipped
HDC is only intended for low speed off-road driving.
HDC maintains vehicle speed while descending hills in
off-road driving conditions by applying the brakes when
necessary.
When enabled, HDC senses the terrain and activates
when the vehicle is descending a hill. HDC speed may be
adjusted by the driver to suit the driving conditions. The
speed corresponds to the transmission gear selected.
Gear Approximate HDC Set
Speed
1st 1 mph (1.5 km/h)
2nd 3 mph (4.5 km/h)
DRIVE 7.5 mph (12 km/h)
REVERSE 1 mph (1.5 km/h)
NEUTRAL 3 mph (4.5 km/h)
However, the driver can override HDC operation by
applying the brake to slow the vehicle down below the
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 337
HDC control speed. If more speed is desired during HDC
control, the accelerator pedal will increase vehicle speed
in the usual manner. When either the brake or the
accelerator is released, HDC will control the vehicle at the
original set speed.
NOTE: HDC is available on vehicles equipped with the
MP1522 transfer case.
•
The transfer case must be in 4WD LOW range to
enable HDC.
•
HDC is enabled only when the “Hill Descent Control
Indicator Light” in the instrument cluster is on solid.
•
HDC will NOT activate when the automatic transmis-
sion is in PARK.
•
HDC will NOT activate on level ground.
•
HDC will NOT activate at vehicle speeds above
30 mph (50 km/h).
The “Hill Descent” button is located in the lower switch
bank below the climate control.
Enabling HDC
1. Shift the transfer case into 4WD LOW range. Refer to
“Four-Wheel Drive Operation” in this section for transfer
case operation information.
Hill Descent Button
338 STARTING AND OPERATING
2. Press the “Hill Descent” button. The “Hill Descent
Control Indicator Light” in the instrument cluster will
turn on solid.
NOTE: If the transfer case is not in 4WD LOW range,
the “Hill Descent Control Indicator Light” will flash for
five seconds and HDC will not be enabled.
Disabling HDC
1. Press the “Hill Descent” button or shift the transfer
case out of 4WD LOW range. The “Hill Descent Control
Indicator” light in the instrument cluster will turn off.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
This system enhances directional control and stability of
the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC cor-
rects for over-steering and under-steering the vehicle by
applying the brake of the appropriate wheel. Engine
power may also be reduced to help the vehicle maintain
the desired path.
The ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the path
that the driver intends to steer the vehicle and compares
it to the actual path of the vehicle. When the actual path
does not match the intended path, the ESC applies the
brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting
the condition of over-steer or under-steer.
•
Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
•
Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
ESC Off Indicator Light
The “ESC Off Indicator Light” (located in the
instrument cluster) starts to flash as soon as the
tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes
active. The “ESC Off Indicator Light” also
flashes when TCS is active. If the “ESC Off Indicator
Light” begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 339
accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure
to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road
conditions.
WARNING!
•
The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot pre-
vent the natural laws of physics from acting on the
vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by
prevailing road conditions.
•
ESC cannot prevent accidents, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on
very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. Only a
safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent
accidents.
•
The capabilities of an ESC-equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner, which could jeopardize the user’s safety
or the safety of others.
ESC Malfunction Indicator Light
The “ESC Malfunction Indicator Light” in the
instrument cluster will come on when the
ignition switch is turned to the ON position. It
should go out with the engine running. If the
“ESC Malfunction Indicator Light” comes on continu-
ously with the engine running, a malfunction has been
detected in the ESC system. If this light remains on after
several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven
several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph
(48 km/h), see your authorized dealer as soon as possible
to have the problem diagnosed and corrected.
NOTE:
•
The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC Malfunc-
tion Indicator Light” come on momentarily each time
the ignition switch is turned ON.
•
Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESC system
will be ON even if it was turned off previously.
340 STARTING AND OPERATING
•
The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop
when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver
that caused the ESC activation.
ESC Operating Modes
Depending upon model and mode of operation, the ESC
system has up to three operating modes: “ESC On”
“Partial Off,” and “Full Off.”
ESC On — Two-Wheel Drive Vehicles and Four-Wheel
Drive Vehicles in 2WD and 4WD High Range
This is the normal operating mode for ESC when oper-
ating a two-wheel drive vehicle. It is also the normal
mode for operating a four-wheel drive vehicle in 2WD or
4WD HIGH range. The ESC system will be in “ESC On”
mode whenever the vehicle is started or the transfer case
(if equipped) is shifted out of 4WD LOW range. This
mode should be used for most driving situations. ESC
should only be turned to “Partial Off” or “Full Off” for
specific reasons as noted. Refer to “Partial Off” and to
“Full Off” for additional information.
Partial Off — Two-Wheel Drive Vehicles and
Four-Wheel Drive Vehicles in 2WD and 4WD High
Range
The “Partial Off” mode is intended for driving in deep
snow, sand, or gravel. This mode raises the threshold for
TCS and ESC activation, which allows for more wheel
spin than what ESC normally allows.
The “ESC Off” button is located in the lower switch bank
below the climate control. To enter the “Partial Off”
mode, momentarily press the “ESC Off” button and the
⬙ESC Off Indicator Light” will illuminate. To turn the ESC
on again, momentarily press the ⬙ESC Off⬙button and the
⬙ESC Off Indicator Light” will turn off. This will restore
the normal “ESC On” mode of operation.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 341
NOTE: To improve the vehicle’s traction when driving
with snow chains, or when starting off in deep snow,
sand, or gravel, it may be desirable to switch to the
“Partial Off” mode by momentarily pressing the “ESC
Off” button. Once the situation requiring “Partial Off”
mode is overcome, turn ESC back on by momentarily
pressing the “ESC Off” button. This may be done while
the vehicle is in motion.
Full Off — Four-Wheel Drive Vehicles in 4WD High
and 4WD Low Range
The “Full Off” mode is intended for off-highway and
off-road use when ESC stability features could inhibit
vehicle maneuverability due to trail conditions.
The “ESC Off” button is located in the lower switch bank
below the climate control panel. To enter “Full Off”
mode, press and hold the “ESC Off” button for five
seconds while the vehicle is stopped with the engine
running. After five seconds, the “ESC Off Indicator
Light” will illuminate and an “ESC OFF” message will
appear in the odometer. Press and release the trip odom-
eter button located on the instrument cluster to turn off
this message.
In this mode, ESC and TCS are turned off (except for the
“limited slip” feature described in the TCS section) until
the vehicle reaches a speed of 40 mph (64 km/k). At
speeds over 40 mph (64 km/k), the system automatically
switches to “Partial Off” mode, described above. When
the vehicle speed returns to less than 35 mph (56 km/h),
the ESC system will return to “Full Off” mode. The “ESP
Off Indicator Light” is always illuminated when ESC is
off. To turn ESC on again, momentarily press the “ESC
Off” button. This will restore the normal “ESC On” mode
of operation.
342 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
•
“Full Off” is the only operating mode for ESC in 4WD
LOW range. The ESC system will be in this mode
whenever the vehicle is started in 4WD LOW range or
the transfer case is shifted into 4WD LOW range.
•
The “ESC OFF” message will display and a chime will
sound when the shift lever is moved from any position
to the PARK position and then moved out of the PARK
position. This will occur even if the message was
cleared previously.
WARNING!
With the ESC switched off, the enhanced vehicle
stability offered by ESC is unavailable. In an emer-
gency evasive maneuver, the ESC system will not
engage to assist in maintaining stability. “Full Off”
mode is only intended for off-highway or off-road
use.
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
Tire Markings
1 — U.S. DOT Safety Stan-
dards Code (TIN) 4 — Maximum Load
2 — Size Designation 5 — Maximum Pressure
3 — Service Description 6 — Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 343
NOTE:
•
P (Passenger) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa-
tion. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
•
European-Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with
the section width. The letter ⬙P⬙is absent from this tire
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
•
LT (Light Truck) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preced-
ing the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
•
Temporary spare tires are high-pressure compact
spares designed for temporary emergency use only.
Tires designed to this standard have the letter “T”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa-
tion. Example: T145/80D18 103M.
•
High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design
standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded
into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
344 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Size Designation:
P= Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ= Passenger car tire based on European design standards
LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards
T= Temporary spare tire
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
— Ratio of section height to section width of tire
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R= Construction code
—⬙R⬙means radial construction
—⬙D⬙means diagonal or bias construction
15 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 345
EXAMPLE:
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
— A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H= Speed Symbol
— A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding
to its load index under certain operating conditions
— The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under
specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and
posted speed limits)
Load Identification:
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ= Absence of any text on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire
Extra Load (XL) = Extra load (or reinforced) tire
Light Load = Light load tire
C,D,E= Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load — Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure — Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for
this tire
346 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire,
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires
with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the
date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire.
Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall
tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on
the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard
side of the tire.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
— This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire
safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
—03 means the 3rd week.
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
—01 means the year 2001
— Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the
year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 347
Tire Loading and Tire Pressure
Tire Placard Location
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed
on the driver’s side B-Pillar.
Tire and Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information about
the:
1) number of people that can be carried in the vehicle
2) total weight your vehicle can carry
3) tire size designed for your vehicle
4) cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and
spare tires.
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You
will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you
adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire
inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading
Information placard and in the “Vehicle Loading” section
of this manual.
Tire and Loading Information Placard
348 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,
gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear
axles must not be exceeded. For further information on
GAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to
“Vehicle Loading” in this section.
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or
XXX kg” on the Tire and Loading Information placard.
The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and
trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed
the weight referenced here.
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occu-
pants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX kg”
on your vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas-
sengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg.
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if “XXX”
amount equals 1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will be five
150 lb (68 kg) passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs
(295 kg) (since 5 x 150 = 750, and 1400 – 750 = 650 lbs
[295 kg]).
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 349
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo
being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this
manual to determine how this reduces the available
cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
NOTE:
•
The following table shows examples on how to calcu-
late total load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities
of your vehicle with varying seating configurations
and number and size of occupants. This table is for
illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for
the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
•
For the following example, the combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs
(392 kg).
350 STARTING AND OPERATING
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 351
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never
overload them.
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Three primary
areas are affected by improper tire pressure:
Safety
WARNING!
•
Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause accidents.
•
Under-inflation increases tire flexing and can re-
sult in over-heating and tire failure.
•
Over-inflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can
cause damage that result in tire failure.
•
Unequal tire pressures can cause steering prob-
lems. You could lose control of your vehicle.
•
Over-inflated or under-inflated tires can affect
vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting
in loss of vehicle control.
(Continued)
352 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Unequal tire pressures from one side of the ve-
hicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to
the right or left.
•
Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom-
mended cold tire inflation pressure.
Economy
Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear
patterns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal
wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for
earlier tire replacement. Under-inflation also increases
tire rolling resistance and results in higher fuel
consumption.
Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable
ride. Both under-inflation and over-inflation affect the
stability of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of
sluggish response or over responsiveness in the steering.
Unequal tire pressures can cause erratic and unpredict-
able steering response.
Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the
vehicle to drift left or right.
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
driver’s side “B” Pillar.
The pressure should be checked and adjusted, as well as
inspected for signs of tire wear or visible damage, at least
once a month. Use a good quality pocket-type gauge to
check tire pressure. Do not make a visual judgement
when determining proper inflation. Radial tires may look
properly inflated even when they are under-inflated.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 353
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, al-
ways reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent
moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem,
which could damage it.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
cold tire inflation pressure. Cold tire inflation pressure is
defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been
driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile
(1.6 km) after a three-hour period. The cold tire inflation
pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pres-
sure molded into the tire sidewall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with
temperature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
the winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the
outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire
inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this
outside temperature condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
build-up, or your tire pressure will be too low.
354 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or condi-
tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle
loading may be required for high-speed vehicle opera-
tion. Refer to original equipment or an authorized tire
dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading
and cold tire inflation pressures.
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle at or above
maximum load is dangerous. The added strain on
your tires could cause them to fail. You could have a
serious accident. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the
maximum capacity at continuous speeds above
75 mph (120 km/h).
Radial-Ply Tires
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires
on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle
poorly. The instability could cause an accident. Al-
ways use radial tires in sets of four. Never combine
them with other types of tires.
Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in
the tread area because of sidewall flexing. Consult your
authorized dealer for radial tire repairs.
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use with
radial tires. It is engineered to be used on your style
vehicle only. Since this tire has limited tread life, the
original tire should be repaired (or replaced) and rein-
stalled at the first opportunity.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 355
WARNING!
Temporary use spare tires are for emergency use only.
With these tires, do not drive more than 50 mph
(80 km/h). Temporary use spare tires have limited
tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear
indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to be
replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, which
apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result in
spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare.
Do not install more than one compact spare tire/wheel
on the vehicle at any given time.
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take
your vehicle through an automatic car wash with the
compact spare installed. Damage to the vehicle may
result.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not
spin your vehicle’s wheels above 35 mph (55 km/h).
356 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-
ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam-
age or failure. A tire could explode and injure some-
one. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than
35 mph (55 km/h) when you are stuck, and do not let
anyone near a spinning wheel no matter what the
speed.
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires
to help you in determining when your tires should be
replaced.
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
becomes 1/16 in (2 mm). When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the tire should be replaced.
1—WornTire
2—NewTire
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 357
CAUTION!
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles de-
pends on tires of equal size, type and circumference
on each wheel. Any difference in tire size can cause
damage to the transfer case. Tire rotation schedule
should be followed to balance tire wear.
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon various
factors including but not limited to:
•
Driving style
•
Tire pressure
•
Distance driven
WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure.
You could lose control and have an accident resulting
in serious injury or death.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact
with oil, grease, and gasoline.
358 STARTING AND OPERATING
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure. The manu-
facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva-
lent to the originals in size, quality and performance
when replacement is needed. (Refer to the paragraph on
“Tread Wear Indicators”). Refer to the “Tire and Loading
Information” placard for the size designation of your
tires. The service description and load identification will
be found on the original equipment tire. Failure to use
equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the
safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle. We recommend
that you contact your original equipment or an autho-
rized tire dealer with any questions you may have on tire
specifications or capability.
WARNING!
•
Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than
that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations
of unapproved tires and wheels may change sus-
pension dimensions and performance characteris-
tics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and
braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredict-
able handling and stress to steering and suspen-
sion components. You could lose control and have
an accident resulting in serious injury or death.
Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings
approved for your vehicle.
•
Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity than what was originally equipped on
your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load index
could result in tire overloading and failure. You
could lose control and have an accident.
(Continued)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 359
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
may result in false speedometer and odometer read-
ings.
TIRE CHAINS
Use only compact chains, or other traction aids that meet
SAE type “Class S” specifications. Chains must be the
proper size for the vehicle, as recommended by the chain
manufacturer. In addition, only install tire chains on
P225/75R16 or smaller tires.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to your vehicle, tires, or chains,
observe the following precautions:
•
Do not use tire chains on vehicles equipped with
tires other than P225/75R16 or smaller tires. There
may not be adequate clearance for the chains and
you are risking structural or body damage to your
vehicle.
•
Because of limited chain clearance between tires
and other suspension components, it is important
that only chains in good condition are used. Bro-
ken chains can cause serious vehicle damage. Stop
the vehicle immediately if noise occurs that could
suggest chain breakage. Remove the damaged
parts of the chain before further use.
(Continued)
360 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION! (Continued)
•
Install chains on the rear wheels as tightly as
possible and then retighten after driving about
1
⁄
2
mile (0.8 km).
•
Do not exceed 45 mph (72 km/h).
•
Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large
bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.
•
Use on Rear Wheels only.
•
Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry pave-
ment.
•
Observe the tire chain manufacturer’s instructions
on method of installation, operating speed, and
conditions for use. Always use the lower sug-
gested operating speed of the chain manufacturer
if different from the speed recommended by the
manufacturer.
These cautions apply to all chain traction devices, includ-
ing link and cable (radial) chains.
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at
different loads and perform different steering, handling,
and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at
unequal rates, and develop irregular wear patterns.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 361
The suggested rotation method is the “forward-cross”
shown in the following diagram.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.
The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with
aggressive tread designs such as those on On/Off Road
type tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to main-
tain mud, snow, and wet traction levels, and contribute to
a smooth, quiet ride.
CAUTION!
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles de-
pends on tires of equal size, type and circumference
on each wheel. Any difference in tire size can cause
damage to the transfer case. Tire rotation schedule
should be followed to balance tire wear.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” in Section 8 for the
proper maintenance intervals. Remember, more frequent
rotation is permissible if desired. Also, correct for any-
thing causing rapid or unusual wear prior to performing
the tire rotation.
Tire Rotation
362 STARTING AND OPERATING
TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS)
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) will warn the
driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recom-
mended cold placard pressure.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about
1 psi (6.9 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that
when the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure
will decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based
on cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire
pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least
three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a
three hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure must
not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into
the tire sidewall. Refer to the “Tires – General Informa-
tion” in this section for information on how to properly
inflate the vehicle’s tires. The tire pressure will also
increase as the vehicle is driven. This is normal and there
should be no adjustment for this increased pressure.
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if
the tire pressure falls below the low-pressure warning
limit for any reason, including low temperature effects
and natural pressure loss through the tire.
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire
pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn
off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended
cold placard pressure. Once the low tire pressure warn-
ing (Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light) illuminates,
you must increase the tire pressure to the recommended
cold placard pressure in order for the “Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light” to turn off. The system will
automatically update and the “Tire Pressure Monitoring
Telltale Light” will turn off once the system receives the
updated tire pressures. The vehicle may need to be
driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (25 km/h) in
order for the TPMS to receive this information.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 363
For example, your vehicle may have a recommended
cold (parked for more than three hours) placard pressure
of 33 psi (227 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F
(20°C) and the measured tire pressure is 28 psi (193 kPa),
a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire
pressure to approximately 24 psi (165 kPa). This tire
pressure is low enough to turn ON the “Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light.” Driving the vehicle may cause
the tire pressure to rise to approximately 28 psi (193 kPa),
but the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will still
be on. In this situation, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring
Telltale Light” will turn off only after the tires are inflated
to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure
value.
CAUTION!
•
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system
operation or sensor damage may result when us-
ing replacement equipment that is not of the same
size, type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can
cause sensor damage. Do not use aftermarket tire
sealants or balance beads if your vehicle is
equipped with a TPMS, as damage to the sensors
may result.
•
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure,
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve
stem, which could damage the Tire Pressure Moni-
toring Sensor.
364 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
•
The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care
and maintenance, or to provide warning of a tire
failure or condition.
•
The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge
while adjusting your tire pressure.
•
Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes
the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
•
The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte-
nance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure
gauge, even if under-inflation has not reached the
level to trigger illumination of the “Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light.”
•
Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure,
and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in
the tire.
Base System
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure
readings to the receiver module.
NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the
tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly
and to maintain the proper pressure.
The TPMS consists of the following components:
•
Receiver Module
•
Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
•
Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 365
The matching full-size spare wheel and tire assembly (if
equipped) has a tire pressure monitoring sensor. The
matching full-size spare can be used in place of any of the
four road tires. The TPMS will only monitor the pressure
in the full-size spare when it is used in place of a road
tire. Otherwise, a spare with a pressure below the low-
pressure limit will not cause the “Tire Pressure Monitor-
ing Telltale Light” to illuminate or the chime to sound.
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will
illuminate in the instrument cluster and a chime
will sound when tire pressure is low in one or
more of the four active road tires. Should this occur, you
should stop as soon as possible, check the inflation
pressure of each tire on your vehicle, and inflate each tire
to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure
value. Once the system receives the updated tire pres-
sures, the system will automatically update and the “Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn off. The
vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (25 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this
information.
Check TPMS Warning
When a system fault is detected, the “Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light” will flash on and off for
75 seconds and then remain on solid. The system fault
will also sound a chime. If the ignition key is cycled, this
sequence will repeat, providing the system fault still
exists. The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will
turn off when the fault condition no longer exists. A
system fault can occur due to any of the following:
1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPMS
sensors.
2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting
that affects radio wave signals.
366 STARTING AND OPERATING
3. Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel
housings.
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS sensors.
Vehicles with Full-Size Spare
1. The matching full-size spare wheel and tire assembly
has a tire pressure monitoring sensor that can be moni-
tored by the TPMS.
2. If you install the full-size spare in place of a road tire
that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning limit,
a chime will sound and the “TPMS Telltale Light” will
turn on upon the next ignition key cycle.
3. Driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
(25 km/h) will turn off the “TPMS Telltale Light,” as long
as no tire pressure is below the low-pressure warning
limit in any of the four active road tires.
Vehicles with Compact Spare
1. The compact spare tire does not have a tire pressure
monitoring sensor. Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor
the pressure in the compact spare tire.
2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road
tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning
limit, a chime will sound and the “TPMS Telltale Light”
will turn on upon the next ignition key cycle.
3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (25 km/h), the “TPMS Telltale Light” will flash
on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid.
4. For each subsequent ignition key cycle, a chime will
sound and the “TPMS Telltale Light” will flash on and off
for 75 seconds and then remain on solid.
5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire and
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare,
the TPMS will update automatically and the “TPMS
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 367
Telltale Light” will turn off, as long as no tire pressure is
below the low-pressure warning limit in any of the four
active road tires. The vehicle may need to be driven for
up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (25 km/h) in order for the
TPMS to receive this information.
Premium System — If Equipped
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure
readings to the receiver module.
NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the
tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly
and to maintain the proper pressure.
The TPMS consists of the following components:
•
Receiver Module
•
Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
•
Three Trigger Modules (mounted in three of the four
wheel-wells)
•
Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System messages,
which display in the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC)
•
Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly (if
equipped) has a tire pressure monitoring sensor. The full
size spare can be used in place of any of the four road
tires. A spare with a pressure below the low-pressure
limit will not cause the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light” to illuminate or the chime to sound. However, it
will cause a “SPARE LOW PRESSURE” message to
display in the EVIC.
368 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will
illuminate in the instrument cluster and a chime
will sound when tire pressure is low in one or
more of the four active road tires. In addition, the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) will display
a graphic showing the pressure values of each tire with
the low tire pressure values flashing.
Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible
and inflate the tires with low pressure (those flashing in
the EVIC graphic) to the vehicle’s recommended cold
placard pressure value. Once the system receives the
updated tire pressures, the system will automatically
update, the graphic display in the EVIC will stop flash-
ing, and the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light”
will turn off. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to
20 minutes above 15 mph (25 km/h) in order for the
TPMS to receive this information.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 369
Check TPMS Warning
When a system fault is detected, the “Tire Pressure Moni-
toring Telltale Light” will flash on and off for 75 seconds
and then remain on solid. The system fault will also sound
a chime. In addition, the EVIC will display a ⬙CHECK TPM
SYSTEM⬙message for three seconds and then display
dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value to indicate which
sensor is not being received.
If the ignition key is cycled, this sequence will repeat,
providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault
no longer exists, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light” will no longer flash, and the ⬙CHECK TPM
SYSTEM⬙message will no longer display, and a pressure
value will display in place of the dashes. A system fault
can occur due to any of the following:
1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPMS
sensors.
2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting
that affects radio wave signals.
3. Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel
housings.
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS sensors.
370 STARTING AND OPERATING
Vehicles with Full-Size Spare
1. The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly
has a tire pressure monitoring sensor that can be moni-
tored by the TPMS.
2. If you install the full size spare in place of a road tire
that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning limit,
a chime will sound and the “TPMS Telltale Light” will
turn on upon the next ignition key cycle. In addition, the
EVIC will display a Low Pressure message and a graphic
showing the low tire pressure value flashing.
3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (25 km/h) the “TPMS Telltale Light” will turn
OFF, as long as no tire pressure is below the low-pressure
warning limit in any of the four active road tires.
4. The EVIC will display a graphic showing the tire
pressure value in place of the flashing low tire pressure
value. The EVIC will also display a “SPARE LOW
PRESSURE” message to remind you to service the flat
tire.
Vehicles with Compact Spare
1. The compact spare tire does not have a tire pressure
monitoring sensor. Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor
the pressure in the compact spare tire.
2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road
tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning
limit, upon the next ignition key cycle, the “TPMS Telltale
Light” will remain on and a chime will sound. In
addition, the graphic in the EVIC will still display a
flashing pressure value.
3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (25 km/h), the “TPMS Telltale Light” will flash
on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. In
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 371
addition, the EVIC will display a ⬙CHECK TPM SYS-
TEM⬙message for three seconds and then display dashes
(- -) in place of the pressure value.
4. For each subsequent ignition key cycle, a chime will
sound, the “TPMS Telltale Light” will flash on and off for
75 seconds and then remain on solid, and the EVIC will
display a ⬙CHECK TPM SYSTEM⬙message for three
seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of the
pressure value.
5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire and
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare,
the TPMS will update automatically. In addition, the
“TPMS Telltale Light” will turn off and the graphic in the
EVIC will display a new pressure value instead of dashes
(- -), as long as no tire pressure is below the low-pressure
warning limit in any of the four active road tires. The
vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (25 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this
information.
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
•
This device may not cause harmful interference.
•
This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
The tire pressure sensors are covered under one of the
following licenses:
United States ..................... KR5S120123
Canada ........................2671-S120123
372 STARTING AND OPERATING
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
All engines are designed to meet all emis-
sions regulations and provide excellent
fuel economy and performance when us-
ing high quality unleaded “regular” gaso-
line having an octane rating of 87. The use
of premium gasoline is not recommended,
as it will not provide any benefit over regular gasoline in
these engines.
Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to
your engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at
high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is
required. Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such
as hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experi-
ence these symptoms, try another brand of gasoline
before considering service for the vehicle.
Over 40 auto manufacturers worldwide have issued and
endorsed consistent gasoline specifications (the World-
wide Fuel Charter, WWFC) which define fuel properties
necessary to deliver enhanced emissions, performance,
and durability for your vehicle. The manufacturer recom-
mends the use of gasoline that meets the WWFC speci-
fications if they are available.
Reformulated Gasoline
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline.”
Reformulated gasolines contain oxygenates, and are spe-
cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and im-
prove air quality.
The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gaso-
lines. Properly blended reformulated gasolines will pro-
vide excellent performance and durability of engine and
fuel system components.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 373
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy-
genates such as 10% ethanol, MTBE, and ETBE. Oxygen-
ates are required in some areas of the country during the
winter months to reduce carbon monoxide emissions.
Fuels blended with these oxygenates may be used in
your vehicle.
CAUTION!
DO NOT use gasolines containing Methanol or E85
Ethanol. Use of these blends may result in starting
and drivability problems and may damage critical
fuel system components.
Problems that result from using methanol/gasoline or
E85 Ethanol blends are not the responsibility of the
manufacturer. While MTBE is an oxygenate made from
Methanol, it does not have the negative effects of
Methanol.
E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles
Non-FFV vehicles are compatible with gasoline contain-
ing 10% ethanol (E10). Gasoline with higher ethanol
content may void the vehicle’s warranty.
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85
fuel, the engine will have some or all of these symptoms:
•
operate in a lean mode
•
OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on
•
poor engine performance
•
poor cold start and cold drivability
•
increased risk for fuel system component corrosion
To fix a Non-FFV vehicle inadvertently fueled once with
E-85 perform the following:
•
drain the fuel tank (see your authorized dealer)
•
change the engine oil and oil filter
374 STARTING AND OPERATING
•
disconnect and reconnect the battery to reset the
engine controller memory
More extensive repairs will be required for prolonged
exposure to E-85 fuel.
MMT In Gasoline
MMT is a manganese containing metallic additive that is
blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline
blended with MMT provides no performance advantage
beyond gasoline of the same octane number without
MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug
life and reduces emission system performance in some
vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline
without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content
of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump;
therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether
the gasoline contains MMT. It is even more important to
look for gasolines without MMT in Canada, because
MMT can be used at levels higher than those allowed in
the United States. MMT is prohibited in Federal and
California reformulated gasoline.
Materials Added To Fuel
All gasoline sold in the United States is required to
contain effective detergent additives. Use of additional
detergents or other additives is not needed under normal
conditions and they would result in additional cost.
Therefore, you should not have to add anything to the
fuel.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 375
Fuel System Cautions
CAUTION!
Use the following guidelines to maintain your vehi-
cle’s performance:
•
The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law.
Using leaded gasoline can impair engine perfor-
mance, and damage the emission control system.
•
An out-of-tune engine, or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions, can cause the catalytic converter to
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune
or malfunctioning and may require immediate
service. Contact your authorized dealer for service
assistance.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
•
The use of fuel additives, which are now being
sold as octane enhancers, is not recommended.
Most of these products contain high concentra-
tions of methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle
performance problems resulting from the use of
such fuels or additives is not the responsibility of
the manufacturer.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
376 STARTING AND OPERATING
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon
monoxide poisoning.
•
Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can
kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as
a garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the
vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine
running for more than a short period, adjust the
ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into
the vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Guard against carbon monoxide with proper
maintenance. Have the exhaust system inspected
every time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnor-
mal conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired,
drive with all side windows fully open.
•
Keep the liftgate closed when driving your vehicle
to prevent carbon monoxide and other poisonous
exhaust gases from entering the vehicle.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 377
ADDING FUEL
Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)
The gas cap is located behind the fuel filler door, on the
driver’s side of the vehicle. If the gas cap is lost or
damaged, be sure the replacement cap has been designed
for use with this vehicle.
CAUTION!
•
Damage to the fuel system or emission control
system could result from using an improper fuel
cap (gas cap). A poorly fitting cap could let impu-
rities into the fuel system. Also, a poorly fitting
aftermarket cap can cause the “Malfunction Indi-
cator Light (MIL)” to illuminate, due to fuel vapors
escaping from the system.
•
A poorly fitting gas cap may cause the MIL to turn
on.
•
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling.
Fuel Filler Cap
378 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
•
Never have any smoking materials lit in or near
the vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the
tank filled.
•
Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is
in violation of most state and federal fire regula-
tions and will cause the MIL to turn on.
•
A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You
could be burned. Always place gas containers on
the ground while filling.
NOTE:
•
When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel
tank is full.
•
Tighten the gas cap about one quarter turn until you
hear one click. This is an indication that the cap is
properly tightened.
•
If the gas cap is not tightened properly, the MIL will
come on. Be sure the gas cap is tightened every time
the vehicle is refueled.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel
filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a
gASCAP” message will display in the odometer or a
“CHECK GASCAP” message will be displayed in the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center” in Section 4 of
this manual. Tighten the fuel filler cap until a “clicking”
sound is heard. This is an indication that the fuel filler
cap is properly tightened. Refer to “Onboard Diagnostic
System — OBD II” in Section 7.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 379
VEHICLE LOADING
Certification Label
As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Admin-
istration regulations, your vehicle has a certification label
affixed to the driver’s side door or B-Pillar.
This label contains the month and year of manufacture,
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) front and rear, and Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN). A Month-Day-Hour (MDH) number is
included on this label and indicates the month, day, and
hour of manufacture. The bar code that appears on the
bottom of the label is your VIN.
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle
including driver, passengers, vehicle, options, trailer
tongue weight, and cargo. The label also specifies maxi-
mum capacities of front and rear axle systems (GAWR).
Total load must be limited, so GVWR, and front and rear
GAWR are not exceeded.
Payload
The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable load
weight a truck can carry, including the weight of the
driver, all passengers, options and cargo.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the front
and rear axles. The load must be distributed in the cargo
area so that the GAWR of each axle is not exceeded.
Each axle’s GAWR is determined by the components in
the system with the lowest load carrying capacity (axle,
springs, tires, or wheels). Heavier axles or suspension
components, sometimes specified by purchasers for in-
creased durability, does not necessarily increase the ve-
hicle’s GVWR.
380 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Size
The tire size on the label represents the actual tire size on
your vehicle. Replacement tires must be equal to the load
capacity of this tire size.
Rim Size
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size
listed.
Inflation Pressure
This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for
all loading conditions up to full GAWR.
Curb Weight
The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight
of the vehicle with all fluids, including vehicle fuel, at full
capacity conditions, and with no occupants or cargo
loaded into the vehicle. The front and rear curb weight
values are determined by weighing your vehicle on a
commercial scale before any occupants or cargo are
added.
Loading
The actual total weight and the weight of the front and
rear of your vehicle at the ground can best be determined
by weighing it when it is loaded and ready for operation.
The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a commer-
cial scale to ensure that the GVWR has not been ex-
ceeded. The weight on the front and rear of the vehicle
should then be determined separately to be sure that the
load is properly distributed over front and rear axle.
Weighing the vehicle may show that the GAWR of either
the front or rear axles has been exceeded, but the total
load is within the specified GVWR. If so, weight must be
shifted from front to rear, or rear to front, as appropriate
until the specified weight limitations are met. Store the
heavier items down low and be sure that the weight is
distributed equally. Stow all loose items securely before
driving.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 381
Improper weight distributions can have an adverse affect
on the way your vehicle steers and handles, and the way
the brakes operate.
CAUTION!
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR
or the maximum front and rear GAWR. If you do,
parts on your vehicle can break, or it can change the
way your vehicle handles. This could cause you to
lose control. Also, overloading can shorten the life of
your vehicle.
TRAILER TOWING
In this section, you will find safety tips and information
on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do
with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully
review this information to tow your load as efficiently
and safely as possible.
To maintain warranty coverage, follow the requirements
and recommendations in this manual concerning ve-
hicles used for trailer towing.
Common Towing Definitions
The following trailer towing related definitions will assist
you in understanding the following information:
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, cargo, and tongue
weight. The total load must be limited so that you do not
exceed the GVWR.
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all
cargo, consumables, and equipment (permanent or tem-
porary) loaded in or on the trailer in its ⬙loaded and
ready for operation⬙condition. The recommended way to
382 STARTING AND OPERATING
measure GTW is to put your fully loaded trailer on a
vehicle scale. The entire weight of the trailer must be
supported by the scale.
WARNING!
If the Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) is 3,500 lbs
(1 587 kg) or more, it is mandatory to use a weight-
distributing hitch to ensure stable handling of your
vehicle. If you use a standard weight- carrying hitch,
you could lose control of your vehicle and cause an
accident.
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle
and trailer when weighed in combination.
NOTE: The GCWR rating includes a 150 lbs (68 kg)
allowance for the presence of a driver.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
rear GAWR.
WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the maximum
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition
can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
control of the vehicle and have an accident.
Tongue Weight (TW)
The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the
hitch ball by the trailer. In most cases, it should not be less
than 10% or more than 15% of the trailer load. You must
consider this as part of the load on your vehicle.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 383
Frontal Area
The frontal area is the maximum height and maximum
width of the front of a trailer.
Trailer Sway Control — Mechanical
The trailer sway control is a telescoping link that can be
installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue
that typically provides adjustable friction associated with
the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer
swaying motions while traveling.
Weight-Carrying Hitch
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue
weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or
some other connecting point of the vehicle. These kinds
of hitches are the most popular on the market today and
they are commonly used to tow small- and medium-
sized trailers.
Weight-Distributing Hitch
A weight-distributing system works by applying lever-
age through spring (load) bars. They are typically used
for heavier loads, to distribute trailer tongue weight to
the tow vehicle’s front axle and the trailer axle(s). When
used in accordance with the manufacturers’ directions, it
provides for a more level ride, offering more consistent
steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing
safety. The addition of a friction/hydraulic sway control
also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and
contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability.
Trailer sway control and a weight distributing (load
equalizing) hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue
Weights (TW) and may be required depending on Vehicle
and Trailer configuration/loading to comply with Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) requirements.
384 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
•
An improperly adjusted Weight Distributing
Hitch system may reduce handling, stability, brak-
ing performance, and could result in an accident.
•
Weight Distributing Systems may not be compat-
ible with Surge Brake Couplers. Consult with your
hitch and trailer manufacturer or a reputable Rec-
reational Vehicle dealer for additional
information.
Without Weight Distributing Hitch (Incorrect)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 385
With Weight Distributing Hitch (Correct) Improper Adjustment of Weight-Distributing Hitch
(Incorrect)
386 STARTING AND OPERATING
Trailer Hitch Classification
Your vehicle is capable of towing trailers up to 2,000 lbs
(907 kg) without added equipment or alterations to the
standard equipment. Your vehicle may be factory
equipped for safe towing of trailers weighing over
2,000 lbs (907 kg) with the optional Trailer Tow Prep
Package. See your authorized dealer for package content.
The following chart provides the industry standard for
the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can
tow. This should be used to assist you in selecting the
correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer
Weight Ratings)” chart for the Max. GTW towable for
your given drivetrain.
Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions
Class Max. Trailer Hitch Industry
Standards
Class I - Light Duty 2,000 lbs (907 kg)
Class II - Medium
Duty
3,500 lbs (1 587 kg)
Class III - Heavy Duty 5,000 lbs (2 268 kg)
Class IV - Extra
Heavy Duty
10,000 lbs (4 540 kg)
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum
Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given
drivetrain.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on
your vehicle.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 387
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)
The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain.
Engine/
Transmission
Model Frontal Area Max. GTW
(Gross Trailer Wt.)
Tongue Wt. (See Note)
3.7L/Automatic 4x2 32 sq ft (2.97 sq m) 2,000 lbs (907 kg) 200 lbs (91 kg)
3.7L/Automatic 4x4 32 sq ft (2.97 sq m) 2,000 lbs (907 kg) 200 lbs (91 kg)
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
NOTE: The trailer tongue weight must be considered as
part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo, and
it should never exceed the weight referenced on the “Tire
and Loading Information” placard. Refer to “Tire–Safety
Information” in this section.
388 STARTING AND OPERATING
When Towing Trailers with Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) between 3,500 Lbs (1 588 kg) and 5,000 Lbs
(2 268 kg)
The following chart provides maximum trailer weight ratings towable for the following engine/transmission
combinations, ONLY if using a weight distributing hitch.
Engine/
Transmission
Model Frontal Area Max. GTW
(Gross Trailer Wt.)
Tongue Wt. (See Note)
3.7L/Automatic
w/Trailer Tow
Package
4x2 64 sq ft (5.94 sq m) 5,000 lbs (2 268 kg) 500 lbs (227 kg)
3.7L/Automatic
w/Trailer Tow
package
4x4 64 sq ft (5.94 sq m) 5,000 lbs (2 268 kg) 500 lbs (227 kg)
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
NOTE: The trailer tongue weight must be considered as
part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo, and
it should never exceed the weight referenced on the “Tire
and Loading Information” placard. Refer to “Tire–Safety
Information” in this section.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 389
Trailer and Tongue Weight
Always load a trailer with 60% to 65% of the weight in
the front of the trailer. This places 10% to 15% of the
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) on the tow hitch of your
vehicle. Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the
rear can cause the trailer to sway severely side to side
which will cause loss of control of vehicle and trailer.
Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of
many trailer accidents.
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on
your bumper or trailer hitch.
Consider the following items when computing the
weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:
•
The tongue weight of the trailer.
•
The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment
put in or on your vehicle.
•
The weight of the driver and all passengers.
390 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options, or authorized dealer-installed
options, must be considered as part of the total load on
your vehicle. Refer to the “Tire and Loading Information”
placard for the maximum combined weight of occupants
and cargo for your vehicle.
Towing Requirements
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drive-
train components, the following guidelines are recom-
mended:
CAUTION!
•
Avoid towing a trailer for the first 500 miles
(805 km) of vehicle operation. Doing so may dam-
age your vehicle.
•
During the first 500 miles (805 km) of trailer
towing, limit your speed to 50 mph (80 km/h).
WARNING!
Improper towing can lead to an injury accident.
Follow these guidelines to make your trailer towing
as safe as possible:
•
Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer
and that is will not shift during travel. When
trailering cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic
load shifts can occur that may be difficult for the
driver to control. You could lose control of your
vehicle and have an accident.
•
When hauling cargo, or towing a trailer, do not
overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can
cause a loss of control, poor performance, or dam-
age to brakes, axle, engine, transmission, steering,
suspension, chassis structure, or tires.
(Continued)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 391
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Safety chains must always be used between your
vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to
the frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch.
Cross the chains under the trailer tongue and
allow enough slack for turning corners.
•
Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a
grade. When parking, apply the parking brake on
the tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle transmission
in PARK. Always, block or ⴖchockⴖthe trailer
wheels.
•
GCWR must not be exceeded.
•
Total weight must be distributed between the tow
vehicle and the trailer such that the following four
ratings are not exceeded:
1. GVWR
2. GTW
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
3. GAWR
4. Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized
(This requirement may limit the ability to always
achieve the 10% to 15% range of tongue weight as a
percentage of total trailer weight).
Towing Requirements — Tires
−
Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact
spare tire.
−
Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe
and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to
“Tires–General Information” in this section for infor-
mation on tire pressures and for proper tire inflation
procedures.
−
Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pres-
sures before trailer usage.
392 STARTING AND OPERATING
−
Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage
before towing a trailer. Refer to “Tires–General Infor-
mation” in this section for information on tread wear
indicators and for the proper inspection procedure.
−
When replacing tires, refer to “Tires–General Informa-
tion” in this section for information on replacement
tires and for the proper tire replacement procedures.
Replacing tires with a higher load carrying capacity
will not increase the vehicle’s GVWR and GAWR
limits.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes
−
Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or
vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer.
This could cause inadequate braking and possible
personal injury.
−
An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is
required when towing a trailer with electronically
actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with
a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic
brake controller is not required.
−
Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over
1,000 lbs (454 kg) and required for trailers in excess of
2,000 lbs (907 kg).
CAUTION!
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (454 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes, and they
should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this
could lead to accelerated brake lining wear, higher
brake pedal effort, and longer stopping distances.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 393
WARNING!
•
Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle’s
hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your brake
system and cause it to fail. You might not have
brakes when you need them and could have an
accident.
•
Towing any trailer will increase your stopping
distance. When towing you should allow for addi-
tional space between your vehicle and the vehicle
in front of you. Failure to do so could result in an
accident.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights And Wiring
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,
stoplights and turn signals on the trailer are required for
motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package may include a four and seven-
pin wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer har-
ness and connector.
NOTE: Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles
wiring harness.
The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle
but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector.
Refer to the following illustrations.
394 STARTING AND OPERATING
Four-Pin Connector
1 — Female Pins 4 — Park
2 — Male Pin 5 — Left Stop/Turn
3 — Ground 6 — Right Stop/Turn
Seven-Pin Connector
1 — Battery 5 — Ground
2 — Backup Lamps 6 — Left Stop/Turn
3 — Right Stop/Turn 7 — Running Lamps
4 — Electric Brakes
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 395
Towing Tips
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping,
and backing the trailer in an area located away from
heavy traffic.
Automatic Transmission
The “D” range can be selected when towing. However, if
frequent shifting occurs while in this range, you will
want to activate the TOW/HAUL feature. Refer to “Au-
tomatic Transmission” in this section for additional in-
formation.
NOTE: Using the TOW/HAUL feature while operating
the vehicle under heavy operating conditions will im-
prove performance and extend transmission life by re-
ducing excessive shifting and heat build up. This action
will also provide better engine braking.
If you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than 45 min-
utes of continuous operation, then change the automatic
transmission fluid and filter according to the interval
specified for “police, taxi, fleet, or frequent trailer tow-
ing.” Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” in Section 8
for the proper maintenance intervals.
TOW/HAUL
To reduce potential for automatic transmission overheat-
ing, press the TOW HAUL button when driving in hilly
areas or shift the transmission to Drive position “2” on
more severe grades. Refer to “Automatic Transmission”
in this section for additional information.
Electronic Speed Control — If Equipped
−
Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
−
When using the speed control, if you experience speed
drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until
you can get back to cruising speed.
−
Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to
maximize fuel efficiency.
396 STARTING AND OPERATING
Cooling System
To reduce potential for engine and transmission over-
heating, take the following actions:
−
City Driving
When stopped for short periods of time, put transmission
in NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed.
−
Highway Driving
Reduce speed.
−
Air Conditioning
Turn off temporarily.
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
MOTORHOME, ETC.)
Towing – Two-Wheel Drive Models
Recreational towing is allowed ONLY if the driveshaft
is removed. Towing with the rear wheels on the ground
while the driveshaft is connected can result in severe
transmission damage.
Towing — Four-Wheel Drive Models
The transfer case must be shifted into NEUTRAL and the
transmission must be placed in PARK for recreational
towing. The NEUTRAL selection button is located at the
top of the transfer case switch. Shifts into and out of
transfer case NEUTRAL can take place with the selector
switch in any mode position.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 397
CAUTION!
•
The transmission must be in PARK position for
recreational towing. Failure to follow these proce-
dures can cause severe transmission and/or trans-
fer case damage.
•
Internal damage to the transmission or transfer
case will occur if a front or rear wheel lift is used
when recreational towing.
•
Before recreational towing, perform the procedure
outlined under “Shifting into NEUTRAL” to be
certain that the transfer case is fully in NEUTRAL.
Otherwise, internal damage will result.
•
Do not use a bumper mounted clamp-on tow bar
on your vehicle. The bumper face bar will be
damaged.
WARNING!
You or others could be injured if you leave the
vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the
NEUTRAL position without first fully engaging the
parking brake. The transfer case NEUTRAL position
disengages both the front driveshaft and rear drive-
shaft from the powertrain and it will allow the
vehicle to move, even if the transmission is in PARK.
The parking brake should always be applied when
the driver is not in the vehicle.
Shifting into NEUTRAL
Perform the following procedure to prepare your vehicle
for recreational towing:
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.
2. Turn OFF the engine.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position.
398 STARTING AND OPERATING
4. Press the brake pedal.
5. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
6. Use the point of a ballpoint pen or similar object to
press the recessed transfer case NEUTRAL button for
four seconds. After the shift is complete, and the NEU-
TRAL light turns on, release the NEUTRAL button.
7. Start the engine.
8. Shift the transmission into REVERSE.
9. Release the brake pedal for five seconds and ensure
that there is no vehicle movement.
10. Repeat Steps 8 and 9 with the transmission in DRIVE.
11. Turn OFF the engine.
12. Turn the ignition switch to the unlocked OFF posi-
tion.
13. Shift the transmission into PARK.
14. Attach the vehicle to a tow vehicle with a tow bar.
15. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
NOTE: Steps 1 through 5 are requirements for shifting
the transfer case. If these requirements are not met prior
to depressing the NEUTRAL selection button or while
the shift attempt is in process, then the NEUTRAL
indicator light will flash continuously until all require-
ments are met or until the NEUTRAL button is released.
The ignition switch must be in the ON position for a shift
to take place and for the position indicator lights to be
operable. If the ignition switch is not in the ON position,
the shift will not take place and no position indicator
lights will be on or flashing.
Flashing NEUTRAL position indicator light indicates
that shift requirements have not been met.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 399
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the trans-
mission is shifted into PARK with the transfer case in
NEUTRAL and the engine RUNNING. With the
transfer case in NEUTRAL, ensure that the engine is
OFF prior to shifting the transmission into PARK.
Shifting Out of NEUTRAL
Perform the following procedure to prepare your vehicle
for normal usage:
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.
2. Reconnect the negative battery cable.
3. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK position (if it
has been moved or the engine has been started).
4. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, but do not
start the engine.
5. Press the brake pedal.
6. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
7. Use the point of a ballpoint pen or similar object to
press the recessed transfer case NEUTRAL button. Re-
lease the NEUTRAL button after the NEUTRAL indicator
light turns off (approximately one second). After the
NEUTRAL button is released, the transfer case will shift
to the position identified by the selector switch.
8. Start the engine.
9. Shift the transmission into DRIVE.
10. Set the parking brake.
11. Shift the transmission into PARK.
400 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: Steps 1 through 6 are requirements for shifting
the transfer case. If these requirements are not met prior
to depressing the NEUTRAL selection button or while
the shift attempt is in process, then all of the mode
position indicator lights will flash continuously until all
requirements are met or until the NEUTRAL button is
released.
The ignition switch must be in the ON position for a shift
to take place and for the position indicator lights to be
operable. If the ignition switch in not in the ON position,
the shift will not take place and no position indicator
lights will be on or flashing.
Flashing NEUTRAL position indicator light indicates
that shift requirements have not been met.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 401
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CONTENTS
䡵Hazard Warning Flasher ................ 404
䡵If Your Engine Overheats ................ 404
䡵Jacking And Tire Changing ............... 405
▫Jack Location ....................... 406
▫Spare Tire Stowage ................... 406
▫Spare Tire Removal ................... 406
▫Preparations For Jacking ............... 407
▫Jacking Instructions ................... 408
䡵Jump-Starting ........................ 412
䡵Towing A Disabled Vehicle ............... 414
6
HAZARD WARNING FLASHER
The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located in the
switch bank below the climate controls.
Press the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning
flasher. When the switch is activated, all directional
turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming
traffic of an emergency. Press the switch a second time to
turn off the Hazard Warning flasher.
This is an emergency warning system and it should not
be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your
vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for
other motorists.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the
Hazard Warning flasher will continue to operate even
though the ignition switch is in the LOCK position.
NOTE: With extended use, the Hazard Warning flasher
may wear down your battery.
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
potential for overheating your engine by taking the
appropriate action.
•
On the highways — slow down.
•
In city traffic — while stopped, put transmission in
NEUTRAL, but do not increase engine idle speed.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads “H,”
pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with
the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops
back into the normal range. If the pointer remains on
the “H” and you hear continuous chimes, turn the
engine off immediately and call for service.
404 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down
an impending overheat condition:
•
If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C
system adds heat to the engine cooling system and
turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.
•
You can also turn the temperature control to maximum
heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control
to high. This allows the heater core to act as a
supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat
from the engine cooling system.
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
WARNING!
•
Getting under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous.
The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you.
You could be crushed. Never get any part of your
body under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need
to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a service
center where it can be raised on a lift.
•
The jack is designed to use as a tool for changing
tires only. The jack should not be used to lift the
vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle should
be jacked on a firm level surface only. Avoid ice or
slippery areas.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 405
Jack Location
The scissor-type jack and tire changing tools are located
in the cargo compartment behind a trim cover on the left
rear trim panel. The latch is located at the bottom of the
trim cover.
Spare Tire Stowage
The spare tire is stowed underneath the rear of the
vehicle and is held in place by a cable winch mechanism.
Spare Tire Removal
Fit the jack handle extension over the drive nut located in
the rear cargo area inside the vehicle. Use the lug wrench
to rotate the nut counterclockwise until the spare is on
the ground with enough slack in the cable to allow you to
pull the tire out from under the vehicle.
Jack Storage Location
406 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CAUTION!
The winch mechanism is designed for use with the
jack extension tube only. Use of an air wrench or
other power tools is not recommended and they can
damage the winch.
When the spare is clear, tilt the retainer at the end of the
cable, and pull it through the center of the wheel.
Preparations For Jacking
1. Park the vehicle on a firm level surface as far from the
edge of the roadway as possible. Avoid icy or slippery
areas.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid being hit when operating the jack
or changing the wheel.
2. Set the parking brake.
3. Place the shift lever into PARK (automatic transmis-
sion) or REVERSE (manual transmission).
4. Turn the ignition to the LOCK position.
Lowering/Raising Spare Tire
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 407
5. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
6. Block both the front and rear of the
wheel diagonally opposite of the jack-
ing position. For example, if changing
the right front tire, block the left rear
wheel.
NOTE: Passengers should not remain in the vehicle
when the vehicle is being jacked.
Jacking Instructions
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to
help prevent personal injury or damage to your
vehicle:
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Always park on a firm, level surface as far from
the edge of the roadway as possible before raising
the vehicle.
•
Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to
be raised.
•
Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic
transmission in PARK; a manual transmission in
REVERSE.
•
Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a
jack.
•
Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a
jack.
•
Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack.
•
Only use the jack in the positions indicated and
for lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
(Continued)
408 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING! (Continued)
•
If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
careful of motor traffic.
•
To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are
securely stowed, spares must be stowed with the
valve stem facing the ground.
•
Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
1. Remove spare tire.
2. Remove jack and tools from mounting bracket. As-
semble the tools by connecting the driver to the exten-
sion, and then to the lug wrench.
3. Loosen (but do not remove) the wheel lug nuts by
turning them to the left one turn while the wheel is still
on the ground.
Jack Warning Label
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 409
4. Locate the jack as shown. For the front tires, place it
(rearward) of the notch on the body weld seam behind
wheel to be changed. For the rear tires, place it under the
axle by the wheel to be changed. Position the jack handle
on the jack. Do not raise the vehicle until you are sure
the jack is fully engaged.
5. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the right.
Raise the vehicle only until the tire just clears the surface
and enough clearance is obtained to install the spare tire.
Minimum tire lift provides maximum stability.
Front Jacking Location
Rear Jacking Location
410 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make
the vehicle less stable and cause an accident. It could
slip off the jack and hurt someone near it. Raise the
vehicle only enough to remove the tire.
6. Remove the lug nuts and wheel.
7. Position the spare wheel/tire on the vehicle and install
lug nuts with the cone-shaped end toward the wheel.
Lightly tighten the nuts. To avoid the risk of forcing the
vehicle off the jack, do not tighten the nuts fully until the
vehicle has been lowered.
8. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the left,
and remove the jack and wheel blocks.
9. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the
wrench while tightening for increased leverage. Alternate
nuts until each nut has been tightened twice. The correct
wheel nut tightness is 95 ft lb (130 N·m). If in doubt about
the correct tightness, have them checked with a torque
wrench by your authorized dealer or at a service station.
10. Lower the jack to it’s fully closed position.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack, thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop, could endanger the occupants of the ve-
hicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in
the places provided.
11. Secure the tire, jack, and tools in their proper
locations.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 411
JUMP-STARTING
Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it started.
Vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission cannot
be started this way. Also, there is a greater risk of an
accident when a vehicle is being pushed or towed. If the
vehicle has a discharged battery, booster cables may be
used to obtain a start from a booster battery or the battery
in another vehicle. This type of start can be dangerous if
done improperly, so follow this procedure carefully.
WARNING!
•
Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan when-
ever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the
ignition switch is ON. You can be hurt by the fan.
•
Remove any metal jewelry such as watch bands or
bracelets that might make an inadvertent electrical
contact. You could be seriously injured.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution that can
cause serious burns; do not allow battery fluid to
contact eyes, skin or clothing. Wear safety glasses
and protect your eyes at all times. If acid splashes
in eyes or on skin, flush contaminated area imme-
diately with large quantities of water.
•
A battery generates hydrogen gas which is flam-
mable and explosive. Keep flame or spark away
from the vent holes. Do not lean over battery when
attaching clamps or allow the clamps to touch each
other.
•
Do not use a booster battery or any other booster
source that has a greater than 12 Volt system, i.e.,
do not use a 24 Volt power source.
1. Wear eye protection and remove all metal jewelry such
as watchbands or bracelets that might make an unin-
tended electrical contact.
412 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
2. When boosting from a battery in another vehicle, park
that vehicle within booster cable reach, but without
allowing the vehicles to touch.
WARNING!
Do not permit vehicles to touch each other as this
could establish a ground connection and personal
injury could result.
3. Set the parking brake, place the automatic transmis-
sion in PARK (or NEUTRAL for manual transmission),
and turn the ignition OFF for both vehicles.
4. Turn off the heater, radio and all unnecessary electrical
loads.
5. Connect one end of the jumper cable to the positive
battery post. Connect the other end of the same cable to
the positive terminal of the booster battery.
6. Connect the other cable, first to the negative terminal
of the booster battery and then to the engine ground of
the vehicle with the discharged battery. Make sure you
have a good contact on the engine ground.
WARNING!
•
Do not connect the cable to the negative post of the
discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark
could cause the battery to explode and could result
in personal injury
•
During cold weather when temperatures are be-
low the freezing point, electrolyte in a discharged
battery may freeze. Do not attempt jump-starting
because the battery could rupture or explode and
cause personal injury. Battery temperature must be
brought above freezing point before attempting a
jump-start.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 413
7. If the vehicle is equipped with Sentry Key威Immobi-
lizer, turn the ignition switch to the ON position for three
seconds before moving the ignition switch to the START
position.
8. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then start
the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery.
9. When removing the jumper cables, reverse the above
sequence exactly. Be careful of the moving belts and fan.
WARNING!
Any procedure other than above could result in:
•
Personal injury caused by electrolyte squirting out
the battery vent.
•
Personal injury or property damage due to battery
explosion.
CAUTION!
Any procedure other than above could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle
or of the immobilized vehicle.
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent
damage to your vehicle. Use of safety chains is recom-
mended. Attach towing device to main structural mem-
bers of the vehicle — not to bumpers or associated
brackets. State and local laws, applying to vehicles
under tow, must be observed.
414 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
TOWING METHODS
NOTE: When towing a 4x4 model, the transfer case must be in NEUTRAL and the transmission must be in
PARK.
Model Flat Towing (all four
wheels ON the
ground)
Flatbed Towing (all
four wheels sus-
pended OFF the
ground)
Front Wheels
Raised, Rear Wheels
on the Ground
Rear Wheels Raised,
Front Wheels on the
Ground
2 Wheel Drive Rear driveshaft must
be removed
Recommended
Method
Speed less than
30 mph (48 km/h)
and distance less
than 15 miles
(24 km)
Speed less than
30 mph (48 km/h)
and distance less
than 15 miles
(24 km)
4 Wheel Drive Transfer case must
be in NEUTRAL and
transmission must be
in PARK
Recommended
Method
NOT Permitted NOT Permitted
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 415
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵Engine Compartment — 3.7L ............. 419
䡵Onboard Diagnostic System — OBD II ...... 420
▫Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message ........... 420
䡵Emissions Inspection And Maintenance
Programs ............................ 421
䡵Replacement Parts ..................... 422
䡵Dealer Service ........................ 423
䡵Maintenance Procedures ................. 423
▫Engine Oil ......................... 424
▫Engine Oil Filter ..................... 427
▫Engine Air Cleaner Filter ............... 427
▫Maintenance-Free Battery .............. 428
▫Air Conditioner Maintenance ............ 429
▫A/C Air Filter — If Equipped ........... 430
▫Body Lubrication .................... 431
▫Windshield Wiper Blades ............... 431
▫Adding Washer Fluid ................. 432
▫Exhaust System ..................... 433
7
▫Cooling System ..................... 435
▫Brake System ....................... 441
▫Automatic Transmission ............... 443
▫Transfer Case ....................... 444
▫Front/Rear Axle Fluid ................. 445
▫Sky Slider™Top Care ................. 446
▫Appearance Care And Protection From
Corrosion .......................... 448
䡵Fuses .............................. 454
▫Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) . . . 454
䡵Replacement Bulbs .................... 461
䡵Bulb Replacement ..................... 461
▫Headlamp ......................... 461
▫Front Turn Signal And Front Side Marker
Lamp ............................. 462
▫Front Fog Lamp ..................... 463
▫Rear Tail/Stop, Turn Signal, And Back-Up
Lamp ............................. 464
䡵Fluid Capacities ...................... 465
䡵Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts ....... 466
▫Engine ............................ 466
▫Chassis ........................... 467
418 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.7L
1 — Air Cleaner Filter 6 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
2 — Engine Oil Dipstick 7 — Engine Coolant Reservoir
3 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 8 — Engine Oil Fill
4 — Integrated Power Module 9 — Coolant Pressure Cap
5 — Battery
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 419
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated Onboard
Diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors
the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic
transmission control systems. When these systems are
operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent
performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emis-
sions well within current government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL).” It
will also store diagnostic codes and other information to
assist your service technician in making repairs. Al-
though your vehicle will usually be drivable and not
need towing, see your authorized dealer for service as
soon as possible.
CAUTION!
•
Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
further damage to the emission control system. It
could also affect fuel economy and drivability. The
vehicle must be serviced before any emissions
tests can be performed.
•
If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running,
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel
filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a
“gASCAP” message will display in the odometer or a
“CHECK GASCAP” message will be displayed in the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center” in Section 4 of
420 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
this manual. Tighten the gas cap until a ⬙clicking⬙sound
is heard. This is an indication that the gas cap is properly
tightened.
Press the odometer reset button to turn the message off.
If the problem persists, the message will appear the next
time the vehicle is started. This might indicate a damaged
cap. If the problem is detected twice in a row, the system
will turn on the MIL. Resolving the problem will turn the
MIL light off.
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass
an inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system.
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
For states that require an Inspection and Mainte-
nance (I/M), this check verifies the “Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL)” is functioning and is not on when
the engine is running, and that the OBD II system is
ready for testing.
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery replace-
ment. If the OBD II system should be determined not
ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
Your vehicle has a simple ignition key-actuated test,
which you can use prior to going to the test station. To
check if your vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must
do the following:
1. Insert your ignition key into the ignition switch.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, but do not
crank or start the engine.
3. If you crank or start the engine, you will have to start
this test over.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 421
4. As soon as you turn the ignition switch to the ON
position, you will see the MIL symbol come on as part of
a normal bulb check.
5. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will
happen:
a. The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then
return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF
the ignition or start the engine. This means that your
vehicle’s OBD II system is not ready and you should
not proceed to the I/M station.
b. The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the
engine. This means that your vehicle’s OBD II system
is ready and you can proceed to the I/M station.
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see your
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement,
you may need to do nothing more than drive your
vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II
system to update. A recheck with the above test routine
may then indicate that the system is now ready.
Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD II system is
ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal
vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced
before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail
your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine
running.
REPLACEMENT PARTS
Use of genuine MOPAR威parts for normal/scheduled
maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to en-
sure the designed performance. Damage or failures
caused by the use of non-MOPAR威parts for maintenance
and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer’s
warranty.
422 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
DEALER SERVICE
Your authorized dealer has the qualified service person-
nel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service
operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are
available which include detailed service information for
your vehicle. Refer to these manuals before attempting
any procedure yourself.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems may void your warranty and could result in civil
penalties being assessed against you.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent me-
chanic.
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
The pages that follow contain the required maintenance
services determined by the engineers who designed your
vehicle.
Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed
maintenance schedule, there are other components which
may require servicing or replacement in the future.
CAUTION!
•
Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or per-
form repairs and service when necessary could
result in more costly repairs, damage to other
components or negatively impact vehicle perfor-
mance. Immediately have potential malfunctions
examined by an authorized Chrysler Group LLC
dealership or qualified repair center.
(Continued)
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 423
CAUTION! (Continued)
•
Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids
that protect the performance and durability of
your vehicle and also allow extended maintenance
intervals. Do not use chemical flushes in these
components as the chemicals can damage your
engine, transmission, power steering or air condi-
tioning. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. If a flush is needed
because of component malfunction, use only the
specified fluid for the flushing procedure.
Engine Oil
Checking Oil Level
To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must
be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to
check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a
fully warmed up engine is shut off.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Always
maintain the oil level within the SAFE zone on the
dipstick. Adding 1 quart (0.9 L) of oil when the reading is
at the bottom of the SAFE zone will result in a reading at
the top of the safe zone on these engines.
424 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will cause
aeration or loss of oil pressure. This could damage
your engine.
Change Engine Oil
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” in Section 8 for
information on this system.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change
intervals exceed 6,000 miles (10 000 km) or six months,
whichever occurs first.
Engine Oil Selection
For best performance and maximum protection under all
types of operating conditions, the manufacturer recom-
mends engine oils that are API Certified and meet the
requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395.
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil
Identification Symbol
This symbol means that the oil has
been certified by the American
Petroleum Institute (API). The
manufacturer only recommends
API Certified engine oils.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 425
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the
chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Engine Oil Viscosity
SAE 5W-20 engine oil is recommended for all operating
temperatures. This engine oil improves low temperature
starting and vehicle fuel economy. The engine oil filler
cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for
your engine. For information on engine oil filler cap
location, refer to “Engine Compartment” in this section.
Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certi-
fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num-
ber should not be used.
Synthetic Engine Oils
You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recom-
mended oil quality requirements are met, and the recom-
mended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes
are followed.
Materials Added to Engine Oil
The manufacturer strongly recommends against the ad-
dition of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to
the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and its
performance may be impaired by supplemental
additives.
Disposing of Used Engine Oil and Oil Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the
environment. Contact your authorized dealer, service
426 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
station, or governmental agency for advice on how and
where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in
your area.
Engine Oil Filter
The engine oil filter should be replaced at every engine
oil change.
NOTE: For best access to the oil filter, a drive on hoist
should be used instead of a chassis hoist (3.7L Only).
Engine Oil Filter Selection
All of this manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type
disposable oil filter. Use a filter of this type for replace-
ment. The quality of replacement filters varies consider-
ably. Only high-quality filters should be used to assure
most efficient service. MOPAR威engine oil filters are
high-quality oil filters and are recommended.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” in Section 8 for the
proper maintenance intervals.
NOTE: Be sure to follow the “dusty or off-road condi-
tions” maintenance interval if applicable.
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can
provide a measure of protection in the case of engine
backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air
cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary
for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is
near the engine compartment before starting the
vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner,
hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in
serious personal injury.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 427
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters
varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be
used to assure most efficient service. MOPAR威engine air
cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are
recommended.
Maintenance-Free Battery
The top of the maintenance-free battery is permanently
sealed. You will never have to add water, nor is periodic
maintenance required.
WARNING!
•
Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid
to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean
over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid
splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area imme-
diately with large amounts of water.
•
Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep
flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use
a booster battery or any other booster source with
an output greater than 12 volts. Do not allow cable
clamps to touch each other.
•
Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands
after handling.
428 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
•
It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the
positive post and the negative cable is attached to
the negative post. Battery posts are marked posi-
tive (+) and negative (-) and are identified on the
battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the
terminal posts and free of corrosion.
•
If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in
the vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables
before connecting the charger to the battery. Do
not use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage
as battery damage can result.
Air Conditioner Maintenance
For best possible performance, your air conditioner
should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer
at the start of each warm season. This service should
include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance
test. Drive belt tension should also be checked at this
time.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning
system as the chemicals can damage your air condi-
tioning components. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 429
WARNING!
•
Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
approved by the manufacturer for your air condi-
tioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause
the system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
Section 3 of the Warranty Information book, lo-
cated on the DVD, for further warranty informa-
tion.
•
The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal
injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant
or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected
should be done by an experienced technician.
Refrigerant Recovery and Recycling
R-134a air conditioning refrigerant is a hydrofluoro-
carbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental
Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. How-
ever, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning
service be performed by an authorized dealer or other
service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C System
Sealers, Stop Leak Products, Seal Conditioners, Compres-
sor Oil, and Refrigerants.
A/C Air Filter — If Equipped
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” in Section 8 for the
proper maintenance intervals.
WARNING!
Do not remove the A/C Air Filter while the blower is
operating or personal injury may result.
430 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Body Lubrication
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate,
tailgate, sliding doors and hood hinges, should be lubri-
cated periodically with a lithium based grease, such as
MOPAR威Spray White Lube or equivalent, to assure
quiet, easy operation and to protect against rust and
wear. Prior to the application of any lubricant, the parts
concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and
grit; after lubricating excess oil and grease should be
removed. Particular attention should also be given to
hood latching components to ensure proper function.
When performing other underhood services, the hood
latch, release mechanism and safety catch should be
cleaned and lubricated.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small
amount of a high quality lubricant, such as MOPAR威
Lock Cylinder Lubricant or equivalent, directly into the
lock cylinder.
Windshield Wiper Blades
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a
mild non-abrasive cleaner or use the washer solvent. This
will remove accumulations of salt or road film.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods
may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use
washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt
from a dry windshield.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with
petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 431
NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depend-
ing on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor
performance of blades may be present with chattering,
marks, water lines or wet spots. If any condition is
present please proceed to clean wiper blades with humid
cloth removing any debris that may be affecting its
function.
Adding Washer Fluid
The windshield and rear window washers share the same
fluid reservoir. The fluid reservoir is located in the front
of the engine compartment. Be sure to check the fluid
level in the reservoir at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir
with windshield washer solvent (not radiator antifreeze)
and operate the system for a few seconds to flush out the
residual water.
When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, take some
washer fluid and apply it to a cloth or towel and wipe
clean the wiper blades, this will help blade performance.
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system
in cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or
exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This
rating information can be found on most washer fluid
containers.
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer solvents
are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
must be exercised when filling or working around
the washer solution.
432 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Exhaust System
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system
or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle,
or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged,
have an authorized technician inspect the complete ex-
haust system and adjacent body areas for broken, dam-
aged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams
or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep
into the passenger compartment. In addition, inspect the
exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubri-
cation or oil change. Replace as required.
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO) which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing CO Refer
to “Exhaust Gas” in the “Safety Tips” section of this
manual.
CAUTION!
The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded
fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the effective-
ness of the catalyst as an emissions control device
and may seriously reduce engine performance and
cause serious damage to the engine.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 433
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic con-
verter will not require maintenance. However, it is im-
portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure
proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
damage.
CAUTION!
Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition. In
the event of engine malfunction, particularly involv-
ing engine misfire or other apparent loss of perfor-
mance, have your vehicle serviced promptly. Contin-
ued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and the
vehicle.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
WARNING!
A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over
materials that can burn. Such materials might be
grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust
system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas
where your exhaust system can contact anything that
can burn.
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, safely
bring the vehicle to a complete stop, turn off the engine,
and allow it to cool. Service, including a tune up to
manufacturer’s specifications, should be obtained imme-
diately.
434 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter dam-
age:
•
Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition
when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in
motion.
•
Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the
vehicle.
•
Do not idle the engine with any ignition coil connec-
tors disconnected for prolonged periods.
•
Do not idle the engine for prolonged periods during
very rough idle or malfunctioning operating condi-
tions.
•
Do not allow vehicle to run out of fuel.
Cooling System
WARNING!
•
You or others can be badly burned by hot coolant
or steam from your radiator. If you see or hear
steam coming from under the hood, do not open
the hood until the radiator has had time to cool.
Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap
when the radiator is hot.
Engine Coolant Checks
Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every
12 months (before the onset of freezing weather, where
applicable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or
rusty in appearance, the system should be drained,
flushed, and refilled with fresh coolant. Check the front
of the A/C condenser (if equipped) or radiator for any
accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 435
spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the
face of the A/C condenser (if equipped) or the back of the
radiator core.
Check the engine cooling system hoses for brittle rubber,
cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the connection at
the coolant recovery bottle and radiator. Inspect the
entire system for leaks.
With the engine at normal operating temperature (but
not running), check the cooling system pressure cap for
proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of
engine coolant (antifreeze) from the radiator drain cock.
If the cap is sealing properly, the engine coolant (anti-
freeze) will begin to drain from the coolant recovery
bottle. DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE
CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.
Cooling System — Drain, Flush, and Refill
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains a
considerable amount of sediment, clean and flush with a
reliable cooling system cleaner. Follow with a thorough
rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals. Properly
dispose of the old engine coolant (antifreeze).
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” in Section 8 for the
proper maintenance intervals.
Selection of Engine Coolant
Use only the manufacturer’s recommended engine cool-
ant (antifreeze). Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genu-
ine Parts” in this section for the correct fluid type.
436 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
•
Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified HOAT engine coolant (antifreeze), may
result in engine damage and may decrease corro-
sion protection. If a non-HOAT engine coolant
(antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling system
in an emergency, it should be replaced with the
specified engine coolant (antifreeze) as soon as
possible.
•
Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use addi-
tional rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they
may not be compatible with the radiator engine
coolant and may plug the radiator.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
•
This vehicle has not been designed for use with
Propylene Glycol based engine coolant (anti-
freeze). Use of Propylene Glycol based engine
coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.
Adding Engine Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
coolant (antifreeze) that allows extended maintenance
intervals. This engine coolant (antifreeze) can be used up
to five years or 102,000 miles (170 000 km) before
replacement. To prevent reducing this extended mainte-
nance period, it is important that you use the same
engine coolant (antifreeze) throughout the life of your
vehicle. Please review these recommendations for using
Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine
coolant (antifreeze).
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 437
When adding engine coolant (antifreeze):
•
The manufacturer recommends using MOPAR威
Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula
HOAT (Hybrid Organic Additive Technology) or
equivalent.
•
Mix a minimum solution of 50% HOAT engine coolant
(antifreeze) and distilled water. Use higher concentra-
tions (not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below ⫺34°F
(⫺37°C) are anticipated.
•
Use only high purity water such as distilled or deion-
ized water when mixing the water/engine coolant
(antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality water
will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the
engine cooling system.
Please note that it is the owner’s responsibility to main-
tain the proper level of protection against freezing ac-
cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where
the vehicle is operated.
NOTE: Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types will
decrease the life of the engine coolant (antifreeze) and
will require more frequent engine coolant (antifreeze)
changes.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of
coolant, and to ensure that coolant will return to the
radiator from the coolant recovery bottle.
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
438 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
•
The warning words “DO NOT OPEN HOT” on
the cooling system pressure cap are a safety pre-
caution. Never add engine coolant (antifreeze)
when the engine is overheated. Do not loosen or
remove the cap to cool an overheated engine. Heat
causes pressure to build up in the cooling system.
To prevent scalding or injury, do not remove the
pressure cap while the system is hot or under
pressure.
•
Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or en-
gine damage may result.
Disposal of Used Engine Coolant
Used ethylene glycol based engine coolant (antifreeze) is
a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check
with your local authorities to determine the disposal
rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by ani-
mals or children, do not store ethylene glycol based
engine coolant (antifreeze) in open containers or allow it
to remain in puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child
or pet, seek emergency assistance immediately. Clean up
any ground spills immediately.
Engine Coolant Level
The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for
determining that the coolant level is adequate. With the
engine idling, and warm to normal operating temperature,
the level of the engine coolant (antifreeze) in the bottle
should be between the ranges indicated on the bottle.
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is
no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for
coolant freeze point or replacing engine coolant (anti-
freeze). Advise your service attendant of this. As long as
the engine operating temperature is satisfactory, the
coolant bottle need only be checked once a month.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 439
When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to
maintain the proper level, it should be added to the
coolant bottle. Do not overfill.
Points to Remember
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/
kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming
from the front of the engine compartment. This is nor-
mally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high
humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor-
ized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator.
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
•
Do not overfill the coolant bottle.
•
Check coolant freeze point in the radiator and in the
coolant recovery bottle. If engine coolant (antifreeze)
needs to be added, contents of coolant recovery bottle
must also be protected against freezing.
•
If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are
required, or if the level in the coolant recovery bottle
does not drop when the engine cools, the cooling
system should be pressure tested for leaks.
•
Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at
50% HOAT engine coolant (antifreeze) (minimum)
and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of
your engine, which contains aluminum components.
•
Make sure that the radiator and coolant recovery
bottle hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
•
Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
condenser clean.
440 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
•
Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install
ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may
result in unsatisfactory cooling performance, poor gas
mileage, and increased emissions.
Brake System
In order to assure brake system performance, all brake
system components should be inspected periodically.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” in Section 8 for the
proper maintenance intervals.
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly an accident. Driving with your foot resting
or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally
high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and
possible brake damage. You would not have your full
braking capacity in an emergency.
Brake Master Cylinder
The fluid in the master cylinder should be checked when
performing under hood services or immediately if the
“Brake Warning Light” is illuminated.
Be sure to clean the top of the master cylinder area before
removing the cap. If necessary, add fluid to bring the
fluid level up to the requirements described on the brake
fluid reservoir. With disc brakes, fluid level can be
expected to fall as the brake pads wear. Brake fluid level
should be checked when pads are replaced. However,
low fluid level may be caused by a leak and a checkup
may be needed.
Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid. Re-
fer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in this
section for the correct fluid type.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 441
WARNING!
•
Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake
fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in this section for the correct fluid type.
Using the wrong type of brake fluid can severely
damage your brake system and/or impair its per-
formance. The proper type of brake fluid for your
vehicle is also labeled on the original factory
installed hydraulic master cylinder reservoir.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
To avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that
has been in a tightly closed container. Keep the
master cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times.
Brake fluid in a open container absorbs moisture
from the air resulting in a lower boiling point.
This may cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard
or prolonged braking, resulting in sudden brake
failure. This could result in a accident.
•
Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing
the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also
damage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be
taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces.
(Continued)
442 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contami-
nate the brake fluid. Brake seal components could
be damaged, causing partial or complete brake
failure. This could result in an accident.
Automatic Transmission
Fluid Level Check
Your vehicle is equipped with a capped transmission oil
fill tube that is sealed and it should not be tampered with.
Your authorized dealer has the proper tools to ensure that
the fluid level is set properly.
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the manufac-
turer’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration
in transmission shift quality and/or torque converter
shudder. Using a transmission fluid other than that
recommended by the manufacturer will result in
more frequent fluid and filter changes. Refer to
“Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in this sec-
tion for the correct fluid type.
Fluid and Filter Changes
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” in Section 8 for the
proper maintenance intervals.
In addition, change the fluid and filter if the transmission
is disassembled for any reason.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 443
Special Additives
The manufacturer strongly recommends against the ad-
dition of any additives to the transmission. The only
exception to this policy is the use of special dyes to aid in
detecting fluid leaks. The use of transmission sealers
should be avoided as they may adversely affect seals.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as
the chemicals can damage your transmission compo-
nents. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Transfer Case
Fluid Level Check
The fluid level should be to the bottom edge of the fill
hole (1) when the vehicle is in a level position.
Adding Fluid
Fluid should be added only to fill hole until fluid begins
to run out of the hole.
1 — Fill Plug
2 — Drain Plug
444 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Draining Fluid
First remove the fill plug (1), then the drain plug (2).
Recommended tightening torque for the drain and fill
plugs is 15–25 ft lbs (20–34 N·m).
CAUTION!
Do not over-tighten the plugs. You could damage
them and cause a leak.
Lubricant Selection
Use only manufacturer’s recommended fluid. Refer to
“Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in this section
for the correct fluid type.
Frequency of Fluid Change
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at
the factory will give satisfactory lubrication for the life of
the vehicle. Fluid changes are not necessary unless the
fluid becomes contaminated with water. Change the fluid
immediately if contaminated with water.
Front/Rear Axle Fluid
Fluid Level Check
The lubricant level should be at bottom edge of the oil fill
hole.
Adding Fluid
Add lubricant only at the fill hole and only to the level
specified above.
Lubricant Selection
Use only manufacturer’s recommended lubricant. Refer
to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in this section
for the correct fluid type.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 445
Frequency of Fluid Change
Under normal operating conditions, the lubricant in-
stalled at the factory will give satisfactory lubrication for
the life of the vehicle. Lubricant changes are not neces-
sary unless the lubricant becomes contaminated with
water. Change the lubricant immediately if contaminated
with water.
Sky Slider™Top Care
Immediate removal of any contaminant is recommended.
Regular washing of the top will enhance its life and
appearance, and make successive cleaning easier. Do not
subject the top to excessive heat. Frequently vacuum the
top and tracks. Periodically wipe dust and dirt from the
top and inside of the tracks by hand with an alcohol
dampened cloth.
Washing
Hand washing or an automatic car wash with a soft cloth
system is preferred.
CAUTION!
Avoid pointing a high-pressure hand held spray
wand directly at the sides of the top, as this can
damage the seal and force water past the weather
strips.
General Cleaning
Careful vacuuming of the top before washing is helpful
in removing dust and other foreign particles.
If hand washing:
•
Wash in partial shade instead of direct sun.
•
Wet the entire vehicle before washing the top.
•
Wash the top with a soft, natural bristle scrub brush,
and a mild soap solution such as liquid dish washing
soap. Do not use detergent.
446 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
•
Scrub in all directions, covering an area of about two
square feet at a time. Avoid heavy scrubbing.
•
Rinse the entire vehicle with water to remove all soap
and dirt from the top fabric and to prevent streaking
on painted and chrome surfaces.
•
Allow the top to dry before opening. Vacuuming the
top with a wet/dry shop vacuum will decrease the
tops drying time, ensure removal of all dirt, and delete
streaks in the material.
•
Multiple cleanings may be necessary to remove stub-
born stains. If stains persist, contact your local autho-
rized dealership for further suggestions.
CAUTION!
Never use an abrasive type cleaner or bleaches.
Cleaners should not contain silicones, organic sol-
vents, petroleum distillates, or plasticizers. Always
wait until the top is thoroughly dry before opening
it.
Additional Cleaning Procedure
For additional cleaning assistance in removing stubborn
stains, apply MOPAR威Convertible Cloth Top Cleaner or
equivalent to the complete stain, extending 2 in (50 mm)
beyond the stain. With a soft bristle brush, scrub in all
directions over the stain. Avoid heavy scrubbing. Rinse
the area with warm water. If the stain is still apparent,
repeat the cleaning procedure. When the stain is no
longer showing, rinse the complete top with warm water.
Let the top dry before opening it.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 447
Protection
For appearance purposes, you may wish to protect the
acrylic (cloth) top periodically. A fabric protectant such as
Scotchguard威is suggested. The top should be clean and
dry before application of the protectant.
CAUTION!
Avoid getting Scotchguard威on the surrounding
weather strips, moldings, paint, or glass. Damage to
these items might occur.
Weather Strip Care
Lubricate the weather strips periodically with MOPAR威
Weather Strip Lubricant or equivalent, to keep them soft
and pliable.
Appearance Care and Protection from Corrosion
Protection of Body and Paint from Corrosion
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo-
graphic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on
trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly
corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking,
which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants,
road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme
hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will
have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and under-
body protection.
The following maintenance recommendations will enable
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion
resistance built into your vehicle.
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of
paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
448 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
The most common causes are:
•
Road salt, dirt, and moisture accumulation.
•
Stone and gravel impact.
•
Insects, tree sap, and tar.
•
Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
•
Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
Washing
•
Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your ve-
hicle in the shade using MOPAR威Car Wash or equiva-
lent, or a mild car wash soap, and rinse the panels
completely with clear water.
•
If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumu-
lated on your vehicle, use MOPAR威Super Kleen Bug
and Tar Remover or equivalent to remove.
•
Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as MOPAR威
Cleaner Wax or equivalent, to remove road film, stains,
and to protect your paint finish. Take care never to
scratch the paint.
•
Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint
finish.
CAUTION!
•
Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials
such as steel wool or scouring powder, which will
scratch metal and painted surfaces.
•
Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi
(8 274 kPa) can result in damage or removal of
paint and decals.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 449
Special Care
•
If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive
near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once
a month.
•
It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges
of the doors, rocker panels, and tailgate must be kept
clear and open.
•
If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is
considered the responsibility of the owner.
•
If your vehicle is damaged due to an accident or
similar cause, which destroys the paint and protective
coating, have your vehicle repaired as soon as pos-
sible. The cost of such repairs is considered the respon-
sibility of the owner.
•
If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,
de-icer salt, etc., assure that such materials are well
packaged and sealed.
•
If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider
mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
•
Use MOPAR威Touch Up Paint or equivalent on
scratches or chips as soon as possible. Your authorized
dealer has touch up paint to match the color of your
vehicle.
Wheel and Wheel Trim Care
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
chrome-plated wheels should be cleaned regularly with
mild soap and water to prevent corrosion. To remove
heavy soil and/or excessive brake dust, use MOPAR威
Wheel Cleaner or equivalent, or select a nonabrasive,
non-acidic cleaner. Do not use scouring pads, steel wool,
a bristle brush, or metal polishes. Only MOPAR威cleaners
or equivalent are recommended. Do not use oven cleaner.
450 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions or
harsh brushes that may damage the wheels’ protective
finish.
Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure — If
Equipped
Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following man-
ner:
•
Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting
with a clean, dry towel.
•
Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.
•
For tough stains, apply MOPAR威Total Clean or
equivalent, or a mild soap solution to a clean, damp
cloth and remove the stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to
remove soap residue.
•
For grease stains, apply MOPAR威Multi-Purpose
Cleaner or equivalent to a clean, damp cloth and
remove the stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove
soap residue.
•
Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of
protectants on Stain Repel products.
Interior Care
Instrument Panel Cover
The instrument panel cover has a low glare surface,
which minimizes reflections in the windshield. Do not
use protectants or other products, which may cause
undesirable reflections. Use soap and warm water to
restore the low glare surface.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 451
Cleaning Interior Trim
Clean interior trim with a damp cloth and MOPAR威Total
Clean or equivalent, and if necessary, follow with MO-
PAR Spot & Stain Remover or equivalent. Do not use
harsh cleaners or Armor All威. Use MOPAR威Total Clean
or equivalent to clean vinyl upholstery.
Cleaning Leather Upholstery
MOPAR威Total Clean or equivalent is specifically recom-
mended for leather upholstery.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt
can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery
and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth.
Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth
and MOPAR威Total Clean or equivalent. Care should be
taken to avoid soaking leather upholstery with any
liquid. Please do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids,
solvents, detergents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean
leather upholstery. Application of a leather conditioner is
not required to maintain the original condition.
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in
closed areas they may cause respiratory harm.
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle has plastic headlights that are lighter and
less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution fol-
lowed by rinsing.
452 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel
wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.
Glass Surfaces
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis
with MOPAR威Glass Cleaner or any commercial
household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type
cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear win-
dow equipped with electric defrosters or the right rear
quarter window equipped with the radio antenna. Do
not use scrapers or other sharp instruments, which may
scratch the elements.
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the
towel or rag that you are using. Do not spray cleaner
directly on the mirror.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
1. Clean with a wet soft rag. A mild soap solution may be
used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive
cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp
rag.
2. Dry with a soft cloth.
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye, or clean the seat belts with chemical
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.
If the seat belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or
lukewarm water. Dry with a soft cloth. Do not remove the
seat belts from the car to wash them.
Replace the seat belts if they appear frayed or worn or if
the buckles do not work properly.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 453
FUSES
Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM)
The Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) is located
in the engine compartment near the battery. This center
contains cartridge fuses, mini-fuses and relays. A label
that identifies each component is printed on the inside of
the cover.
Cavity Cartridge
Fuse
Mini-
Fuse
Description
J1 — — —
J2 30 Amp
Pink
— Transfer Case Module
- if equipped
Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM)
454 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity Cartridge
Fuse
Mini-
Fuse
Description
J3 30 Amp
Pink
— Rear Door Modules
J4 25 Amp
White
— Driver Door Node
J5 25 Amp
White
— Passenger Door Node
J6 40 Amp
Green
— Anti-Lock Brake Sys-
tem (ABS) Pump/ESP
- if equipped
J7 30 Amp
Pink
— Anti-Lock Brake Sys-
tem (ABS) Valve/ESP
- if equipped
J8 40 Amp
Green
— Power Seats - if
equipped
J9 40 Amp
Green
— PZEV/Flex Fuel - if
equipped
Cavity Cartridge
Fuse
Mini-
Fuse
Description
J10 30 Amp
Pink
— Headlamp Wash Re-
lay - if equipped/
Man Tuning Valve - if
equipped
J11 30 Amp
Pink
— Sway Bar - if
equipped/Thatchm
Lk-Ulk - if equiped/
Pwr Sld Dr Mod - if
equipped
J13 60 Amp
Yellow
— Ignition Off Draw
(IOD)
J14 40 Amp
Green
— EBL (Rear Window
Defogger) - if
equipped
J15 30 Amp
Pink
— Rear Blower - if
equipped
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 455
Cavity Cartridge
Fuse
Mini-
Fuse
Description
J17 40 Amp
Green
— Starter Solenoid
J18 20 Amp
Blue
— Powertrain Control
Module (PCM) Trans-
mission Relay
J19 60 Amp
Yellow
— Radiator Fan
J20 30 Amp
Pink
— Front Wiper
J21 20 Amp
Blue
— Front Washer/Rear
Washer - if equipped
J22 25 Amp
White
— Sunroof Module - if
equipped
M1 — 15 Amp
Blue
Stop Light Switch
Feed — Center High
Mounted Stop Light
(CHMSL)
Cavity Cartridge
Fuse
Mini-
Fuse
Description
M2 — 20 Amp
Yellow
Trailer Lighting - if
equipped
M3 — 20 Amp
Yellow
Frt/Rr Axle Lockers -
if equipped
M4 — 10 Amp
Red
Trailer Tow - if
equipped
M5 — 25 Amp
Natural
Power Inverter – if
equipped
M6 — 20 Amp
Yellow
Power Outlet #1 (ci-
gar lighter)/Rain Sen-
sor - if equipped/
Trailer Tow - if
equipped
M7 — 20 Amp
Yellow
Power Outlet #2
(BATT/ACC SELECT)
M8 — 20 Amp
Yellow
Front Heated Seats -
if equipped
456 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity Cartridge
Fuse
Mini-
Fuse
Description
M9 — 20 Amp
Yellow
Rr Heated Seat - if
equipped
M10 — 15 Amp
Blue
Hands-Free Module
(HFM) – if equipped/
Universal Garage
Door Opener (UGDO)
– if equipped/Vanity
Light
M11 — 10 Amp
Red
Automatic Tempera-
ture Control (ATC) -
if equipped
M12 — 30 Amp
Green
Radio/Amplifier - if
equipped
Cavity Cartridge
Fuse
Mini-
Fuse
Description
M13 — 20 Amp
Yellow
Cabin Compartment
Node (CCN)/Wireless
Control Module
(WCM)/
Multifunction Control
Switch
M14 — 20 Amp
Yellow
Trailer Tow (BUX) —
If Equipped
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 457
Cavity Cartridge
Fuse
Mini-
Fuse
Description
M15 — 20 Amp
Yellow
Multifunction Control
Switch/Cabin Com-
partment Node
(CCN)/Steering Col-
umn Control Module
(SCM)/Rear View
Mirror/Tire Pressure
Monitor (TPM) - if
equipped/IR Sensor -
if equipped/Transfer
Case Module - if
equipped
M16 — 10 Amp
Red
Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC)
Cavity Cartridge
Fuse
Mini-
Fuse
Description
M17 — 15 Amp
Blue
Exterior Lighting —
Left Front Park and
Side Marker, Left Tail
and Running, License
Lights
M18 — 15 Amp
Blue
Exterior Lighting —
Right Front Park and
Side Marker, Right
Tail and Running
Lights
M19 — 25 Amp
Natural
Auto Shut Down
(ASD) #1 and #2
458 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity Cartridge
Fuse
Mini-
Fuse
Description
M20 — 15 Amp
Blue
Interior Lighting/
Steering Wheel
Switches - if
equipped/Switch
Bank/Electronic Ve-
hicle Information
Center (EVIC) - if
equipped
M21 — 20 Amp
Yellow
Auto Shut Down
(ASD) #3
M22 — 10 Amp
Red
Right Horn (Hi/Low)
M23 — 10 Amp
Red
Left Horn (Hi/Low)
M24 — 25 Amp
Natural
Rear Wiper - if
equipped
Cavity Cartridge
Fuse
Mini-
Fuse
Description
M25 — 20 Amp
Yellow
Fuel Pump
M26 — 10 Amp
Red
Power Mirror Switch/
Driver Window
Switch
M27 — 10 Amp
Red
Ignition Switch/
Wireless Control
Module (WCM)/
Steering Column Lock
- if equipped
M28 — 10 Amp
Red
Powertrain Control
Module (PCM)
M29 — 10 Amp
Red
Occupant Classifica-
tion Module (OCM)
M30 — 15 Amp
Blue
Rear Wiper Module -
if equipped/
Diagnostic Link
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 459
Cavity Cartridge
Fuse
Mini-
Fuse
Description
M31 — 20 Amp
Yellow
Back-Up Lights
M32 — 10 Amp
Red
Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC)
M33 — 10 Amp
Red
Powertrain Control
Module (PCM)
M34 — 10 Amp
Red
Park Assist Module -
if equipped/Heating,
Ventilation, and Air
Conditioning (HVAC)
Module - if
equipped/Compass
Module - if equipped
M35 — 10 Amp
Red
Heated Mirrors - if
equipped
M36 — 20 Amp
Yellow
Power Outlet #3
(BATT)
Cavity Cartridge
Fuse
Mini-
Fuse
Description
M37 — 10 Amp
Red
Anti-Lock Brake Sys-
tem (ABS)/Electronic
Stability Program
(ESP) Module/Stop
Light Switch
M38 — 25 Amp
Natural
Door and Liftgate
Lock/Unlock Motors
CAUTION!
•
When installing the Integrated Power Module
cover, it is important to ensure the cover is prop-
erly positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so
may allow water to get into the Integrated Power
Module, and possibly result in an electrical system
failure.
(Continued)
460 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION! (Continued)
•
When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to
use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating.
The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated
may result in a dangerous electrical system over-
load. If a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it
indicates a problem in the circuit that must be
corrected.
REPLACEMENT BULBS
LIGHT BULBS — Interior Bulb No.
Cargo Lamp......................... TL212–2
Overhead Console Lamp ............. PLW214–2A
Reading Lamp ...................... WL212–2
LIGHT BULBS — Exterior Bulb No.
Headlamp .........................9008 H13
Front Park/Turn Signal Lamp............. 3757AK
Front Side Marker Lamp ...................168
Back-Up Lamp ........................3157K
Center High Mounted Stop Lamp
(CHMSL) ......LED(serviced at an authorized dealer)
Fog Lamp.......................... H109145
License Plate Lamp ....................... 168
Rear Tail/Stop.........................3157K
Rear Turn Signal Lamp .................3757AK
BULB REPLACEMENT
Headlamp
1. Open the hood.
2. Reach behind the headlamp housing to access the
headlamp bulb lock ring.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 461
3. Firmly grasp the lock ring and rotate it counterclock-
wise to unlock it.
4. Remove the bulb and connector assembly from the
headlamp housing.
5. Disconnect the bulb from the electrical connector and
then connect the replacement bulb.
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with any oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
6. Install the bulb and connector assembly into the
headlamp housing and rotate the lock ring clockwise to
lock it in place.
7. Close the hood.
Front Turn Signal and Front Side Marker Lamp
1. Turn the steering wheel all the way to the right to
access the left front turn signal or side marker. Turn the
steering wheel all the way to the left to access the right
front turn signal or side marker.
2. Remove three push-pins from the wheel-well liner.
3. Gently flex the wheel-well liner forward to access the
bulb.
4. Rotate the bulb’s socket counterclockwise, and remove
the bulb and socket assembly from the housing.
5. Pull the bulb out of the socket and insert the replace-
ment bulb.
6. Install the bulb and socket assembly into the housing,
and rotate the socket clockwise to lock it in place.
7. Reposition the wheel-well liner and install the
push-pins.
462 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Front Fog Lamp
1. Open the hood.
2. Reach behind the headlamp housing to access the
bulb.
3. Rotate the bulb’s socket counterclockwise, and remove
the bulb and socket assembly from the fog lamp housing.
4. Pull the bulb out of the socket and insert the replace-
ment bulb.
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with any oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
5. Install the bulb and socket assembly into the into the
fog lamp housing, and rotate the connector clockwise to
lock it in place.
6. Close the hood.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 463
Rear Tail/Stop, Turn Signal, and Back-Up Lamp
1. Open the liftgate.
2. Remove the screws that fasten the taillamp housing to
the vehicle.
3. Pull the taillamp housing straight back to separate it
from the vehicle.
4. Disconnect the electrical connector.
5. Remove the two screws that fasten the back plate to
the taillamp housing.
6. Separate the back plate from the taillamp housing.
7. Pull the appropriate bulb(s) out of the back plate and
insert the replacement bulb(s).
8. Install the back plate and screws into the taillamp
housing.
9. Connect the electrical connector.
10. Install the taillamp housing and screws.
11. Close the liftgate.
464 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FLUID CAPACITIES
U.S. Metric
Fuel (Approximate) 19.5 Gallons 73.8 Liters
Engine Oil with Filter
3.7 Liter Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified) 5 Quarts 4.7 Liters
Cooling System *
3.7 Liter Engine (MOPAR威Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 5
Year/100,000 Mile Formula or equivalent)
14 Quarts 13.3 Liters
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 465
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND GENUINE PARTS
Engine
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Engine Coolant MOPAR威Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula HOAT (Hy-
brid Organic Additive Technology) or equivalent.
Engine Oil Use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of
Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for
correct SAE grade.
Engine Oil Filter MOPAR威Engine Oil Filter or equivalent.
Spark Plugs ZFR6F-11G (Gap 0.043 in [1.09 mm])
Fuel Selection 87 Octane
466 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Chassis
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Automatic Transmission MOPAR威ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent.
Transfer Case MOPAR威ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent.
Front Axle SAE 80W-90 Multi-Purpose Type, GL-5 Gear Lubricant or equivalent.
Rear Axle SAE 75W-140 Synthetic Gear Lubricant or equivalent.
Brake Master Cylinder MOPAR威DOT 3 Brake Fluid, SAE J1703 should be used. If DOT 3, SAE
J1703 brake fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable. Use only rec-
ommended brake fluids.
Power Steering Reservoir MOPAR威Power Steering Fluid +4, MOPAR威ATF+4 Automatic Transmis-
sion Fluid or equivalent.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 467
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
CONTENTS
䡵Emissions Control System Maintenance ...... 470
䡵Maintenance Schedule .................. 470
▫Required Maintenance Intervals .......... 472
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
EMISSIONS CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
The Scheduled Maintenance services listed in bold type
must be done at the times or mileages specified to ensure
the continued proper functioning of the emissions control
system. These and all other maintenance services in-
cluded in this manual, should be done to provide best
vehicle performance and reliability. More frequent main-
tenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating
conditions, such as dusty areas and very short trip
driving.
Inspection and service should also be done anytime a
malfunction is suspected.
NOTE: Maintenance, replacement or repair of the emis-
sions control devices and systems on your vehicle may be
performed by any automotive repair establishment or
individual using any automotive part that has been
certified pursuant to U.S. EPA or in the State of Califor-
nia, California Air Resources Board regulations.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
On Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
equipped vehicles “Oil Change Required” will be dis-
played in the EVIC and a single chime will sound,
indicating that an oil change is necessary.
On Non-EVIC equipped vehicles “Change Oil” will flash
in the instrument cluster odometer and a single chime
will sound, indicating that an oil change is necessary.
Based on engine operation conditions the oil change
indicator message will illuminate, this means that service
is required for your vehicle. Have your vehicle serviced
as soon as possible, within the next 500 miles (805 km).
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
470 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
NOTE:
•
The oil change indicator message will not monitor the
time since the last oil change. Change your vehicles oil
if it has been six months since your last oil change even
if the oil change indicator message is NOT illumi-
nated.
•
Change your engine oil more often if you drive your
vehicle off-road for an extended period of time.
•
Under no circumstances should oil change intervals
exceed 6,000 miles (10 000 km) or six months, which-
ever comes first.
Your dealer will reset the oil change indicator message
after completing the scheduled oil change. If this sched-
uled oil change is performed by someone other than your
dealer the message can be reset by referring to the steps
described under “Oil Change Required” in “Use Factory
Settings” of the EVIC section in this manual or under
“Odometer/Trip Odometer” in the “Instrument Cluster
Descriptions section of this manual.
At Each Stop for Fuel
•
Check the engine oil level about five minutes after a
fully warmed engine is shut off. Checking the oil level
while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the
accuracy of the oil level reading. Add oil only when
the level is at or below the ADD or MIN mark.
•
Check the windshield washer solvent and add if
required.
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 471
Once a Month
•
Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or
damage.
•
Inspect the battery and clean and tighten the terminals
as required.
•
Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir and
brake master cylinder, and add as needed.
•
Check all lights and other electrical items for correct
operation.
At Each Oil Change
•
Change the engine oil filter.
•
Inspect the brake hoses and lines.
CAUTION!
•
Failure to perform the required maintenance items
may result in damage to the vehicle.
•
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles de-
pends on tires of equal size, type and circumfer-
ence on each wheel. Any difference in tire size can
cause damage to the transfer case. Tire rotation
schedule should be followed to balance tire wear.
Required Maintenance Intervals
Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following
pages for the required maintenance intervals.
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
472 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
6,000 Miles (10,000 km) or
6 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏Rotate tires.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
12,000 Miles (20,000 km) or 12 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏Rotate tires.
❏Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
❏Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.
❏Inspect the CV joints. Perform the first inspection at 12,000 miles (20 000 km) or
12 months.
❏Inspect exhaust system. Perform the first inspection at 12,000 miles (20 000 km) or
12 months.
❏Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 473
18,000 Miles (30,000 km) or
18 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏Rotate tires.
❏Inspect the front and rear axle fluid;
change if using your vehicle for police,
taxi, fleet, off-road or frequent trailer
towing.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
24,000 Miles (40,000 km) or 24 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏Rotate tires.
❏Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
❏Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.
❏Inspect the CV joints.
❏Inspect exhaust system.
❏Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
474 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
30,000 Miles (50,000 km) or
30 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏Rotate tires.
❏Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
❏Replace the spark plugs (3.7L Engine).
❏Adjust parking brake on vehicles
equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.
❏Inspect the transfer case fluid.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
36,000 Miles (60,000 km) or 36 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏Rotate tires.
❏Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
❏Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.
❏Inspect the front and rear axle fluid; change if using your vehicle for police, taxi, fleet,
off-road or frequent trailer towing.
❏Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 475
42,000 Miles (70,000 km) or
42 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏Rotate tires.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
48,000 Miles (80,000 km) or 48 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏Rotate tires.
❏Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
❏Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.
❏Inspect the CV joints.
❏Inspect exhaust system.
❏Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
476 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
54,000 Miles (90,000 km) or
54 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏Rotate tires.
❏Inspect the front and rear axle fluid;
change if using your vehicle for police,
taxi, fleet, off-road or frequent trailer
towing.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 477
60,000 Miles (100,000 km) or 60 Months Maintenance Service Schedule
❏Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏Rotate tires.
❏Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
❏Replace the ignition cables (3.7L Engine).
❏Replace the spark plugs (3.7L Engine).
❏Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.
❏Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.
❏Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter if using your vehicle for any of the following: police, taxi, fleet or frequent trailer towing.
❏Change the transfer case fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following: police, taxi, fleet, off-road or frequent trailer towing.
❏Flush and replace the engine coolant at 60 months if not done at 102,000 miles (170 000 km).
❏Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage, wear, improper looseness or end play;
replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
478 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
66,000 Miles (110,000 km) or
66 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏Rotate tires.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
72,000 Miles (120,000 km) or 72 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏Rotate tires.
❏Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
❏Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.
❏Inspect the front and rear axle fluid; change if using your vehicle for police, taxi, fleet,
off-road or frequent trailer towing.
❏Inspect the CV joints.
❏Inspect exhaust system.
❏Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 479
78,000 Miles (130,000 km) or
78 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏Rotate tires.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
84,000 Miles (140,000 km) or 84 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏Rotate tires.
❏Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
❏Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.
❏Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
480 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
90,000 Miles (150,000 km) or 90 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏Rotate tires.
❏Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
❏Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary. †
❏Replace the spark plugs (3.7L Engine).
❏Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.
❏Inspect the transfer case fluid.
❏Inspect the front and rear axle fluid; change if using your vehicle for police, taxi, fleet,
off-road or frequent trailer towing.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 481
96,000 Miles (160,000 km) or 96 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏Rotate tires.
❏Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
❏Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.
❏Inspect the CV joints.
❏Inspect exhaust system.
❏Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
102,000 Miles (170,000 km) or
102 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏Rotate tires.
❏Flush and replace the engine coolant if
not done at 60 months.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
482 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
108,000 Miles (180,000 km) or 108 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏Rotate tires.
❏Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
❏Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.
❏Inspect the front and rear axle fluid; change if using your vehicle for police, taxi, fleet,
off-road or frequent trailer towing.
❏Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
114,000 Miles (190,000 km) or
114 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏Rotate tires.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 483
120,000 Miles (200,000 km) or 120 Months Maintenance Service Schedule
❏Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏Rotate tires.
❏Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
❏Replace the ignition cables (3.7L Engine).
❏Replace the spark plugs (3.7L Engine).
❏Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.
❏Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.
❏Inspect the CV joints.
❏Inspect exhaust system.
❏Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage, wear, improper looseness or end play;
replace if necessary.
❏Change the transfer case fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following: police, taxi, fleet, off-road or frequent trailer towing.
❏Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter.
❏Replace accessory drive belt(s).
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
484 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
126,000 Miles (210,000 km) or
126 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏Rotate tires.
❏Inspect the front and rear axle fluid;
change if using your vehicle for police,
taxi, fleet, off-road or frequent trailer
towing.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
132,000 Miles (220,000 km) or 132 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏Rotate tires.
❏Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
❏Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.
❏Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 485
138,000 Miles (230,000 km) or
138 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏Rotate tires.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
144,000 Miles (240,000 km) or 144 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏Rotate tires.
❏Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
❏Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.
❏Inspect the front and rear axle fluid; change if using your vehicle for police, taxi, fleet,
off-road or frequent trailer towing.
❏Inspect the CV joints.
❏Inspect exhaust system.
❏Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
486 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
† This maintenance is recommended by the manufacturer
to the owner, but is not required to maintain emissions
warranty.
WARNING!
•
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform
a service job, take your vehicle to a competent
mechanic.
•
Failure to properly inspect and maintain your
vehicle could result in a component malfunction
and effect vehicle handling and performance. This
could cause an accident
150,000 Miles (250,000 km) or
150 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏Rotate tires.
❏Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
❏Replace the spark plugs (3.7L Engine).
❏Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped
with four-wheel disc brakes.
❏Inspect the transfer case fluid.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 487
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
䡵Suggestions For Obtaining Service For Your
Vehicle .............................. 491
▫Prepare For The Appointment ........... 491
▫Prepare A List ...................... 491
▫Be Reasonable With Requests ............ 491
䡵If You Need Assistance ................. 491
▫Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center ..... 492
▫Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center ..... 492
▫In Mexico Contact .................... 492
▫Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or
Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) ............ 493
▫Service Contract ..................... 493
䡵Warranty Information (U.S. Vehicles Only) .... 494
䡵MOPAR威Parts ....................... 494
䡵Reporting Safety Defects ................ 494
▫In The 50 United States And Washington,
D.C. .............................. 494
▫In Canada ......................... 495
䡵Publication Order Forms ................ 495
9
䡵Department Of Transportation Uniform Tire
Quality Grades ........................ 497
▫Treadwear ......................... 497
▫Traction Grades ..................... 497
▫Temperature Grades .................. 498
490 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE
Prepare For The Appointment
If you’re having warranty work done, be sure to have the
right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All
work to be performed may not be covered by the
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s
service history. This can often provide a clue to the
current problem.
Prepare A List
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the
service advisor know.
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental
vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it
is advisable to make these arrangements when you call
for an appointment.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
The manufacturer and its authorized dealers are vitally
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
with our products and services.
Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer.
We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an
authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and
are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality
service. The manufacturer’s authorized dealers have the
facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and
the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed
correctly and in a timely manner.
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 491
This is why you should always talk to an authorized
dealer’s service manager first. Most matters can be re-
solved with this process.
•
If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the
general manager or owner of the authorized dealer-
ship. They want to know if you need assistance.
•
If an authorized dealership is unable to resolve the
concern, you may contact the manufacturer’s customer
center.
Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer cen-
ter should include the following information:
•
Owner’s name and address
•
Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
•
Authorized dealership name
•
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
•
Vehicle delivery date and mileage
Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center
P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: (800) 992-1997
Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone: (800) 465–2001
In Mexico contact:
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D. F.
In Mexico City: 5081-7568
Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300
492 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommuni-
cation Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer
center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter
(TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the
manufacturer by dialing 1–800–380–CHRY.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
assistance can use the special needs relay service offered
by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711
and for Voice callers, dial 1 800 855-0511 to connect with
a Bell Relay Service operator.
Service Contract
You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle
to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected
repairs after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited
Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only
the manufacturer’s service contracts. If you purchased a
manufacturer’s service contract, you will receive Plan
Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail
within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you
have any questions about the service contract, call the
manufacturer’s Service Contract National Customer Hot-
line at 1-800-521-9922.
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service
contract that is not the manufacturer’s service contract. It
is not responsible for any service contract other than the
manufacturer’s service contract. If you purchased a ser-
vice contract that is not a manufacturer’s service contract,
and you require service after the manufacturer’s New
Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the
contract documents, and contact the person listed in
those documents.
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 493
has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
the ownership experience. You’ll be pleased with their
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related
concerns.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain
vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects, or other reproductive harm. In addi-
tion, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain
products of component wear contain, or emit, chemi-
cals known to the State of California to cause cancer
and birth defects, or other reproductive harm.
WARRANTY INFORMATION (U.S. Vehicles Only)
See the Warranty Information Booklet, located on the
DVD, for the terms and provisions of Chrysler Group
LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle.
MOPAR姞PARTS
MOPAR威fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are
available from an authorized dealer. They are recom-
mended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle
operating at its best.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
In the 50 United States and Washington, D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could
cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the
manufacturer.
494 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your authorized
dealer, and the manufacturer.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll free at 1–888–327–4236 (TTY: 1–800–424–
9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE.,
West Building, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also
obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
should contact the Customer Service Department imme-
diately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
defect to the Canadian government should write to:
Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations
and Recalls, 2780 Sheffield Road, Ottawa, Ontario K1B
3V9.
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mas-
tercard, American Express, and Discover orders are ac-
cepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call
for an order form.
NOTE: A street address is required when ordering
manuals (no P.O. Boxes).
•
Service Manuals
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 495
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the
information that students and professional technicians
need in diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving,
maintaining, servicing, and repairing Chrysler Group
LLC vehicles. A complete working knowledge of the
vehicle, system, and/or components is written in
straightforward language with illustrations, diagrams,
and charts.
•
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with dia-
grams, charts and detailed illustrations. These practi-
cal manuals make it easy for students and technicians
to find and fix problems on computer-controlled ve-
hicle systems and features. They show exactly how to
find and correct problems the first time, using step-by-
step troubleshooting and drivability procedures,
proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools
and equipment.
•
Owner’s Manuals
These Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the
assistance of service and engineering specialists to
acquaint you with specific Chrysler Group LLC ve-
hicles. Included are starting, operating, emergency
and maintenance procedures as well as specifications,
capabilities and safety tips.
Call toll free at:
•
1–800–890–4038 (U.S.)
•
1–800–387–1143 (Canada)
Or
Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:
•
www.techauthority.com
496 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories were established by
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The
specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manufacturer
in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.
All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety
requirements in addition to these grades.
Treadwear
The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course. For
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half
times as well on the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the
actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to variations in driving
habits, service practices, and differences in road charac-
teristics and climate.
Traction Grades
The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on
wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions
on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor-
mance.
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
peak traction characteristics.
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 497
Temperature Grades
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat
and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all
passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A repre-
sent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test
wheel, than the minimum required by law.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive load-
ing, either separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.
498 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
INDEX
10
About Your Brakes .......................327
ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System) ............ 329,332
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) ..........437
Adding Fuel ........................... 378
Additives, Fuel ......................... 375
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . 427
Air Conditioner Maintenance ............... 429
Air Conditioning ........................281
Air Conditioning Controls .................281
Air Conditioning Filter .................293,430
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips ............ 294
Air Conditioning Refrigerant ............. 429,430
Air Conditioning System ............. 281,285,429
Air Filter ..............................427
Air Pressure, Tires .......................353
Airbag ................................56
Airbag Deployment .......................70
Airbag Light ....................... 73,87,222
Airbag Maintenance ....................... 72
Airbag, Window (Side Curtain) ............... 60
Alarm, Panic ............................ 24
Alarm (Security Alarm) ................. 17,222
Alarm System (Security Alarm) ............... 17
Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle .............8
Antenna, Satellite Radio ...................275
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ...........436,437,465
Disposal ............................439
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ............ 329,332
Anti-Lock Warning Light .................. 213
Anti-Theft Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) ........ 17
Anti-Theft System .......................222
Appearance Care ........................ 448
Arming Theft System (Security Alarm) ......... 17
Assist, Hill Start ........................ 334
Assistance Towing ....................... 112
Auto Down Power Windows ................35
Auto Unlock, Doors .......................31
Automatic Dimming Mirror .................94
500 INDEX
Automatic Door Locks ...................30,31
Automatic Headlights ....................149
Automatic Oil Change Indicator ..........220,226
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) .........285
Automatic Transaxle ...................... 302
Special Additives ...................... 444
Automatic Transmission ................305,443
Adding Fluid ......................443,467
Fluid and Filter Changes ................. 443
Fluid Change ......................... 443
Fluid Level Check .....................443
Fluid Type ........................... 467
Gear Ranges .........................305
Special Additives ...................... 444
Torque Converter ...................... 309
Auxiliary Electrical Outlet (Power Outlet) ......189
Auxiliary Power Outlet ...................189
Axle Fluid ............................. 467
Axle Lubrication (Axle Fluid) ............... 467
Battery ...............................428
Emergency Starting .....................412
Gas Caution ..........................428
Jump Starting .........................412
Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) .......25
Belts, Seat ............................ 42,87
Body Mechanism Lubrication ...............431
B-Pillar Location ........................348
Brake Assist System ...................... 333
Brake Control System, Electronic .............331
Brake Fluid ............................ 467
Brake, Parking .......................... 327
Brake System ...........................441
Anti-Lock (ABS) ....................329,332
Fluid Check .......................441,467
Master Cylinder .......................441
Parking .............................327
Warning Light ........................ 221
Brakes ...............................441
10
INDEX 501
Brake/Transmission Interlock ............... 303
Break-In Recommendations, New Vehicle ........85
Bulb Replacement ....................... 461
Bulbs, Light .......................... 88,461
Calibration, Compass ..................... 229
Capacities, Fluid ........................465
Caps, Filler
Fuel ...............................378
Oil (Engine) .......................... 426
Power Steering ........................ 327
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) ...............438
Car Washes ............................449
Carbon Monoxide Warning ............... 86,377
Cargo Area Cover .......................197
Cargo Area Features ......................193
Cargo Compartment ......................193
Light ...............................154
Cargo Light ............................154
Cargo Load Floor ........................193
Cargo Tie-Downs ........................ 195
Cargo (Vehicle Loading) ...................380
Cellular Phone .......................... 98
Certification Label .......................380
Changing A Flat Tire .....................405
Chart, Tire Sizing ........................ 345
Check Engine Light
(Malfunction Indicator Light) .............210,421
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety ............. 85
Checks, Safety ...........................85
Child Restraint ....................75,76,80,83
Child Restraint Tether Anchors .............79,80
Child Safety Locks ........................ 32
Clean Air Gasoline .......................373
Cleaning
Windshield Wiper Blades ................431
Climate Control ......................... 281
Clock ........................237,251,254,263
502 INDEX
Coin Holder ........................... 192
Cold Weather Operation ...................300
Command-Trac Operation ..................309
Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance .............280
Compact Spare Tire ......................355
Compass ..............................229
Compass Calibration ..................... 229
Compass Variance ....................... 230
Computer, Trip/Travel .................... 227
Console ..............................192
Console, Floor .......................... 192
Contract, Service ........................ 493
Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) .......... 438
Cooling System ......................... 435
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) .............. 437
Coolant Capacity ...................... 465
Coolant Level ......................435,439
Disposal of Used Coolant ................ 439
Drain, Flush, and Refill .................. 436
Inspection ...........................439
Points to Remember ....................440
Pressure Cap ......................... 438
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) ......436,465,466
Corrosion Protection .....................448
Cruise Light ...........................220
Cupholders ............................191
Customer Assistance .....................491
Daytime Running Lights ...................151
Dealer Service .......................... 423
Defroster, Rear Window ...................200
Defroster, Windshield ................87,283,289
Delay (Intermittent) Wipers ................. 156
Diagnostic System, Onboard ................420
Dimmer Switch, Headlight .................153
Dipsticks
Oil (Engine) .......................... 424
Power Steering ........................ 327
10
INDEX 503
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ...............439
Engine Oil ........................... 426
Door Locks ............................. 28
Door Locks, Automatic .................... 30
Door Opener, Garage ..................... 173
Driving ...............................321
Off-Pavement .........................321
Off-Road ............................321
On Hills ............................321
Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow Standing
Water .............................. 321
When to Use Low Range .................321
Electric Remote Mirrors .................... 96
Electrical Outlet, Auxiliary (Power Outlet) ......189
Electrical Power Outlets ...................189
Electronic Brake Control System ............. 331
Anti-Lock Brake System .................332
Brake Assist System .................... 333
Electronic Roll Mitigation ................334
Electronic Stability Program ............... 339
Traction Control System .................332
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) .............334
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) ...... 160
Electronic Stability Program (ESP) ............339
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) .... 223
Emergency, In Case of
Hazard Warning Flasher ................. 404
Jacking .............................405
Jump Starting .........................412
Overheating ..........................404
Towing ............................. 414
Emission Control System Maintenance ...... 421,470
Engine ...............................419
Air Cleaner .......................... 427
Block Heater ......................... 301
Break-In Recommendations ................ 85
504 INDEX
Checking Oil Level ..................... 424
Compartment .........................419
Coolant (Antifreeze) ................. 435,466
Cooling .............................435
Exhaust Gas Caution .................. 86,377
Fails to Start .......................... 300
Flooded, Starting ...................... 300
Fuel Requirements ..................... 373
Jump Starting .........................412
Oil ........................... 424,465,466
Oil Change Interval ............... 220,226,425
Oil Filler Cap ......................... 426
Oil Filter ............................427
Oil Filter Disposal ..................... 426
Oil Selection ....................... 425,465
Oil Synthetic .........................426
Overheating ..........................404
Starting .............................299
Temperature Gauge ....................215
Engine Oil Viscosity ......................426
Engine Oil Viscosity Chart ................. 426
Enhanced Accident Response Feature ..........72
Entry System, Illuminated .................. 19
Ethanol ...............................374
Exhaust Gas Caution ................ 86,377,433
Exhaust System .......................86,433
Exterior Finish Care ......................449
Exterior Lights .......................... 88
Fabric Care ............................ 451
Filters
Air Cleaner .......................... 427
Air Conditioning .................... 293,430
Engine Oil ........................427,466
Engine Oil Disposal .................... 426
Finish Care ............................449
Flashers
Hazard Warning ....................... 404
10
INDEX 505
Turn Signal ................88,152,211,462,464
Flash-To-Pass ........................... 153
Flipper Glass, Liftgate ..................... 39
Flooded Engine Starting ................... 300
Floor Console ..........................192
Fluid, Brake ...........................467
Fluid Capacities .........................465
Fluid Leaks .............................88
Fluid Level Checks ....................444,445
Automatic Transmission ................. 443
Brake ..............................441
Cooling System .......................435
Engine Oil ........................... 424
Power Steering ........................ 327
Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts ..........466
Fog Light Service ........................ 463
Fog Lights .................... 148,152,211,463
Folding Rear Seat ........................139
Four Wheel Drive
Shifting .....................309,312,315,318
Systems ..........................309,315
Four Wheel Drive Operation ................309
Shifting into Transfer Case Neutral (N) .......397
Shifting out of Transfer Case Neutral (N) .....397
Front Axle (Differential) ................... 445
Fuel .................................373
Additives ............................375
Clean Air ............................ 373
Ethanol .............................374
Filler Cap (Gas Cap) ....................378
Gasoline ............................373
Gauge ..............................208
Materials Added ....................... 375
Methanol ............................374
Octane Rating ......................373,466
Requirements .........................373
Specifications .........................466
506 INDEX
Tank Capacity ........................ 465
Fuses ................................454
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink威) ...........173
Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) ............ 378,379,420
Gas Gauge (Fuel Gauge) ...................208
Gasoline, Clean Air ...................... 373
Gasoline (Fuel) .........................373
Gasoline, Reformulated ................... 373
Gauges
Coolant Temperature ...................215
Fuel ...............................208
Odometer ...........................218
Speedometer .........................211
Tachometer .......................... 214
Gear Ranges ...........................305
General Information ...............17,26,126,372
General Maintenance ..................... 423
Glass Cleaning .......................... 453
Gross Axle Weight Rating ...............380,383
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating ............. 380,382
GVWR ...............................380
Hands-Free Phone (uconnect威) ...............98
Hazard
Driving Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow
Standing Water ........................ 321
Hazard Warning Flasher ................... 404
Head Restraints .........................136
Head Rests ............................136
Headlights ..........................148,149
Automatic ...........................149
Bulb Replacement ...................... 461
Cleaning ............................452
Delay ..............................150
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch ........153
Lights On Reminder ....................151
On With Wipers .................... 150,159
10
INDEX 507
Passing .............................153
Replacing ...........................461
Switch ...........................148,149
Time Delay ..........................150
Heated Mirrors .......................... 97
Heated Seats ...........................138
Heater ...............................281
Heater, Engine Block .....................301
High Beam Indicator ..................... 211
High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer)
Switch ...............................153
Hill Descent Control ..................... 337
Hill Descent Control Indicator ............ 214,337
Hill Start Assist .........................334
Hitches
Trailer Towing ........................ 387
Holder, Coin ........................... 192
Holder, Cup ...........................191
HomeLink威(Garage Door Opener) Transmitter . . . 173
Hood Release .......................... 146
Ignition ...............................12
Key ................................ 12
Ignition Key Removal .....................12
Illuminated Entry ........................19
Immobilizer (Sentry Key) ................... 14
Infant Restraint ........................75,76
Inflation Pressure Tires ....................353
Information Center, Vehicle ................. 223
Inside Rearview Mirror ....................94
Instrument Cluster .................... 207,208
Instrument Panel and Controls .............. 206
Instrument Panel Cover ................... 451
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning .............453
Integrated Power Module (Fuses) ............454
Interior Appearance Care ..................451
Interior Lighting ........................ 148
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers) ...........156
508 INDEX
Introduction .............................4
Jack Location ........................... 406
Jack Operation .......................405,408
Jacking Instructions ......................408
Jump Starting .......................... 412
Key, Programming ........................ 16
Key, Replacement ........................15
Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) ...................14
Key-In Reminder ......................... 14
Keyless Entry System ......................19
Keys .................................12
Lane Change and Turn Signals .............. 152
Lane Change Assist ......................153
Lap/Shoulder Belts ....................... 42
LATCH
(Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren) .....79,80
Latches ................................88
Hood ..............................146
Lead Free Gasoline ...................... 373
Leaks, Fluid ............................88
Life of Tires ............................358
Liftgate ................................38
Liftgate Flipper Glass ......................39
Light Bulbs ..........................88,461
Lights ..............................88,148
Airbag ..........................73,87,222
Anti-Lock ...........................213
Automatic Headlights ................... 149
Back-Up ............................464
Battery Saver .........................154
Brake Warning ........................ 221
Bulb Replacement ...................... 461
Cargo .............................. 154
Cruise ..............................220
Daytime Running ......................151
10
INDEX 509
Dimmer Switch, Headlight ............. 148,153
Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Indicator . . . 339
Engine Temperature Warning .............. 215
Exterior ..............................88
Fog .......................... 152,211,463
Four-Wheel Drive Indicator ....214,215,217,313,319
Hazard Warning Flasher ................. 404
Headlight Switch ................... 148,149
Headlights ........................149,461
Headlights On Reminder ................. 151
Headlights On With Wipers ............150,159
High Beam ........................ 153,211
High Beam Indicator .................... 211
High Beam/Low Beam Select ............. 153
Hill Descent Control Indicator .......... 214,337
Illuminated Entry .......................19
Instrument Cluster .................. 148,208
Lights On Reminder ....................151
Low Fuel ............................ 208
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) ........ 210
Oil Pressure .......................... 213
Park ............................148,149
Passing .............................153
Rear Servicing ........................ 464
Rear Tail ............................ 464
Seat Belt Reminder ..................... 221
Service .............................461
Service Engine Soon (Malfunction Indicator) . . . 210
Side Marker ..........................462
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) ........208,363
Tow/Haul Indicator ....................214
Traction Control .......................339
Transfer Case ...................... 313,319
Turn Signal ................88,148,152,462,464
Vanity Mirror .......................... 97
Voltage ............................. 212
Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) .....208
Load Floor, Cargo ....................... 193
510 INDEX
Loading Vehicle ......................... 380
Tires ............................... 348
Locks .................................28
Auto Unlock .......................... 31
Automatic Door ........................ 30
Child Protection ........................ 32
Door ................................28
Power Door ........................... 30
Low Tire Pressure System .................. 363
Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren
(LATCH) ............................79,80
Lubrication, Body ....................... 431
Luggage Carrier ......................... 201
Lumbar Support ........................134
Maintenance Free Battery .................. 428
Maintenance, General .....................423
Maintenance Procedures ................... 423
Maintenance Schedule ....................470
Maintenance, Sunroof .....................182
Malfunction Indicator Light
(Check Engine) ....................... 210,421
Manual, Service ......................... 495
Manual Transmission
Lubricant Selection ..................... 467
Marker Lights, Side ......................462
Master Cylinder (Brakes) .................. 441
Memory Feature (Memory Seat) .............142
Memory Seat ........................... 142
Memory Seats and Radio ..................142
Methanol .............................374
Mini-Trip Computer ...................... 227
Mirrors ................................94
Automatic Dimming ..................... 94
Electric Powered ....................... 96
Electric Remote ........................ 96
Heated ..............................97
Outside ..............................95
10
INDEX 511
Rearview .............................94
Vanity ............................... 97
Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle .............8
Monitor, Tire Pressure System ............... 363
Mopar Parts ......................... 422,494
MTBE/ETBE ...........................374
Multi-Function Control Lever ...............148
New Vehicle Break-In Period ................85
Occupant Restraints ....................... 40
Occupant Restraints (Sedan) ................. 60
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) ............373,466
Odometer
Trip ................................217
Off-Pavement Driving (Off-Road) ............ 321
Off-Road Driving (Off-Pavement) ............ 321
Oil Change Indicator ..................220,226
Oil Change Indicator, Reset ..............220,226
Oil, Engine .........................424,466
Capacity ............................465
Change Interval ..................220,226,425
Checking ............................424
Dipstick .............................424
Disposal ............................426
Filter ............................427,466
Filter Disposal ........................426
Identification Logo ..................... 425
Materials Added to .....................426
Recommendation ...................425,465
Synthetic ............................426
Viscosity ......................... 426,465
Oil Filter, Change ........................ 427
Onboard Diagnostic System .............. 420,421
Opener, Garage Door (HomeLink威) ...........173
Operating Precautions .................... 420
Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) ............5
Outside Rearview Mirrors ..................95
512 INDEX
Overdrive ..........................220,307
Overdrive OFF Switch ....................307
Overheating, Engine ................... 216,404
Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) ......... 5,495
Paint Care ............................. 448
Paint Damage .......................... 448
Panic Alarm ............................ 24
Park Sense System, Rear ................... 163
Parking Brake ..........................327
Parking On Hill .........................327
Passing Light ...........................153
Personal Settings ........................231
Pets ..................................84
Pets, Transporting ........................84
Phone, Cellular ..........................98
Phone, Hands-Free (uconnect威) ...............98
Placard, Tire and Loading Information ......... 348
Polishing and Waxing .....................449
Power
Door Locks ...........................30
Mirrors ..............................96
Seats ...............................135
Steering ..........................325,327
Sunroof .............................180
Sunroof (Sky Slider) .................183,446
Windows ............................. 34
Power Steering Fluid .....................467
Pregnant Women and Seat Belts .............. 55
Preparation for Jacking ....................407
Pretensioners
Seat Belts ............................49
Programmable Electronic Features ............ 231
Programming Transmitters
(Remote Keyless Entry) ....................19
Radial Ply Tires .........................355
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) .......... 438
10
INDEX 513
Radio Remote Controls .................... 279
Radio, Satellite (uconnect威studios) ...........273
Rear Axle (Differential) .................... 445
Rear Park Sense System ...................163
Rear Seat, Folding ....................... 139
Rear Window Defroster ................... 200
Rear Window Features ....................199
Rear Wiper/Washer ...................... 199
Rearview Mirrors ........................94
Reclining Front Seats .....................133
Recreational Towing ......................397
Reformulated Gasoline ....................373
Refrigerant ............................430
Release, Hood ..........................146
Reminder, Lights On .....................151
Reminder, Seat Belt ....................... 53
Remote Control
Starting System ........................26
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) .................19
Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls ........279
Remote Starting System ....................26
Replacement Bulbs .......................461
Replacement Keys ........................ 15
Replacement Parts ....................... 422
Replacement Tires .......................359
Reporting Safety Defects ...................494
Resetting Oil Change Indicator ...........220,226
Restraint, Head .........................136
Restraints, Child .........................75
Restraints, Occupant ...................... 40
Retractable Cargo Area Cover ...............197
Roll Over Warning ........................ 4
Roof
Sky Slider Power ...................183,446
Roof Type Carrier .......................201
Rotation, Tires .......................... 361
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle ................. 87
514 INDEX
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle ...............88
Safety Defects, Reporting .................. 494
Safety, Exhaust Gas .......................86
Safety Information, Tire ...................343
Safety Tips .............................85
Satellite Radio Antenna ................... 275
Satellite Radio (uconnect威studios) ...........273
Schedule, Maintenance .................... 470
Seat Belt Maintenance .................... 453
Seat Belt Reminder ....................... 53
Seat Belts ............................42,87
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage ........ 47
And Pregnant Women ...................55
Child Restraint .......................75,83
Extender .............................56
Front Seat ............................42
Inspection ............................87
Pretensioners ..........................49
Reminder ............................221
Shoulder Belt Anchorage ................. 47
Untwisting Procedure .................... 48
Seats .................................131
Adjustment ..........................131
Easy Entry ........................... 145
Head Restraints ....................... 136
Heated .............................138
Height Adjustment .....................135
Lumbar Support ....................... 134
Memory ............................142
Power ..............................135
Rear Folding .........................139
Reclining ............................133
Seatback Release ....................... 139
Tilting .............................. 135
Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) .............17,222
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) .......... 436,466
Selection of Oil ......................... 425
Selec-Trac Operation ......................315
10
INDEX 515
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) ................... 14
Sentry Key Programming ................... 16
Sentry Key Replacement ...................15
Service Assistance ....................... 491
Service Contract .........................493
Service Engine Soon Light
(Malfunction Indicator) .................... 210
Service Manuals ........................ 495
Setting the Clock ................ 237,251,254,263
Settings, Personal ........................ 231
Shift Lock Manual Override ................303
Shifting
Automatic Transmission ................. 305
Transfer Case .................309,312,315,318
Shoulder Belts ...........................42
Side View Mirror Adjustment ................ 95
Side Window Demisters (Defrosters) ..........292
Signals, Turn ................. 88,152,211,462,464
Sky Slider Power Roof .................183,446
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) .................360
Spare Tire .......................... 355,406
Spark Plugs ............................466
Specifications
Fuel (Gasoline) ........................466
Oil .............................. 425,466
Speed Control (Cruise Control) ..............160
Speedometer ...........................211
Starting .............................26,299
Cold Weather .........................300
Emergency (Jump Starting) ...............412
Engine Block Heater .................... 301
Engine Fails to Start .................... 300
Remote ..............................26
Starting and Operating ....................299
Starting Procedures ...................... 299
Steering
Power ...........................325,327
Tilt Column ..........................159
516 INDEX
Wheel, Tilt ........................... 159
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System
Controls ..............................279
Storage ...............................192
Storage Bin ............................192
Storage, Vehicle .........................292
Sun Roof ..............................180
Sun Roof (Sky Slider Power) ............. 183,446
Sun Visor Extension ....................... 97
Sunroof Maintenance ..................... 182
Supplemental Restraint System - Airbag ........56
Synthetic Engine Oil ...................... 426
System, Remote Starting ....................26
Tachometer ............................ 214
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) ........285
Temperature Gauge, Engine Coolant .......... 215
Tether Anchor, Child Restraint ...............79
Theft Alarm (Security Alarm) ................17
Theft System (Security Alarm) ...............17
Tie Down Hooks, Cargo ................... 195
Tilt Steering Column .....................159
Time Delay, Headlight .................... 150
Tip Start ..............................299
Tire and Loading Information Placard .........348
Tire Identification Number (TIN) .............347
Tire Markings .......................... 343
Tire Safety Information ....................343
Tires ............................ 88,352,497
Air Pressure ..........................353
Chains ..............................360
Changing ............................405
Compact Spare ........................355
General Information ....................352
High Speed ..........................355
Inflation Pressures .....................353
Jacking .............................405
Life of Tires ..........................358
10
INDEX 517
Load Capacity ........................348
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) ........... 363
Pressure Warning Light ..................208
Quality Grading ....................... 497
Radial ..............................355
Replacement .........................359
Rotation ............................361
Safety ..............................343
Sizes ...............................345
Spare Tire ........................... 406
Spinning ............................356
Tread Wear Indicators ................... 357
To Open Hood ..........................146
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight ..............390
Torque Converter Clutch .................. 309
Tow/Haul Indicator Light ................. 214
Towing ............................... 382
24-Hour Towing Assistance ............... 112
Behind a Motor Home .................. 397
Disabled Vehicle ....................... 414
Guide ..............................388
Recreational ..........................397
Weight .............................. 388
Towing Assistance ....................... 112
Towing Vehicle Behind a Motor Home ......... 397
Traction Control ......................... 332
Trailer Towing ..........................382
Cooling System Tips .................... 397
Hitches .............................387
Minimum Requirements .................391
Trailer and Tongue Weight ............... 390
Wiring .............................. 394
Trailer Towing Guide ..................... 388
Trailer Weight ..........................388
Transaxle ............................. 302
Automatic ...........................302
Operation ...........................302
Transfer Case ........................... 444
518 INDEX
Fluid ............................444,467
Four-Wheel-Drive Operation ..............309
Maintenance .........................444
Transmission ........................... 305
Automatic ...........................305
Fluid ...............................467
Maintenance .........................443
Transmitter Battery Service
(Remote Keyless Entry) ....................25
Transmitter, Garage Door Opener (HomeLink威) . . 173
Transmitter Programming
(Remote Keyless Entry) ....................19
Transmitter, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) ........ 19
Tread Wear Indicators .................... 357
Trip Odometer ..........................218
Trip Odometer Reset Button ................217
Turn Signals ................ 148,152,211,462,464
uconnect威(Hands-Free Phone) ............... 98
Uniform Tire Quality Grades ................497
Universal Transmitter .....................173
Unleaded Gasoline ....................... 373
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt .............. 48
Upholstery Care ........................ 451
Vanity Mirrors ........................... 97
Variance, Compass ....................... 230
Vehicle Certification Label ................. 380
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ............ 7
Vehicle Loading ......................348,380
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations .............. 8
Vehicle Storage ......................... 292
Vehicle Theft Alarm (Security Alarm) .......... 17
Viscosity, Engine Oil ......................426
Voice Recognition System (VR) .............. 126
Warning Flasher, Hazard .................. 404
10
INDEX 519
Warning Lights
(Instrument Cluster Description) .............208
Warning, Roll Over ........................4
Warnings and Cautions .....................7
Warranty Information ..................... 494
Washers, Windshield ................155,157,432
Water
Driving Through ...................... 321
Waxing and Polishing .....................449
Wheel and Wheel Trim .................... 450
Wheel and Wheel Trim Care ................450
Wind Buffeting .....................38,182,188
Window Fogging ........................292
Windows .............................. 34
Power ...............................34
Windshield Defroster ................ 87,283,289
Windshield Washers ................ 155,157,432
Fluid ...............................432
Windshield Wiper Blades ..................431
Windshield Wipers ....................... 155
Wiper Blade Replacement ..................431
Wiper, Delay ...........................156
Wiper, Rear ............................199
Wipers, Intermittent ......................156
Wrecker Towing .........................414
520 INDEX
Chrysler Group LLC
10KK74-126-AC 3rd Edition Printed in U.S.A.
10KK74-126-AD
4th Edition

Navigation menu